GKCx Second Life Curriculum by Jeremy Kemp

GKCx - 1 of 438

GKCx - 2 of 438

GKCx Overview The “Global Kids Curriculum / Extended” project started the week after GKids released this amazing resource to the Second Life education community in Sept, ‘08. Jeremy Kemp and Stephen Kemp (yes they are related) donated time to extend the PDF curriculum and create additional resources like this bookmarked and indexed file, a wiki, Second Life textures, etc. We are providing this service independently of Global Kids in an officially unofficial way. This GKCx project is non-commercial. We give full credit to Barry and Joyce at GKids for an amazing set of original documents. Our files are available for all to repurpose. See more about the project at: http://www.simteach.com/gkcx

Dedicated to our fathers.

GKCx by Jeremy Kemp, Stephen Kemp is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Noncommercial-Share Alike 3.0 United States License.

GKCx - 3 of 438

Level Abstracts Level 1 AVATAR: Choosing a Look, Shape, Skin, Eyes, Hair, Saving & Switching. WALKING & FLYING: Walk, Turn, Run, Sit, Fly. CLOSER LOOK: Basic Camera, Adv. Camera. CHAT: Basics, IM/Private, History. Level 2 INVENTORY: Library vs. Personal, Search, Rezzing, Deleting, Notecards, Exploring. FRIENDS: Calling Cards, Friendship/Permissions/Invitation. BUILDING: Rezzing, Moving & Rotating, Resizing, Linking a Prim. CLOTHING: Changing, Modifying, Making New. Level 3 BUILDING: Basic Shapes, Attachment Points, Taper, Top Shear and Dimple. INSTANT MESSAGING: More ways, to Email, a Group. SNAPSHOTS: to Disk, to Inventory, in Your Profile, Postcard, Giving. INTRO TEXTURES: Finding and Using, Color and Transparency, Repeats, Offsets. Level 4 BUILDING: Parameters, Flexi, Light, Sculpted. MAPS: Intro, World, Legend, Zooming & Moving, Landmarks, Friends and Search, Coordinates, SLURL. TELEPORTING & LANDMARKS: Set Home, Landmarks, Teleporting. TEXTURES: Flicker, Shiny & Bumpy, Light & Shadow, Finding & Uploading, Using Wisely. Level 5 ATTACHMENTS: Attach/Detaching, Points. BUILDING: Permissions, One Prim, Grid, Fewer prims. GROUPS: Intro, Basic Info, Details, Communication, Land. SEARCH: Intro, Events, Places, Land Sales, People. Level 6 AVATAR PROFILE: 2nd Life Info, Website, Interests, Picks, Advertising, Real Life Information. INVENTORY 2: Subfolders, Multiple Windows, Packing Stuff Away, Sorting Items, Sorting. SNAPSHOTS: Previewing, Sizing, Quality, of the Interface. Level 7 GESTURES: Using, Modifying Existing, Making New. HELP & RESOURCES: Inworld Help, Online Support, Forums, Additional, Second Life Grid. MONEY: Getting, Selling & Buying Items. Level 8 ANIMATIONS: Using, Stopping. CREATING A GROUP: Intro, Roles, Inviting Members, Proposals, Land and L$. ABOUT LAND: Your Land, Objects, Managing Media. Level 9 VOICE: Preferences, With People Nearby, to Instant Message. ESTATES: Region Powers, Managing Lag, Ground Textures & Terrain, Estate Access, Covenants. TERRAFORMING: Beginning, Sculpting Land, Subdividing and Joining Land.

GKCx - 4 of 438

Level Table of Contents Level 1 Avatar: Appearance ........................................................................................................2 Getting Around: Walking & Flying ...........................................................................18 Getting Around: Taking A Closer Look...................................................................24 Communicating: Chat ..................................................................................................30 Level 2 Finding Stuff: Inventory Part 1 ....................................................................................2 Communicating: Friends .............................................................................................16 An Introduction To Building......................................................................................27 Avatar: Clothing............................................................................................................40 Level 3 Building: Playing With Shapes ......................................................................................2 Communicating: Instant Messaging...........................................................................17 Media: Snapshots ..........................................................................................................26 Textures: An Introduction To Textures ...................................................................39 Level 4 Building: Additional Features .......................................................................................2 Getting Around: Map And Mini-Map.......................................................................16 Teleporting & Landmarks ...........................................................................................34 Textures: Beyond The Basics......................................................................................44 Level 5 Avatar: Attachments.......................................................................................................2 Building: Power Building...............................................................................................9 Communication: Joining A Group ............................................................................23 Getting Around: Search...............................................................................................39 Level 6 Avatar: Profile .................................................................................................................2 Finding Stuff: Inventory Part 2 ..................................................................................16 Media: Snapshots Part 2 ..............................................................................................29 Level 7 Avatar: Gestures .............................................................................................................2 Finding Stuff: Help and Other Resources ................................................................13 Finding Stuff: Money ...................................................................................................29 Level 8 Avatar: Animations.........................................................................................................2 Communication: Creating A Group ............................................................................9 Land: About Land ........................................................................................................26 Level 9 Communication: Voice ..................................................................................................2 Land: Introduction To Estates ...................................................................................13 Land: Terraforming ......................................................................................................26

GKCx - 5 of 438

Global Kids' Second Life Curriculum LESSON PLANS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; LEVEL 1

Global Kids' Second Life Curriculum. Fall, 2007. ÂŠ2007.

Global Kids, Inc. 137 East 25th Street, 2nd Floor, New York, NY 10010 Phone: 212-226-0130 Email: info@globalkids.org ABOUT GLOBAL KIDS, INC. Founded in 1991, Global Kids aims to educate and inspire urban youth to become successful students, community leaders, and global citizens. Through dynamic, content-rich learning experiences grounded in a youth development approach, Global Kids participants develop the knowledge, skills, and values necessary for effective citizenship and success in the sophisticated workplace of the 21st Century. Annually, Global Kids reaches over 19,000 youth and 1,000 educators through its youth and professional development programs, and several million others through its Online Leadership Program. Over 90% of the seniors in Global Kids Leadership Program graduate from high school and go on to college and receive financial aid.

GKCx - 7 of 438

TABLE OF CONTENTS

STANDARDS

Learning Standards addressed in this curriculum AVATAR: APPEARANCE

Module Overview 1-1.0 Introduction 1-1.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 1-1.0.2 Action Plan

Choosing a Look 1-1.1 Introduction 1-1.1.1 Instruction 1-1.1.2 Practice 1-1.1.3 Action Plan

Changing Your Shape

1 2

2 2 2 3

5 5 5 5 6

1-1.2 Introduction 1-1.2.1 Instruction 1-1.2.2 Practice 1-1.2.3 Action Plan

7 7 7 9

Changing Your Skin

1-1.3 Introduction 1-1.3.1 Instruction 1-1.3.2 Practice 1-1.3.3 Action Plan

10 10 10 11

Changing Your Eyes

1-1.4 Introduction 1-1.4.1 Instruction 1-1.4.2 Practice 1-1.4.3 Action Plan

12 12 12 13

Changing Your Hair

1-1.5 Introduction 1-1.5.1 Instruction 1.5.2 Practice 1-1.5.3 Action Plan

14 14 14 15

Saving and Switching Avatars 1-1.6 Introduction 1-1.6.1 Instruction 1-1.6.2 Practice 1-1.6.3 Action Plan

GETTING AROUND: WALKING & FLYING

Module Overview 1-2.0 Introduction 1-2.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 1-2.0.2 Action Plan

16 16 16 16 17

18 18 18 19

GKCx - 8 of 438

Walk, Turn, Run, Sit

1-2.1 Introduction 1-2.1.1 Instruction 1-2.1.2 Practice 1-2.1.3 Action Plan

20 20 20 21

Fly

22 1-2.2 Introduction 1-2.2.1 Instruction 1-2.2.2 Practice 1-2.2.3 Action Plan

GETTING AROUND: TAKING A CLOSER LOOK

Module Overview 1-3.0 Introduction 1-3.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 1-3.0.2 Action Plan

22 22 22 23

24 24 24 25

Basic Camera Controls

1-3.1 Introduction 1-3.1.1 Instruction 1-3.1.2 Practice 1-3.1.3 Action Plan

26 26 26 27

Advanced Camera Controls 1-3.2 Introduction 1-3.2.1 Instruction 1-3.2.2 Practice 1-3.2.3 Action Plan

28 28 28 28 29

COMMUNICATING: CHAT

Module Overview

1-4.0 Introduction 1-4.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 1-4.0.2 Action Plan

The Basics 1-4.1 Introduction 1-4.1.1 Instruction 1-4.1.2 Practice 1-4.1.3 Action Plan

IM (Private Chat) 1-4.2 Introduction 1-4.2.1 Instruction 1-4.2.2 Practice 1-4.2.3 Action Plan

Chat History 1-4.3 Introduction 1-4.3.1 Instruction 1-4.3.2 Practice 1-4.3.3 Action Plan

30 30 31

33 33 33 33 34

35 35 35 35 36

37 37 37 37 39

GKCx - 9 of 438

Standards The following is a list of standards from the McRel Learning Standards, as well as 21st Century Skills, which you can expect the modules of this curriculum to address. This list is a collection of the most common and frequent standards met in each module. In each module’s overview you will find a more comprehensive list of standards addressed within that module. Along with the following standards, many modules will also address the areas of math, engineering, the arts, geography, civics, behavioral studies, and life work.

Learning Standards addressed in this curriculum McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing - Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Language Arts – Listening and Speaking – Uses listening and speaking strategies for different purposes - Adjusts message wording and delivery to particular audiences and for particular purposes (e.g., to defend a position, to entertain, to inform, to persuade) o Arts and Communication – Understands the principles, processes, and products associated with arts and communication media o Behavioral Studies – Understands that group and cultural influences contribute to human development, identity and behavior. o Technology – Understands the relationships among science, technology, society, and the individual - Observes common courtesies and acceptable use policies while telecomputing o Technology - Knows the characteristics and uses of computer hardware and operating systems - Knows features and uses of current and emerging technology related to computing o Working with Others – Displays effective interpersonal communication skills - Knows strategies to effectively communicate in a variety of settings (e.g., selects appropriate strategy for audience and situation) 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

GKCx - 10 of 438

Avatar: Appearance Module Overview LEVEL: 1 MODULE: AVATAR: APPEARANCE – OVERVIEW

1-1.0 Introduction Welcome to Second Life! Just as in your first, or “real,” life you will have a visual representation of yourself, called an Avatar. Unlike real life, however, you can quickly and endlessly change how your avatar looks. When you first create an avatar in Second Life, it looks like everyone else who is new! By the time you finish this module, you will be well on your way to customizing your avatar to reflect your unique personality.

1-1.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing: Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing; uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Arts and Communication: Understands the principles, processes, and products associated with arts and communication media o Behavioral Studies: Understands that group and cultural influences contribute to human development, identity and behavior. 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 11 of 438

POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Choosing a name and beginning look for your avatar o Changing and saving your avatar’s shape, skin, eyes and hair o Quickly switching between different avatar looks You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Creating your avatar o Customizing your avatar’s shape, skin, eyes, and hair using the Appearance menu sliders o Switching your primary avatar look to something very different and reflecting on the experience Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o Absolutely nothing! THIS is the beginning… MATERIALS: Item

Location

The Second Life website An Avatar

http://www.secondlife.com Created when you create an account

1-1.0.2 Action Plan

TERMS: Avatar: A visual 3D representation of yourself. Attachment: An object that’s attached to, but not part of, an avatar. Library: Inventory items already given to you and located in the Inventory. My Inventory: Items you collect or create; also located in the Inventory.

Before you begin any missions, let’s see if you’ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: What would it be like to choose a different look for your avatar? Perhaps someone who differs visually from you – someone with a different race, ethnicity or gender than yourself. Make an avatar to reflect that “different” person. Walk around Second Life and notice if and how you’re treated differently.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 12 of 438

SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Show a few people your new avatar! Blog about your experience being “different”. In what ways were you different? Why did you make those choices? How did it make you feel? Did people treat you differently than you had anticipated?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 13 of 438

Avatar: Appearance Choosing a Look LEVEL: 1 MODULE: AVATAR: APPEARANCE – MISSION 1

1-1.1 Introduction In this very first mission, you will choose your avatar name and beginning look. In the following missions, you will learn how to customize your avatar. NOTE: If you’ve already registered and created an avatar, please go directly to mission 2.

1-1.1.1 Instruction Before you can begin to modify your avatar, you need a beginning, or default avatar and avatar name. Let’s begin!

1-1.1.2 Practice Try this: As you proceed through the registration process detailed on www.secondlife.com (for those 13-17 years old, www.teen.secondlife.com), please pay attention to the following: Step 1: Choosing a Name You can change how your avatar looks endlessly! However, you CANNOT change your avatar name once you’ve chosen it! Step 2: Some tips to remember as you choose your avatar name: o Last name first: The sign up process offers you a list of last names. Choose one. o First name: Now, in the first name field, type a first name you like. Some things to remember: •

Length: Your friends will be typing it constantly. Either choose a short name or be willing to live with a shortened nickname.

•

It’s not an IM name: Since each last name is only used for a limited number of avatars, you don’t have to add numbers like Joe246 or Bambi73.

o Check for availability: Below the name fields is a line that allows you to check for availability. Doing this now will save time later in the sign-up process. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 6 of 438

FOREWORD Global Kids, Inc. is a nationally recognized leader in using digital media to promote global awareness and youth civic engagement. Global Kids’ Online Leadership Program integrates a youth development approach and international and public policy issues into youth media programs that build digital literacy and STEM skills, foster substantive dialogues, develop resources for educators, and promote civic participation. In 2006, following research into the educational potential of virtual worlds, Global Kids became the first non-profit to develop a dedicated space for conducting programming in the virtual world of Teen Second Life (TSL). This work has been made possible through funding by or partnerships with the MacArthur Foundation, UNICEF, the U.S. Holocaust Memorial Museum, the Field Museum, IBM, the Motorola Foundation, the Robert Wood Johnson Foundation, Ashoka’s Youth Ventures, the Microsoft Corporation, and a variety of school and after-school programs, amongst others. More specifically, Global Kids conducts intensive leadership programming for youth, bringing teenagers from its New York-based programs into the virtual world, working with youth already involved with TSL, and collaborating remotely with youth organized through schools, museums, and libraries. Global Kids works with adults as well, conducting programs within Second Life on a range of issues, streaming the audio and video of major events and conferences into Second Life, and offering a range of professional development services, such as managing RezEd.org, the hub for learning and virtual worlds. Global Kids’ Second Life Curriculum is a key component of Global Kids professional development services. They cover everything an educator or student would need to know to use Second Life, whether on their own or within an educational setting. At the same time, it teaches global literacy skills. Components of the curriculum can be used as hand-outs to develop specific Second Life-specific skills or within a broader educational program designed to teach such subjects as science, filmmaking or literature. The curriculum is composed of nine sequential “levels.” Each level is composed of modules which, in turn, are composed of individual lesson plans or “missions”. In total there are 163 missions. We offer these missions under a Creative Commons license (attribution-noncommercial-share alike) and encourage educators to adapt this curriculum in any way they see fit, but to always give credit to Global Kids and to share significant changes or best practices with other professionals implementing the curriculum at RezEd.org. Building on its nationally recognized approach to using virtual worlds to promote global awareness and civic engagement, Global Kids offers services to nonprofits, educational organizations, and other institutions interested in using Second Life and other virtual worlds to extend their work. While Global Kids is proud to offer Global Kids’ Second Life Curriculum for free to all qualified educational institutions, Global Kids can be retained to adapt it for specific uses or train others in its use. More information can be found at GlobalKids.org/?id=50. To download additional copies of the curriculum, please visit GlobalKids.org/?id=117.

This curriculum was developed by Global Kids Staff and co-produced with Cathy Arreguin. We are grateful to Kate Farrell, Sean Farrell, Blueman Steele, Jeremy Koester, Ross Perkins, Jonathan Richter, John Wallace, the Second Life Educators Listserv, and countless beta testers.

GKCx - 14 of 438

Do this now: Choose a name, check for availability and commit to it! Step 3: Once you have a unique name that pleases you, continue the sign-up process until you are given a choice of default avatars. Step 4: Choosing a Default Avatar The list of avatars presented you will include male, female, furry and who knows what else. Step 5: Some tips to remember as you choose your default avatar look: o It can ALL be changed: Unlike your name, you will soon be able to change your appearance, clothing, gender and species anytime you wish. o Other looks: All the other default avatar options are given to you and can be found in your beginning inventory once you are “born” or “rezzed” in-world for the first time. You get everything! o The fun is in the tweaking: So, choose a look and let’s get going! Do this now: Pick a look, commit to it, and begin the great adventure of modifying your avatar!

1-1.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Congratulations, you’ve created your avatar! Normally in this section, you will be given ideas for extra practice. No need this time At this point, your avatar may be standing in Second Life for the very first time. If you need to log off at this time, don’t worry. Your avatar will be standing right there waiting for you when you next log in. Otherwise, continue to mission 2.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 15 of 438

Avatar: Appearance Changing Your Shape LEVEL: 1 MODULE: AVATAR: APPEARANCE – MISSION 2

1-1.2 Introduction Now that you have a default avatar, it’s time to start customizing it to your liking! Fortunately, Second Life has built-in tools that allow you to change your avatar in multiple ways. In addition, you can create multiple looks for your avatar, save them in your inventory and change your look whenever you like. This mission will show you how to change the shape of your avatar.

1-1.2.1 Instruction Once you’ve logged in to Second Life, you will see your avatar standing with its back to you a few feet ahead. If you’ve just begun your Second Life journey, you will also see that other new folks may look very similar to you! The key to changing your look is in using controls (Appearance Menu sliders) to adjust your shape and other features.

1-1.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Access the Appearance menu There are two ways to bring up the Appearance menu: o Using the top menu bar: •

Edit > Appearance

o Using the Pie Menu: R-click (Mac: Cmd-click) on your avatar •

Pie Menu > Appearance

In both cases, choosing Appearance will open the Appearance menu.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 16 of 438

Step 2: Finding the Shape sliders By default, the Shape button is chosen for you on the left top when you open the Appearance menu. On the right side you will see a list of nine areas you can choose when modifying your shape: o Body, Head, Eyes, Ears, Nose, Mouth, Chin, Torso, Legs.

By default, the first button, Body, is chosen for you. Each specific Body characteristic can be modified by moving the slider back and forth or by typing in a specific number between 1-100. Try it now: As you move the sliders back and forth, you will see your avatar change in real time. Tip: As you try all the buttons in the shape section, you will see that some choices affect others. You might find that going back to the overall Body button for a final adjustment when youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;re done lends that final touch you were striving for. Step 3: Other Shape options in the Appearance menu Two other options in the Appearance pane can help you achieve your final look. 1. Female/Male Radio buttons: Located under the nine Shape buttons, these will quickly give your avatar a basic look, which you can refine and modify. 2. Randomize Button: Just below, the Randomize button is great if you want to try out some wild looks. Repeatedly clicking on the Randomize button might give you avatar ideas you never considered! Step 4: Saving your Avatar Shape After all your hard work, you will want to save your avatarâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s shape. You can save multiple shapes and change them whenever you like. To save a new shape: 1. Choose the Save As button below the sliders. A window will appear with a default name New Shape.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 17 of 438

2. Double-click on New Shape and rename it with a name you’ll remember! You will then be able to find it in your Inventory easily. Try it now: Modify your shape to your liking and save with a unique name. If you need to log off during this time, make sure to save your work before exiting Second Life.

1-1.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Don’t be surprised if you find yourself changing your avatar’s look over time. If you’d like, make an avatar shape very different from your first one. Make sure to name and save it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 18 of 438

Avatar: Appearance Changing Your Skin LEVEL: 1 MODULE: AVATAR: APPEARANCE – MISSION 3

1-1.3 Introduction Shape isn’t everything. The Appearance menu includes many features that will allow you to change the shade or even color of your avatar.

1-1.3.1 Instruction As you discovered in the last mission, using the Appearance menu to modify an avatar’s shape is a bit of an art. In this mission, we will use a button with fewer options: the Skin button. Both Shapes and Skins are considered independent parts of your avatar and are saved separately. You can mix and match! After creating a new Skin for yourself, you will again save it to your Inventory.

1-1.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Opening the Appearance Menu As in the last mission, open up your Appearance menu. Just for practice, can you open it using both methods? Step 2: Finding the Skin sliders Click on the Skin button just below the Shape button in the upper left of the Appearance menu. You will see a number of sliders similar to what you saw when you accessed the Shape button. Step 3: Getting rid of default make-up Your default avatar may come with some sort of make-up. You will be able to tell if the square box labeled “Head Tattoo” has a pattern in it, like the example. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 19 of 438

If you want to get rid of that make-up and start fresh, just press the Randomize button! Caution: Once you get rid of that make-up, you canâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t undo. (There is no undo button!) Step 4: Starting Fresh Now comes the fun part! The Skin sliders have four main sections if you choose a female avatar. Males do not get the Makeup sliders. o Skin Color, Face Detail, Makeup, and Body Detail. Try it now: Using all the Skin sliders, modify your avatar to your liking. Step 5: Save! Just as you did with your completed Shapes, Save your completed Skin and rename with a unique name.

1-1.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Your avatar is starting to reflect your own creativity! Does it look like how you look in real life, or is it very different? If youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;d like, create a skin that is very different from your first one.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 20 of 438

Avatar: Appearance Changing Your Eyes LEVEL: 1 MODULE: AVATAR: APPEARANCE – MISSION 4

1-1.4 Introduction Some have said that eyes are a window to the soul. Well, maybe that’s not true for your avatar, but eyes are yet another feature you can customize as an individual avatar part.

1-1.4.1 Instruction In this mission, you will use the Appearance menu to modify your avatar’s eyes. Let’s get going!

1-1.4.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Open the Appearance menu As in the prior missions, open the Appearance menu. Step 2: Finding the Eyes sliders In the upper left of the Appearance pane, you will find the Eyes button. Choose it now. Step 3: Modifying Eyes Just as with the Shape and Skin sliders, you will see a couple of options you can choose to change the look of your avatar’s eyes. Eye Color, Eye Brightness Step 4: Using the Randomize button You can also choose Randomize to see what crazy combination comes up! Some of them are actually quite beautiful. Try this now: Customize a new set of eyes for your avatar. Step 5: Save! Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 21 of 438

Eyes are saved as separate from both Shapes and Skins. Use the Save As button and give your eyes a great name!

1-1.4.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Some people like colored contact lenses to match their mood or outfit. You can do the same if you want. How do your eyes fit the personality of your avatar?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 22 of 438

Avatar: Appearance Changing Your Hair LEVEL: 1 MODULE: AVATAR: APPEARANCE – MISSION 5

1-1.5 Introduction Your avatar need never have a bad hair day - unless you want it to! Hair is the last avatar part that is saved individually. Like all the others avatar parts you’ve worked with in this module, hair can be mixed and matched endlessly.

1-1.5.1 Instruction The Hair sliders have many options from which to create your ultimate hairstyle. In addition, if you are working with a male avatar, you will have the option of playing around with facial hair. The Hair sliders work best when you’re willing to experiment a bit. So… let’s get to it.

1.5.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Open the Appearance menu. Step 2: Find the Hair sliders Just like the other missions, you will find the Hair button in the top left of the Appearance menu. Step 3: Modifying Hair Your slider options include: Color, Style, Eyebrows and, if you are working on a male avatar, Facial Hair. Try it now: Use the different Hair sliders to create a hairstyle that fits your avatar! Tip: Some of you may have the following problem: Hair Attachments Step 4: Removing Hair Attachments Remember the beginning makeup problem in the Skin mission? A beginning look, or texture, had already been applied to the avatar. In that case, we used the Randomize button to start fresh. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 23 of 438

In the same way, your default avatar might have come with things attached to it, called Attachments. An Attachment is any object that is stuck to your avatar, but not a part of it. Attachments can be made to look like belts, or jewelry, or in this case… HAIR! Hair attachments cannot be modified using the Hair slider controls. If your default avatar came with messy pigtails, for example, it’s likely that they are attachments. If you don’t want them, here’s what to do: 1. Carefully R-click (Mac: Cmd-click) on the hair attachment you want to get rid of. It will then have a yellow outline around it to show it’s selected. 2. A pie menu will come up with Detach as one option. Select Detach. Note: Some facial hair, such as men’s beards, are not attachments, they are modified using the Facial Hair sliders. Step 5: Randomize If you’re still stuck and need a little creative coiffure help, try Randomize and see what you get! Step 6: Save Save early, save often… and always with a unique name.

1-1.5.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Remember what your avatar looked like the first time you saw it? What does it look like now? Just as with your other avatar body parts, you can have as many hairstyles as you wish and change them on a whim. If you feel the need, create a few more.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 24 of 438

Avatar: Appearance Saving and Switching Avatars LEVEL: 1 MODULE: AVATAR: APPEARANCE – MISSION 6

1-1.6 Introduction YOU rock! A short time ago, your avatar looked like it was one of a million. Now, it looks like one in a million! Good job! You may even have multiple Shapes, Skins, Eyes and Hairstyles to combine into new characters. But what good is all that great stuff if you can’t find it and try it on quickly. That’s what this mission is all about.

1-1.6.1 Instruction It’s very easy to change looks on the fly if you 1) Know where your avatar parts are located and 2) Know how to quickly change those parts. All the avatar parts from all the default avatars can be found in the Library section of your Inventory. All the avatar parts you have created and saved are in the My Inventory section of your Inventory. Let’s practice finding those parts and putting them on.

1-1.6.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Opening Inventory Select the Inventory button at the lower right of your screen. You can also choose View > Inventory from your top menu bar. Opening your Inventory will show the two main folders: Library and My Inventory. Step 2: Finding your Body Parts Clicking once on either of those folders will show you a list of subfolders. One of those subfolders is called Body Parts. That’s where all your avatar parts go when you save them. Try it now: Open your Inventory, click on My Inventory, click on Body Parts and find the parts you’ve been saving. (Aren’t you glad you gave them Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 25 of 438

good names?) Step 3: Switching a Body Part There are two easy ways to switch a body part. 1. Double-click on the name of the new body part 2. Click and drag that body part right onto your avatar. (Don’t worry. It’s just a copy. You won’t lose it from your Inventory) Try it now: Find an extra body part you created and either double-click it or drag it onto your avatar. Depending on your computer system, it might talk a few seconds to see the change. Tip: Body parts you are wearing will show up in bold in your Inventory. Another Tip: You can scavenge all the default avatars in your Library and mix and match parts! Think of it as your own personal avatar junkyard. If you don’t find the parts you need under Library > Body Parts, look in Library > Clothing for default avatar folders.

1-1.6.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: Congratulations! You are an official Avatar Modifier! Here are some questions and an assignment for you: Why did you pick the avatar look you did? What would it be like to choose someone different? Perhaps someone who differs visually from you – someone with a different race, ethnicity or gender than yourself. Make an avatar to reflect that “different” person. Walk around Second Life and notice if and how you’re treated differently. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Show a few people your new avatar! Blog about your experience being “different”. In what ways were you different? Why did you make those choices? How did it make you feel? Did people treat you differently than you had anticipated?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 26 of 438

Getting Around: Walking & Flying Module Overview LEVEL: 1 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: WALK/FLY – OVERVIEW

1-2.0 Introduction An entire virtual world is out there for you to explore! In this module, you will learn basic ways to move around your environment.

1-2.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing - Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Technology – Knows the characteristics and uses of computer hardware and operating systems - Uses a variety of input devices (e.g., keyboard, scanner, voice/sound recorders, mouse, touch screen) o Working with Others – Displays effective interpersonal communication skills - Knows strategies to effectively communicate in a variety of settings (e.g., selects appropriate strategy for audience and situation) 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

o Information, Media and Technology Skills – ICT (Information, Communications and Technology) Literacy POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Walking, Running o Sitting, Flying

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 27 of 438

You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Exploring your immediate area Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o None needed

TERMS: Toggle: To switch from one status to another, such as a light switch turning on and off.

MATERIALS: No special items needed

1-2.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, let’s see if you’ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: Find something near you that you could only explore flying. Perhaps it’s a very large mountain, waterfall, building or rocket! Investigate all the hidden features using your new flying and camera control skills. If you are on Global Kids Island in the teen grid, find the volcano. Fly to the very top of the volcano to get a peek inside it. Now drop down into the hidden lava pit. What animal do you see? Blog it. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Have you ever seen air races? You don’t need a plane in Second Life! Challenge a friend or two to an air race. Together, decide on a route and see who can fly it the fastest. What did it feel like to fly? Blog it.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 28 of 438

Getting Around: Walking & Flying Walk, Turn, Run, Sit LEVEL: 1 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: WALK/FLY – MISSION 1

1-2.1 Introduction Second Life offers many ways to get around and see the world. Do you see something you’d like to explore? It’s easy to get there. Let’s find out how.

1-2.1.1 Instruction Walking and running are two ways for your avatar to move around in Second Life. You can do so endlessly without ever getting tired. You can jump, crouch and sit as well. By the end of this mission you will be ready to explore the world around you.

1-2.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Walking and Turning Use the following keys on your keyboard to move your avatar around in Second Life: W or UpArrowkey – To move forward S or DownArrowkey -- To move backward A or LeftArrowkey – Spin or turn to the left D or RightArrowkey – Spin or turn to the right In addition to the above, you can also R-click (Cmd-click) on the ground and select Go Here from the pie menu that appears, to make your avatar walk to a specific spot. TRY THIS NOW: Practice walking around your immediate area. Make a few turns each way. Step 2: Running Press Ctrl-R to turn on the run mode. The same movement keys can now be used to run in any direction. Pressing Ctrl-R again will turn off the run mode. You also have the option to select Always Run from the World menu. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 29 of 438

World > Always Run TRY THIS NOW: Run around your area! Step 3: Jumping To jump, press E or PageUp. TRY THIS NOW: Jump! Step 4: Crouching To crouch, press C or PageDown. TRY THIS NOW: Use the crouch feature to hide behind an object. Step 5: Sitting On most surfaces you can R-click (Cmd-click) your mouse and select Sit Here from the pie menu, to make your avatar sit. This includes chairs, the ground or on buildings. You may not actually sit on another avatar. When you want to get back up, click the Stand Up button that appears at the bottom of your screen. TRY THIS NOW: Practice sitting on a few different objects.

1-2.1.3 Action Plan Now you do it. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Want some extra practice? Try this: Explore some parts of the Global Kids island, or your current area, using all the ways you have just learned. Practice walking, running, jumping, crouching and sitting.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 30 of 438

Getting Around: Walking & Flying Fly LEVEL: 1 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: WALK/FLY – MISSION 2

1-2.2 Introduction How many times have you wished you could just spread your wings and fly like a bird? You may not be able to do that in real life but in Second Life you can. You don’t need wings but you certainly can fly.

1-2.2.1 Instruction Flying is another way for your avatar to move around in Second Life. This mission will show you how to fly. You can then begin to discover places that you would not have been able to get to by walking or running.

1-2.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Flying To fly, click the blue Fly button at the bottom of your screen or press Ctrl-F. You also have the option to select Fly from the World menu. Toggle the Fly mode on and off by clicking the same button or pressing Ctrl-F. Note: If your chat window is open, close it! Otherwise your directional commands will appear as a public chat. When in fly mode use the following keys on your keyboard to move your avatar around: o W or UpArrowkey – To move forward o S or DownArrowkey -- To move backward o A or LeftArrowkey – Spin or turn to the left o D or RightArrowkey – Spin or turn to the right

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 31 of 438

Step 2: Flying higher When in fly mode, press E or PageUp to fly higher. You can fly up to 50 meters above the level of the ground. Step 3: Flying lower When in fly mode, press C or PageDown, to fly lower. Note: Some laptops may require you press the function key with PageUp to fly higher. Tip: No Fly Zones: In most areas of Second Life you will be able to fly but in some areas the landowner may have chosen not to allow flight. You will see a symbol at the top of your screen that looks like a white down arrow on a red circle if you are in a No Fly Zone.

1-2.2.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: Find something near you that you could only explore flying. Perhaps itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s a very large mountain, waterfall, building or rocket! Investigate all the hidden features using your new flying and camera control skills. If you are on Global Kids Island in the teen grid, find the volcano. Fly to the very top of the volcano to get a peek inside it. Now drop down into the hidden lava pit. What animal do you see? Blog it. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Have you ever seen air races? You donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t need a plane in Second Life! Challenge a friend or two to an air race. Together, decide on a route and see who can fly it the fastest. What did it feel like to fly? Blog it.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 32 of 438

Getting Around: Taking a Closer Look Module Overview LEVEL: 1 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: TAKING A CLOSER LOOK – OVERVIEW

1-3.0 Introduction Although you can walk up to an object to see it, there are much more efficient ways to see things in Second Life. Being able to stay in one spot and quickly view something from different angles is very important when building and creating, for example. In this module, you will learn easy ways to see something from multiple viewpoints – without moving your avatar.

1-3.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing - Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Technology – Knows the characteristics and uses of computer hardware and operating systems - Uses a variety of input devices (e.g., keyboard, scanner, voice/sound recorders, mouse, touch screen) 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

GKCx - 33 of 438

You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Getting a closer look at the world around you o Inspecting something closely from all angles without moving your avatar Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o None needed MATERIALS: Item

Location

Camera Control

View > Camera Controls

TERMS: Pan: To swing a camera in a horizontal or vertical plane to give a panoramic effect.

1-3.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, letâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s see if youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: Find an object that interests you and inspect it closely from all angles without moving your avatar. Also pan around the environment and around yourself. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: See how quickly you can play hide and seek with another friend using only camera controls to search for the other person. Blog about your experience. Tell about what object you inspected and how it felt to pan around the environment and yourself?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 34 of 438

Getting Around: Taking a Closer Look Basic Camera Controls LEVEL: 1 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: TAKING A CLOSER LOOK – MISSION 1

1-3.1 Introduction Have interesting things around you begun to catch your eye – an erupting volcano, a huge ship, a futuristic car with wings? Do you think of moving your avatar closer to get a better look just like you would in real-life? That certainly is one way. It’s time you begin to discover your camera-like vision in Second Life.

1-3.1.1 Instruction Focus, Zoom and Pan are three ways to look at things around you in Second Life. By the end of this mission you will be able to get a closer look at things without actually moving your avatar. Not only that, you can also observe them from different angles without moving an inch.

1-3.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Focusing Hold down the Alt key to activate Focus Mode. Did you see your cursor change to a magnifying glass while Alt was held down? While continuing to hold down the key, click on anything – an object, the landscape or a person. Notice how the view centers after you click? Even when the object or person moves, your camera will stay with it until it is out of range. Step 2: Zooming While holding down the Alt key, press the UpArrowkey on your keyboard to zoom in and DownArrowkey to zoom out. Step 3: Horizontal panning As you continue to hold down the Alt key, press the RightArrowkey or LeftArrowkey to pan right or left. This is a great way to go around your subject.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 35 of 438

You can also pan using your mouse. While holding down the Alt key, drag your mouse around. Did you see that you can zoom by moving the mouse forward or back and you can pan by moving your mouse left or right?

1-3.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Want some extra practice? Try this: Try focusing on objects or avatars around you. Select a moving object or person and watch your â&#x20AC;&#x153;cameraâ&#x20AC;? follow along. Zoom and Pan for a closer look. Make sure you get enough practice doing this because there is more to come.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 36 of 438

Getting Around: Taking a Closer Look Advanced Camera Controls LEVEL: 1 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: TAKING A CLOSER LOOK â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 2

1-3.2 Introduction You have already learned how to get close to an object and go around it. But did you know you can look at the object from above and below as well?

1-3.2.1 Instruction By the end of this mission you will be able to Pan in all directions and angles.

1-3.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Vertical panning Hold down the Alt and Ctrl keys together then click on something. Now press the UpArrowkey or DownArrowkey to pan up or down. You can also press the E or C keys to pan up or down. This time the distance from your avatar remains constant but you can pan in all directions using the arrow keys. Try this now: Using your mouse, make sure you hold down the Alt and Ctrl keys together, then click on something and drag your mouse around. Step 2: Pan landscape Hold down the Alt, Ctrl and Shift keys all together and drag your mouse. Did you notice that as you move the mouse, the camera slides across the landscape as if you are dragging the ground around? Step 3: 360 degrees around yourself To get a quick look around your avatar try this: With the Alt key pressed down, click on your avatar.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 37 of 438

While continuing to hold the Alt key down use the arrow keys to spin around your avatar. This is a great way to see what your avatar looks like from the front. Step 4: Camera Controls There is one more way to access your camera controls in Second Life. Under View menu select the option Camera Controls. View > Camera Controls You will see two circles and a bar in between appear at the bottom of your screen. o The left circle rotates the camera. o The middle bar zooms in and out. o The right circle moves the camera left, right, up and down. TRY IT NOW: Hold down Alt key and click to focus on something. Then try all the camera controls again.

1-3.2.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: Find an object that interests you and inspect it closely from all angles. Also pan around the environment and around yourself. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: See how quickly you can play hide and seek with another friend using only camera controls to search for the other person. Blog about your experience. Describe the object you inspected and how it felt to pan around the environment and yourself?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 38 of 438

Communicating: Chat Module Overview LEVEL: 1 MODULE: COMMUNICATING: CHAT – OVERVIEW

1-4.0 Introduction As in real life, chatting is a primary way to get to know others and exchange information. Chatting in Second Life, however, refers to typed messages exchanged between at least two avatars. In this module, you will learn how to chat, both publicly and privately. You will also learn how to save and view a record of your chats.

1-4.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 39 of 438

POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Communicating with other Second Life residents o Sending and receiving instant messages o Reading your chat history You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Chatting with a few residents in Second Life o Sending instant messages to a few people o Posting a part of your chat history on a blog or email

Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o None needed MATERIALS: Item

Location

Log Chat Log Instant Messages

Edit > Preferences > Communication Edit > Preferences > Communication

TERMS: Toggle: To switch from one status to another, such as a light switch turning on and off. Emote: To show emotion, like laughing or crying. IM (Instant Message): The exchange of typed messages between computer users in real time via the internet.

1-4.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, letâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s see if youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: Find someone to interview in Second Life. Ask them the following questions through public chat. o What is something you would like to see changed in the world? o What can people like you do to better the situation?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 40 of 438

Now ask the same question to someone else through IM. Use chat history to copy your conversation. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Tell others about your conversation and encourage them to view it on the internet. (As described below.) Post a copy of the conversation on a blog or other shared internet source. But before you do that make sure you ask for permission to publicly post their comments. That is just basic blogging and internet etiquette. Always good to keep in mind!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 41 of 438

Communicating: Chat The Basics LEVEL: 1 MODULE: COMMUNICATING: CHAT – MISSION 1

1-4.1 Introduction There are so many interesting avatars around. Wouldn’t you like to meet some? Learn how to communicate with them. Find out what they are all about, share thoughts, opinions and learn how to say “Hello”.

1-4.1.1 Instruction Text chat is one of the main ways to communicate with other residents in Second Life. Anyone within 30 meters of your avatar can see what you have to say and respond. It is like talking to those around you in real life. And what would you do in real life if you wanted people further away to hear you? Yes, you can shout in Second Life too.

1-4.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Chat bar You can chat with people around you using the Chat bar. Toggle the Chat bar on and off by clicking the blue Chat button at the bottom of your screen. You can also press Enter for the chat bar to appear and Esc for it to disappear. Try it now: Toggle your Chat bar.

Step 2: Chat When the Chat bar is visible, type your message in the space provided and press Say or Enter. The residents nearby will see your chat text appear on their screen, preceded by your name. Step 3: Shout If you want your message to go a longer distance, press Shout. It is the button next to Say. You can also press Ctrl+Enter for the same result. Shouting has a range of 100 meters.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 42 of 438

Step 4: Animation When you begin typing your chat message, your avatar will begin a typing animation. This lets others know that you are about to speak and similarly you will also know when they are about to speak. Try it now: Type a chat message to say something. Type another one to shout it! Step 5: Chat variations If you start your line of chat text with a forward slash “/”, the typing hands animation and typing sound will not occur. This can be very useful if you are listening to music or are in a group setting and find the typing noise distracting. Try this now: Type a line of chat with “/” at the beginning. Now try starting your message with “/me”. For example, “/me is very happy!” Press Enter. Did you notice the message that appeared included your name? This is one way for your avatar to emote through a line of chat text.

1-4.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Want some extra practice? Try this: Chat with a few residents in Second Life. Use the “/me” option to show how you are feeling. For example, “/me is very hungry!”

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 43 of 438

Communicating: Chat IM (Private Chat) LEVEL: 1 MODULE: COMMUNICATING: CHAT â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 2

1-4.2 Introduction You have mastered one form of communication in Second Life - chatting. Now it is time to learn another way, one that will enable you to choose who you want to speak to without nearby residents listening in.

1-4.2.1 Instruction Instant Message or IM is the other main way to communicate in Second Life. While text chat is public, i.e. everyone nearby can see what you are saying, IMs are more private and can be compared to telephone conversations in real life. An IM can be sent to a specific person or group. It is not necessary for the person to be anywhere near you. In this mission you will learn how to send an IM to an avatar near you.

1-4.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Sending an IM in person Right-click (Cmd-click) the person's avatar and select Send IM from the Pie menu. A new window will open. Type your message in the space provided and press Enter. Step 2: IM more than one person You can IM as many people as you want by right clicking each avatar. All IM conversations appear in the same window. You can view each conversation by clicking on the tab with the respective avatar name. Try it now: Start instant messages with at least two people at the same time.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 44 of 438

1-4.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: IM a few people around you and ask them to name a movie or song that inspired them and why.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 45 of 438

Communicating: Chat Chat History LEVEL: 1 MODULE: COMMUNICATING: CHAT – MISSION 3

1-4.3 Introduction You now know how to communicate with other residents in Second Life. But while chatting you may notice that the chat text appears and then fades away. You may wonder how you could see what you missed if you had to step away from your computer for a few minutes.

1-4.3.1 Instruction The Chat History window records all chat for the current Second Life session. From the moment you log in until you log out, everything is recorded. However, if you log out you will lose your chat history. This mission will show you not only how to see the chat you miss but also how to make sure it is saved so that you can view it even after you log out of Second Life.

1-4.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Viewing missed Chat To view missed chat, click on the blue history button to the left of your Chat bar OR choose Chat History from the View menu OR press Ctrl-H. Step 2: Saving Chat The following setup will ensure that your chat history gets saved and can be viewed even after you log out of Second Life.: o In the Edit menu, click on the last option called Preferences o In the Preferences window, click on the Communication tab on the left o On the right select the option Log Chat o Click on Change Path and choose a location where you want the files to be saved such as a folder named “SL Chat”. o Press Apply and then Ok Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 46 of 438

Test this now: Type a line in your Chat bar as a test, press enter and log out of Second Life. (If you find you do not have permission to do this on your computer, please see Note below for a workaround.) Step 3: Viewing saved Chat History Now look for the folder called “SL Chat”. Within it you will find a folder with the same name as your avatar. Inside the folder you will find a text document. Try this now: Click on it. Do you see your chat history? This is a more permanent way of saving all your chat. It is also useful when Second Life suddenly freezes or crashes on your machine. Step 4: Saving IM The following setup will ensure that your IM is saved along with your chat history and can be viewed even after you log out of Second Life: o In the Edit menu, click on the last option called Preferences o In the Preferences window, click on the Communication tab on the left o On the right you will see that Log Chat is already selected o Also select the options Log Instant Messages, Show timestamps in IM and Include IM in Chat History o Press Apply and then Ok Test this now: Send an IM to someone as a test and log out of Second Life. (If you do not have permission to do this on your computer, please see Note below for a workaround.) Step 5: Viewing saved Chat History – SAME HEADING AS STEP 3 Look again for the folder called “SL Chat”. Within it you will find a folder with the same name as your avatar. Inside the folder you will find a text document. Click on it. Do you see your chat history and your IM? Note: If you are on a computer with permission restrictions, such as a school lab computer, you might not be able to save conversations by using Second Life preferences. In that case, you can select the conversation by dragging over it to highlight, and then Copy/Paste into a document such as Word or TextEdit.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 47 of 438

1-4.3.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: Find someone to interview in Second Life. Ask them the following questions through public chat. o What is something you would like to see changed in the world? o What can people like you do to better the situation? Now ask the same question to someone else through IM. Use chat history to copy your conversation. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Tell others about your conversation and encourage them to view it on the internet. Post a copy of the conversation on a blog or other shared internet source. But before you do that make sure you ask for permission to publicly post their comments. That is just basic blogging and internet etiquette. Always good to keep in mind!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 1

GKCx - 48 of 438

Dedicated to our fathers.

GKCx by Jeremy Kemp, Stephen Kemp is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Noncommercial-Share Alike 3.0 United States License.

GKCx - 49 of 438

Global Kids' Second Life Curriculum LESSON PLANS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; LEVEL 2

Global Kids' Second Life Curriculum. Fall, 2007. ÂŠ2007.

GKCx - 50 of 438

TABLE OF CONTENTS

STANDARDS Learning Standards addressed in this curriculum

1 1

FINDING STUFF: INVENTORY PART 1 Module Overview

2 2

2-1.0 Introduction 2-1.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 2-1.0.2 Action Plan

Library versus Personal Inventory 2-1.1 Introduction 2-1.1.1 Instruction 2-1.1.2 Practice 2-1.1.3 Action Plan

Using “Search” in Inventory 2-1.2 Introduction 2-1.2.1 Instruction 2-1.2.2 Practice 2-1.2.3 Action Plan

“Rezzing” Objects in Your Inventory 2-1.3 Introduction 2-1.3.1 Instruction 2-1.3.2 Practice 2-1.3.3 Action Plan

Taking Back and Deleting Inventory Items 2-1.4 Introduction 2-1.4.1 Instruction 2-1.4.2 Practice 2-1.4.3 Action Plan

Notecards 2-1.5 Introduction 2-1.5.1 Instruction 2-1.5.2 Practice 2-1.5.3 Action Plan

Exploring the Inventory Library 2-1.6 Introduction 2-1.6.1 Instruction 2-1.6.2 Practice 2-1.6.3 Action Plan

COMMUNICATING: FRIENDS Module Overview 2-2.0 Introduction 2-2.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 2-2.0.2 Action Plan

2 2 3

4 4 4 5 5

6 6 6 6 7

8 8 8 8 9

10 10 10 10 11

12 12 12 12 13

14 14 14 14 15

16 16 16 16 17

GKCx - 51 of 438

Giving and Receiving Calling Cards 2-2.1 Introduction 2-2.1.1 Instruction 2-2.1.2 Practice 2-2.1.3 Action Plan

Inviting and Declining Friendship 2-2.2 Introduction 2-2.2.1 Instruction 2-2.2.2 Practice 2-2.2.3 Action Plan

Friendship Permissions 2-2.3 Introduction 2-2.3.1 Instruction 2-2.3.2 Practice 2-2.3.3 Action Plan

Sending A Friendship Invitation 2-2.4 Introduction 2-2.4.1 Instruction v2.4.2 Practice 2-2.4.3 Action Plan

AN INTRODUCTION TO BUILDING Module Overview 2-3.0 Introduction 2-3.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 2-3.0.2 Action Plan

“Rezzing” Your First “Prim” 2-3.1 Introduction 2-3.1.1 Instruction 2-3.1.2 Practice 2-3.1.3 Action Plan

Moving and Rotating a Prim 2-3.2 Introduction 2-3.2.1 Instruction 2-3.2.2 Practice 2-3.2.3 Action Plan

Resizing a Prim 2-3.3 Introduction 2-3.3.1 Instruction 2-3.3.2 Practice 2-3.2.3 Action Plan

Linking a Prim

19 19 19 19 20

21 21 21 21 22

23 23 23 23 24

25 25 25 25 26

27 27 27 27 28

30 30 30 30 31

32 32 32 32 34

35 35 35 35 36

2-3.4 Introduction 2-3.4.1 Instruction 2-3.4.2 Practice 2-3.4.3 Action Plan

37 37 37 39

AVATAR: CLOTHING Module Overview

40 40

2-4.0 Introduction 2-4.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module

40 40

GKCx - 52 of 438

2-4.0.2 Action Plan

Changing your Clothes 2-4.1 Introduction 2-4.1.1 Instruction 2-4.1.2 Practice 2-4.1.3 Action Plan

Modifying Clothes

43 43 43 43 45

2-4.2 Introduction 2-4.2.1 Instruction 2-4.2.2 Practice 2-4.2.3 Action Plan

46 46 46 48

Making New Clothes

2-4.3 Introduction 2-4.3.1 Instruction 2-4.3.2 Practice 2-4.3.3 Action Plan

49 49 49 51

GKCx - 53 of 438

Learning Standards addressed in this curriculum McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

GKCx - 54 of 438

Finding Stuff: Inventory Part 1 Module Overview LEVEL: 2 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: INVENTORY PART 1

2-1.0 Introduction Your Inventory is already full of interesting items – all put there for you to use and enjoy. In this module, you will begin to learn what’s already tucked away in your Inventory and how to use it!

2-1.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing - Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing - Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Life Work – Makes effective use of basic tools - Uses work space effectively (e.g., organizes materials, information, computer records) 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

o Learning and Innovation Skills – Creativity and Innovation o Information, Media and Technology Skills – ICT (Information, Communications and Technology) Literacy POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Understanding the important differences between your default Library and your very own personal inventory (called My Inventory) o Searching for (and finding) any item in your Inventory o Taking and object out of your Inventory and having it appear in front of you (otherwise known as “rezzing” an object). o Taking rezzed items back into your Inventory Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 55 of 438

o Deleting rezzed items o Understanding that taking a Library item copies in into My Inventory o Knowing what’s in your Inventory Library You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Locating items most likely to be in your Library or personal Inventory o Searching successfully for items in your Inventory o Rezzing various items in your Inventory Library o Putting away items rezzed in the last mission and locating them in My Inventory o Exploring your Inventory Library and choosing a few items to rez, take and/or delete o Finding those items in your My Inventory Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o Level 1 MATERIALS: Item

Location

Inventory items

Inventory > Library

2-1.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, let’s see if you’ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module!

TERMS: Inventory: All the items (objects, images, sounds, scripts – everything) that you possess in Second Life, except money. Library: The part of your inventory containing standard free items every Second Life resident is “born” with. My Inventory: Items that you yourself create, buy, collect, or are given. It is empty when you begin your Second Life experience. Rez: Taking an item out of Inventory for use. Sandbox: An area in Second Life where building and rezzing is allowed, even if you are not the owner. Server: A computer that delivers information to another computer linked by a network.

If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: If you had to furnish a room using only the items in your Library, what would you choose? Rez a room arrangement that suits you. Make sure to take all your items when you are through. Then, look for them in your My Inventory to see what is now copied there. What objects would you need to make the room of your dreams? Blog it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 56 of 438

Finding Stuff: Inventory Part 1 Library versus Personal Inventory LEVEL: 2 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: INVENTORY 1 – MISSION 1

2-1.1 Introduction As you have already begun to discover, your avatar came into Second Life with all sorts of things. You’ve already seen just a little of that in the Appearance module in the previous level. You also may have noticed that your Inventory has two main sub-sections: My Inventory and Library. In this mission, we will begin to look at their similarities and differences... and how they relate to one another.

2-1.1.1 Instruction About the Library: In the Appearance module you may have peeked just a little into the Library part of your Inventory. However, there is SO much more there! We’ll be looking at all the nifty stuff as we go through all the missions in this module. Important tips to remember about the Library: o You cannot delete items from it. o Using a Library item will create a copy of it in your My Inventory section. o Many Library items are useful for learning Second Life skills such as modifying and editing objects – skills you will learn soon! o It’s full of surprises and good stuff. About My Inventory: Right now, your My Inventory may look a bit empty. However, as you collect items, you will find it rapidly grows to be much larger than your Library. Important tips to remember about My Inventory: o It’s where all your new “stuff” goes. o It has a trashcan. You can throw items away. o It also has additional folders, such as: Animations, Calling Cards and Lost And Found. o You can organize My Inventory in ways that are useful for you.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 57 of 438

2-1.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Finding your Inventory Either choose the Inventory button at the lower right of your screen or choose View > Inventory (Cmd-I) to bring up your Inventory window. Step 2: Comparing both My Inventory and Library If your Inventory folders are all open, choose File > Close Folders from the Inventory window. Now, your Inventory should be collapsed to just two folders: My Inventory and Library Step 3: Comparing sub-folders Click once on each folder to see which sub-folders are the same and different between the two sections. Both sections of your Inventory were set up for you with some sub-folders. Some of those also have sub-folders. In fact, in future missions, you also will create sub-folders to help organize your items. We will explore some of these amazing items in the next few missions, but for now, just notice that while your Library is full of stuff, your My Inventory is, for the most part, E-M-P-T-Y!

2-1.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Practice opening and closing a few folders in both the My Inventory and Library section of your Inventory. Try looking at the Textures folders in each section. See the difference? Are you becoming curious as to what else is in there? Then on to the next mission!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 58 of 438

Finding Stuff: Inventory Part 1 Using “Search” in Inventory LEVEL: 2 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: INVENTORY 1 – MISSION 2

2-1.2 Introduction Have you ever had a hard time finding a matching sock? Or that watch you misplaced? In Second Life, things are easier to track down. No matter how messy your Inventory may get, you can usually find what you need with a simple text search. In this mission, you will learn how to use this Search feature and practice searching – and finding – fun items (but, sorry about that sock…)!

2-1.2.1 Instruction While keeping a well-organized Inventory is a noble goal, chances are you will occasionally need a little help to find just what you are looking for. Your Inventory has a few tools to make finding a particular item quick and easy. Similar to other database systems, your Inventory has a Search feature. You can also sort your items using the All Items or Recent Items tabs to find things.

2-1.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Opening Inventory As in the last mission, open your Inventory window using (Cmd-I), the Inventory button or View > Inventory. Step 2: Finding the All Items and Recent Items tabs At the top of your Inventory window, you will see both tabs. By default, the All Items tab is always chosen. Try this now: Switch between the tabs by clicking on each one. If you had recently added an item to your Inventory, it would be listed in the Recent Items tab. Step 3: Using the Search feature You may be saying, “How can I search for something if I don’t even know what’s there?” Good point! Let’s search first for some things you do know are there: body parts!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 59 of 438

Try this now: Make sure you have the All Items tab chosen. In the Search bar at the top of the Inventory window, type the word “eyes” (without the quotes). You should see all the eyes listed in your Inventory. You might also see that one pair of eyes is in bold. In parentheses it will say it is (worn). That is the pair of eyes you are wearing right now. If you would like to change your eyes, just double-click on another pair of eyes! (It may take a few seconds for them to change, or “load”.) You may also R-click (Cmd-click) and choose Wear. Step 4: Search: Your choice Take a moment and practice searching for one or two items you’d like to find in your Inventory. Be careful! Spelling counts.

2-1.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: If you would like, try finding a “torch” and a “domino”. Now that you can find items in your inventory, what do you do with them other than put them on? The next mission will show you!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 60 of 438

Finding Stuff: Inventory Part 1 “Rezzing” Objects in Your Inventory LEVEL: 2 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: INVENTORY 1 – MISSION 3

2-1.3 Introduction In Second Life, you can pull a rabbit out of thin air… that is, if you already have one in your Inventory. Now that you can search for your stuff, it is time to take things out and start playing with them! (Aren’t you glad you finally got to this mission!?) Let’s play!

2-1.3.1 Instruction Because you don’t have a tremendous number of items in your My Inventory, we will be taking items out of the default Library. We’ll also be looking at these items briefly to see what we might learn about them.

2-1.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Find a place where you can build Note: The following steps must be taken in an area where you have permission to build. Anyone may build on his or her own land or in a public “Sandbox” (an area set aside for building.) Make sure you’re in one of these areas before you begin. Otherwise, you will not have the ability to rez objects. If you can’t find a place to build, ask someone. Try this now: Find a place where you can build and go there. Step 2: Open your Inventory As in the last couple of missions, navigate to your Inventory window. Try using a different way to get there than you usually do. Step 3: Search for “Parrot” In the Inventory Search box, type in the word: Parrot. You may have more than one result that contains the word, parrot! You are going to use “Chat Parrot”. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 61 of 438

Step 4: Rez the Chat Parrot Try this now: To make your Chat Parrot appear in front of your (and everyone else’s) eyes, click on the Inventory item: Chat Parrot and drag it to the ground in front of you. Within a few seconds, a parrot on a perch will appear in front of you – most likely talking to you. It might even ask you to ask it for a kiss! If you like, ask nicely and see how it responds. The Chat Parrot is a good example of a script inside of an object. A script is a set of instructions that tells an object to do something – in this case, talk to you. You will learn much more about scripts in future modules. Step 5: Rez the Beach Ball Try this now: Use Search again and type in the words: Beach Ball. When you find the Beach ball, click and drag it to the ground near you. Is it bouncing around a bit? Try to make it move. As you might guess, the Beach Ball also has a script in it, telling it how to react. It also has something called “Physics” enabled – a feature that allows it to act more like a “real” Beach ball would react when kicked or touched.

2-1.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: You could just run around all day, kicking your Beach ball and rezzing everything in your Library. But, before you go and make a bigger mess, please continue to the next mission and learn how to clean up!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 62 of 438

Finding Stuff: Inventory Part 1 Taking Back and Deleting Inventory Items LEVEL: 2 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: INVENTORY 1 – MISSION 4

2-1.4 Introduction Well, you left a bit of mess in the last mission, didn’t you? Time to play well with others and clean up your Chat Parrot and Beach Ball!

2-1.4.1 Instruction Everything you see in Second Life, such as your Parrot and Beach Ball, represent information stored on a server. When too many objects are rezzed in one area, it gets “full” and no more items can be rezzed. In simple terms, the server for that area doesn’t have the ability to handle any more information. So – cleaning up after yourself is more than being a neat freak; it is a way to make the Second Life experience more enjoyable for everyone. It also allows you to take your Inventory items with you to other areas as you work and play with others.

2-1.4.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Find your rezzed Parrot and Beach Ball If you are doing this mission right after mission 3, you are probably standing right in front of your parrot and beach ball. However, if some time has passed, it’s possible that those items have been returned to you. If you cannot see them, please rez them again. Step 2: Taking the Chat Parrot There are several ways to put away an item. One way is to simply take it. You can take any rezzed item that belongs to you and put it back into your Inventory. To take the Chat Parrot, right-click (Cmd-click) on it and choose Take from the pie menu. Try this now: Take the Chat Parrot. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 63 of 438

Step 3: Deleting the Beach Ball You can also clean up after yourself by deleting an item. If it’s a copyable item, a copy will still remain in your Inventory. If it’s “nocopy”, a message will alert you before you accidentally delete it permanently. To delete the Beach Ball, right-click (Cmd-click) on the Beach Ball. A pie menu will appear over it with several choices. Choose More > Delete from the pie menu. Try this now: Delete the Beach Ball. Step 4: Finding an item you just took Any item you take goes to the “My Inventory” section of your Inventory. Using Inventory Search, look for the Chat Parrot. Do you notice that now you have a Chat Parrot in your Library and in My Inventory? Anytime you take anything originally from the Library section, it will then be copied to My Inventory.

2-1.4.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: You may wish to rez and take a few more items from your Inventory Library. Can you rez and then take a chair? In the next mission, you’ll be exploring what else is in the Library!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 64 of 438

Finding Stuff: Inventory Part 1 Notecards LEVEL: 2 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: INVENTORY 1 – MISSION 5

2-1.5 Introduction Have you ever wanted to write a note to a friend or give them some instructions? You can do that!

2-1.5.1 Instruction In Second Life, when people want to give information, they usually create a Notecard. Notecards can contain information, instructions, or anything else you would like to write down. They can also contain landmarks, photos, or even objects!

2-1.5.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Finding Notecards in your Inventory. You have a Notecard folder in both the Library and My Inventory section of your Inventory. To find some important Second Life Notecards, go to: Inventory > Library > Notecards To read a Notecard, double-click on it. Try this now: Double-click on the Notecard titled Welcome Note. When you are done looking at it, click on the “X” in the upper right of the Notecard to close it. Step 2: Creating a Notecard You can also create Notecards right in your Inventory. Any Notecards you create will appear in the Notecards folder of your “My Inventory”. To create a notecard, open your Inventory and select: Create > New Note. Your Inventory will highlight New Note. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 65 of 438

R-click (Cmd-click) on New Note and choose Rename. Rename your Notecard so you can find it later. Your new Notecard will also open on your screen. In the open Notecard, you can type anything you would like to say. You can also drag landmarks or photos into your Notecard.

Note: The landmarks and photos will look like their inventory icons. Users need to click on them to open them on their screen. When you are done adding content to your Notecard, select the Save button at the bottom of the Notecard. Try this now: Create a new Notecard and rename it “My Favorite Places” In the open Notecard, describe some of your favorite places to visit in Second Life. If you have landmarks to those places, drag them into the open Notecard. When you are done, select the Save button. Step 3: Giving a Notecard If someone is near you, you can give them a Notecard by finding it in your Inventory and dragging it onto them. If someone is not in view, you can open their profile and drag your Notecard to the Give Item slot on their “Second Life” tab. In either case, they will be given the option to accept or not accept your offer of a Notecard. Try this now: Ask someone near you if they would like a list of your favorite places to go in Second Life. If they say yes, drag your notecard onto them. If you have a friend you think would like your Notecard, open their profile and drag your Notecard into their Give Item slot. If they are not currently in Second Life, they will get your note the next time they log in.

2-1.5.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Create a Notecard to send around and let many people add to it! You can list an important social or global issue that you care about and one organization or individual that is doing something about it. Then, give it to a friend and ask them to add to it before they pass it on. If you want, you could even suggest that people “sign” their entries with their Second Life name and send a copy back to you. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 66 of 438

Finding Stuff: Inventory Part 1 Exploring the Inventory Library LEVEL: 2 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: INVENTORY 1 – MISSION 6

2-1.6 Introduction You know how to get things out of your Inventory, put them away and then find them again. This mission is your chance to finally look through the interesting and amazing resources you have been given!

2-1.6.1 Instruction Your Inventory contains all the materials you need to begin to express yourself, communicate, build and create. However, many people zip right past what’s in their Library, never realizing the rich resources that have been given them. Even veteran Second Life builders and creators routinely look through these resources for ideas and inspiration.

2-1.6.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Open your Library Using your favorite method, navigate to the Library section of your Inventory. Click once on the Library folder to show its sub-folders. We will explore a sampling of what’s there. Step 2: Investigating Body Parts and Clothing As you learned in the Appearance Module, additional body parts are located in these sub-folders of your Library. The Body Parts folder has, well, body parts. However, Clothing also has body parts! Try this now: Click once on any of the folders in Clothing to see additional body parts available to you. If you double-click on any of those parts, two things will happen: o You will wear that body part o That body part will be copied into the My Inventory section of your Inventory (in the Body Parts sub-folder). Step 3: Investigating Landmarks and Notecards These two folders contain landmarks to helpful locations as well as informational notecards. It is worth a quick look to see what is there. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 67 of 438

Try this now: Click on the Notecard folder to open it. Double-click on any of the notecards listed to see the information it contains. When you’re done reading, close it by clicking on the “X” in the upper right corner of the notecard. Note: Double clicking on a Landmark will bring up a window with an option to teleport you to that new location. Feel free to do that later! Step 4: Investigating Objects This folder contains the bulk of your Library. It’s filled to the brim with great stuff! Let us look at just a few items. Click once on each of the sub-folders inside the Objects folder. As you explore the contents you will see buildings, stores, furniture, toys, plants and even all the Orientation Island information stations! Try this now: Choose an item and rez it to the ground or drag it onto yourself if indicated. Pretty neat, huh? When you are done looking at it, either Delete it or Take it (R-click/Cmdclick). That item should now also be in your My Inventory.

Note: You may not be able to rez some trees, plants or grasses unless you actually own the property you’re standing on or have been given special privileges by the owner. Note: The Scripts folder will be covered in depth in later modules.

2-1.6.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: If you had to furnish a room using only the items in your Library, what would you choose? Rez a room arrangement that suits you. Make sure to take all your items when you are through. Then, look for them in your My Inventory to see what is now copied there. What objects would you need to make the room of your dreams? Blog it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 68 of 438

Communicating: Friends Module Overview LEVEL: 2 MODULE: COMMUNICATING: FRIENDS – OVERVIEW

2-2.0 Introduction One of the amazing things about Second Life is that you can experience it with other people. It is not just a graphically-rich 3D environment; it is also a social network, like MySpace or Facebook. What do you do when you meet someone you would like to get to know? In this module, you will learn how to befriend people and give them privileges that will allow them to contact you more easily.

2-2.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Listening and Speaking – Uses listening and speaking strategies for different purposes -Uses a variety of verbal and nonverbal techniques for presentations (e.g., modulation of voice; varied inflection; tempo; enunciation; physical gestures; rhetorical questions; word choice, including figurative language, standard English, informal usage, technical language) and demonstrates poise and self-control while presenting o Technology – Understands the relationships among science, technology, society, and the individual - Observes common courtesies and acceptable use policies while telecomputing o Working with Others – Displays effective interpersonal communication skills - Knows strategies to effectively communicate in a variety of settings (e.g., selects appropriate strategy for audience and situation) 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

o • Learning and Innovation Skills – Creativity and Innovation o • Learning and Innovation Skills – Communication and Collaboration o • Information, Media and Technology Skills – ICT (Information, Communications and Technology) Literacy o • Life and Career Skills – Social & Cross-Cultural Skills Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 69 of 438

POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Giving and receiving information about another person (calling card). o Finding calling cards in your inventory o Assigning different privileges to friends o Inviting someone to be your friend You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Giving and receiving calling cards o Choosing privileges for your friends o Inviting others to be your friend Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules:

TERMS: Calling Card: A profile of information about an avatar.

o Level 1 MATERIALS: Item

Location

Calling Cards

Inventory > My Inventory > Calling Cards

2-2.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, letâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s see if youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: People are partly defined by the people they befriend - and by those they chose not to befriend. Sometimes, those may be wise choices. Other times, we tend to exclude people for less than noble reasons. In fact, sometimes we may exclude people in unkind ways. In Second Life, you have the opportunity to expand your circle of friends and interact safely. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 70 of 438

Here is your challenge: Using the Calling Card and Friends Window tools, befriend someone you probably would not spend time with in your real life. Make an honest attempt to get to know them and find common activities and things to talk about. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Reflect on your new friendship. What made you choose this person? What did you learn about him or her? Did you learn anything about yourself in the process? If you have access to a blog, write about your experience. Please be sensitive to the other person and decide if it makes sense to mention him or her by name.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 71 of 438

Communicating: Friends Giving and Receiving Calling Cards LEVEL: 2 MODULE: COMMUNICATING: FRIENDS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION1

2-2.1 Introduction What do you do when you meet someone interesting and want to keep in touch? You exchange phone numbers or email addresses or business cards. In Second Life you exchange Calling Cards.

2-2.1.1 Instruction Calling cards help to keep a quick contact list of residents you've met and may want to get in touch with later. First, you will learn how to give someone your calling card. Then, you will learn how to find calling cards people have given you.

2-2.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Giving someone your Calling Card To give someone your calling card, they need to be located nearby. R-click (Cmd-click) on them. A pie menu will appear. Choose More. In the second pie menu that appears, choose Give Card. The other avatar will see a window with an option to Accept or Decline your offer. If accepted, then your calling card will be added to their Inventory. Try this now: Give your calling card to someone nearby. (If you are alone, find someone!) Ask someone to give you their calling card. (You may need to tell them how!)

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 72 of 438

Step 2: Finding a Calling Card from someone else Open your Inventory and navigate to a folder in My Inventory named Calling Cards. Inventory > My Inventory > Calling Cards Click once on the arrow to open and view all your calling cards. Double-click on a calling card to open and view. Try this now: Open the Calling Card folder in My Inventory and view a calling card.

2-2.1.3 Action Plan Now you do it. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Calling cards are a wonderful way to remember folks you have met. In Second Life, as in real life, some people choose to make friends more slowly. However, most people will be more than happy to give you their calling card. Try asking folks you meet for their calling cards. Having that information will help you remember those contacts later.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 73 of 438

Communicating: Friends Inviting and Declining Friendship LEVEL: 2 MODULE: COMMUNICATING: FRIENDS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION2

2-2.2 Introduction Second Life allows you to keep track of all your friends. You can start with exchanging calling cards and then become friends - or you can become friends right away. In either case, Second Life gives you the option to maintain a special friend list that you can add people to.

2-2.2.1 Instruction In this mission you will learn how to add a friend and view your friend list.

2-2.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Add Friend Right-click on an avatar and select Add Friend from the pie menu. The other person has the option to Accept or Decline your offer. If the person accepts then he or she gets added to your friend list and calling cards are automatically exchanged. Step 2: Accept Friendship When someone offers you friendship, you have the choice to Accept or Decline. Click on Accept to add the person to your friend list or click on Decline if you want to reject the offer. Step 3: View Friends Click on the blue Communicate button at the bottom of your screen and then the Friends tab in the window to see the list of people who have agreed to be your friend in Second Life. Step 4: Calling Cards You can also find their calling card in your inventory.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 74 of 438

2-2.2.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: Friends can really help you learn Second Life skills much faster. Add a friend to your friend list. Then, find the calling card of your new friend in your inventory.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 75 of 438

Communicating: Friends Friendship Permissions LEVEL: 2 MODULE: COMMUNICATING: FRIENDS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 3

2-2.3 Introduction Friends are great! But sometimes, you may want a bit of alone time to work on a project. On the other hand, sometimes you might want to have friends around all the time as you work together to create something fantastic. Fortunately, Second Life allows you to assign privileges to your friends that will help you do those very things.

2-2.3.1 Instruction In this mission, you will learn how to manage your friendsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; ability to see you on a map and know when you are logged in. You will also be able to let a friend actually modify items that you create.

2-2.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Exploring the Communicate window Click on the Communicate button at the bottom of your screen and select the Friends tab. You will see a list of your friends. Friends that are currently logged into Second Life are in bold. You will also see icons indicating what privileges you have given them. Means they can see when you are logged into Second Life. Means they can see your location on the map. Means they can modify and change anything you have built. Means someone has given you modifying privileges.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 76 of 438

Step 2: Assigning privileges To select privileges for someone, click once on their name to highlight Then check the boxes at the bottom of the window. If you later change your mind, you can go back anytime to check or uncheck options. Try this now: Select a friend and assign them privileges.

2-2.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Go through your friends list and assign privileges for each one.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 77 of 438

Communicating: Friends Sending A Friendship Invitation LEVEL: 2 MODULE: COMMUNICATING: FRIENDS – MISSION 4

2-2.4 Introduction Sometimes we only hear about someone we would like to be friend with. In Second Life, you can offer friendship without the other person being right in front of you.

2-2.4.1 Instruction The Friendship window allows you to search for someone and invite them to be your friend. Let’s learn how.

v2.4.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Add a friend With the Friends tab selected in the Communicate window, click the Add button on the right side. There are two ways you can search for a new friend to invite. Step 2: Searching by name If you know at least part of someone’s name, you can enter it in the search bar at the top. All residents matching your search will be shown. To offer your friendship, click on someone’s name and choose the Select button at the bottom of the window. Step 3: Searching by calling card If you already have someone’s calling card, you can click on it and choose the Select button the same way.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 78 of 438

Try this now: Use the search feature or calling card feature to find someone to befriend. They do not need to be located near you to receive an invitation. If they are not currently logged in, your invitation will be delivered the next time they log on to Second Life.

2-2.4.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: People are partly defined by the people they befriend - and by those they chose not to befriend. Sometimes, those may be wise choices. Other times, we tend to exclude people for less than noble reasons. In fact, sometimes we may exclude people in an unkind way. In Second Life, you have the opportunity to expand your circle of friends and interact safely. Here is your challenge: Befriend someone you probably would not spend time with in your real life. Make an honest attempt to get to know them and find common activities and things to talk about. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Reflect on your new friendship. What made you choose this person? What did you learn about him or her? Did you learn anything about yourself in the process? If you have access to a blog, write about your experience. Please be sensitive to the other person and decide if it makes sense to mention him or her by name.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 79 of 438

An Introduction to Building Module Overview LEVEL: 2 MODULE: AN INTRODUCTION TO BUILDING – OVERVIEW

2-3.0 Introduction See all those amazing plants, buildings, vehicles and objects around you? Someone built them, right in Second Life! And you can do the same. You have all the tools you need. All you have to do is learn how to use them. Ready? Let’s begin!

2-3.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing - Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Engineering Education – Understands elements of planning construction projects – Understands the steps involved in designing construction projects (e.g., planning, generating layouts, developing drawings with measurements and details of construction considering constraints, selecting materials) o Mathematics – Understands and applies the basic and advanced properties of the concepts of geometry - Uses properties of and relationships among figures to solve mathematical and real-world problems o Mathematics – Understands and applies basic and advanced properties of the concepts of measurement - Uses unit analysis to solve problems involving measurement and unit conversion (e.g., between metric and U.S. customary systems, foreign currency conversions) 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 80 of 438

POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Creating (rezzing) a basic building block (a prim) o Moving and rotating prims o Changing the size of a prim o Joining (linking) several prims together to form a more complex shape o Cloning prims You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Rezzing prims of different shapes o Moving and rotating prims o Changing the size of a prim o Making an object that uses several prims o Duplicating shapes and objects that you make Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o Level 1 MATERIALS: Item You will create what you need

Location You will store your creations in your Inventory

TERMS: Rez: To create something Prim: Short for “primitive”, the basic building block used in Second Life Sandbox: An area where building is allowed, even if you are not the owner Sim: An area of virtual land approximately 65,536 square meters (about 16 acres)

2-3.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, let’s see if you’ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 81 of 438

TAKE ACTION: Statues are used all over the world to symbolize values important to different cultures and peoples. If you made a statue to symbolize an idea, event or person important to you, what would it look like? Using your new building skills, make a statue to symbolize that idea, event or person. Make sure you link and name your creation before you take it into your Inventory. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Take your sculpture out of your Inventory and put it on display for others to see. Why did you choose that idea, event or person for your statue? How do others respond to your choice? Blog it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 82 of 438

An Introduction to Building “Rezzing” Your First “Prim” LEVEL: 2 MODULE: BUILDING: INTRODUCTION – MISSION 1

2-3.1 Introduction One of the most enjoyable things to do in Second Life is to build your own environment. The interface building tools are available for everyone to use. Your creations can be saved, shared, modified and even bought and sold. Learning how to build can seem intimidating at first. Not to fear! Beginning with this mission, you will learn – step by step.

2-3.1.1 Instruction Every object you see in Second Life – from the common cube to the most amazing vehicle or building – has been built, or created, using tools that are available to you. In this mission, you will learn how to find a place to build and create basic shapes, called primitives, or prims for short..

2-3.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Find a place to build In Second Life, you may build only in certain areas: 1. On land you own 2. On land owned by a group you belong to 3. On land owned by a friend that has given you rights to build 4. In Sandboxes – land set aside just for building If you cannot build where you are located, you will see a cube icon with a slash through it located at the top of your screen. Sandboxes are located many places throughout both the teen and main grids. If you don’t know of one, ask someone. Everyone has favorites they can recommend. Try this now: Find a place where you can build, and go there now.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 83 of 438

Step 2: Rezzing a prim The basic building block in Second Life is called a prim, which is short for primitive. Creating, or making something appear, is known as rezzing. To rez a prim, R-click (Cmd-click) on the ground and choose Create from the pie menu. You will see your cursor turn into a wand. Click on the ground where you would like your prim to appear, or rez. By default, you will see a plywood cube appear. Try this now: Rez a cube! Step 3: Rezzing other shapes using the Edit window You are not limited to cubes. In fact, you can choose to rez several shapes to use in your building. When you created your first cube, you may have noticed a new window open on your screen. This is the Edit window. To rez a different shape, R-click (Cmd-click) on the ground and choose Create. When the Edit window appears, select one of the other shapes you see. Then click on the ground with the wand. Try this now: Practice rezzing prims using the different shapes available to you. Step 4: Cleaning up after yourself It is important to leave room for others to build. When you are through rezzing prims, R-click (Cmd-click) on each of your prims and choose More and then Delete from the pie menu.

2-3.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Being familiar with each part of the building process is very important. Make sure you practice rezzing all the shapes available.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 84 of 438

An Introduction to Building Moving and Rotating a Prim LEVEL: 2 MODULE: BUILDING: INTRODUCTION – MISSION 2

2-3.2 Introduction Congratulations! You can make building blocks! However, just as with regular building blocks, you need to learn how to move them around to create complex objects. That is what this mission is all about.

2-3.2.1 Instruction Second Life offers two primary ways to move and rotate objects. You can drag an object around and just “eyeball” it where you want it. Or, you can use numbers to place it exactly where you want it to go. Although you may find you prefer one way more than the other, a good builder knows them both. After this mission, so will you.

2-3.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Dragging a prim Rez a cube near you. You will see red, green and blue directional arrows showing the x, y and z axes. Red: x axis Green: y axis Blue: z axis If you place your pointer over the head or tail of an arrow, you will see it glow more brightly. Click and hold to drag your cube along that axis. You might have to try a few times to get it right, so be patient and point with precision. Hint: you can move your camera angle if necessary to get a better shot. Try this now: Practice dragging your prim using each of the directional arrows. Also try dragging using a two-colored arrow if one is visible; this will allow you to move a prim diagonally. Step 2: Using numbers to position a prim A prim’s position can be described mathematically, using a number for each axis. The number represents exactly where a prim is located on a section of land, called a sim. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 85 of 438

When you want to line objects up exactly, building by the numbers is very helpful. You can see these numbers using the Edit window. To do this, either create a new prim, or R-click (Cmd-click) on an existing prim you’ve created and choose Edit. Expand the Edit window by choosing the More button at the bottom right of the Edit window. Select the Object tab to view the mathematical position of your prim. Edit Window > Object Tab > Position To change an object’s position, you can type in a number or use the up/down arrows to the left of each number. Try this now: Use the up/down arrows to the left of each number to slightly adjust the position of your object. Notice how far an object moves using only small adjustments. Depending on the axis you choose, your prim will move the following way: X (Red): East or West Y (Green): North or South Z (Blue): Up or Down Tip: If you type in a new number, make only small changes at first. If you drastically change an object’s position, you may not be able to find it easily! Step 3: Rotating a prim To rotate a prim, make sure you have it in Edit mode. If you can’t see the directional arrows, R-click (Cmd-click) on it and choose Edit for the pie menu. Control-click on the object to replace the arrows with colored circles. Dragging on each of these circles allows you to rotate a prim. You may also select the Rotate button from the Edit window to show the colored circles. Try this now: Control-click on your prim and rotate it to your liking.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 86 of 438

Step 4: Using numbers to rotate a prim A primâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s rotation can also be described mathematically. If you remember common angle degrees from geometry, you will see how they look in Second Life! Select the Object Tab to view the rotation degrees of your prim. Edit Window > Object Tab > Rotation To change an objectâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s rotation, type in a value between 0 and 360 degrees. You can also use the up/down arrows to the left of each number to change the rotation one degree at a time. Try this now: Change the numbers of each rotation axis and notice what happens to your prim.

2-3.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Take some time to move and rotate all the prim shapes. Just using the shapes you know, can you make an ice cream cone? What else can you make?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 87 of 438

An Introduction to Building Resizing a Prim LEVEL: 2 MODULE: BUILDING: INTRODUCTION – MISSION 3

2-3.3 Introduction Now that you’ve seen all the different basic shapes you can rez, it’s time to learn to change their size.

2-3.3.1 Instruction You can resize a prim to be larger or smaller. You can also change a prim by changing just one dimension of it. For example, you can begin with a cube, and s-t-r-e-t-c-h it into a rectangle. Just like moving and rotating a prim, you can eyeball a prim’s shape and size, or resize it mathematically. This mission will teach you how to do both.

2-3.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Rez a cube R-click (Cmd-click) on the ground. Select Create from the pie menu. Click the wand where you want your prim to rez. Step 2: Stretching a prim With your Edit window open, select the Stretch button or just type CntrlShift. The small colored squares are handles you can click and drag to s-t-r-e-t-c-h your prim. Dragging a white square will make the prim smaller or larger, while keeping the exact shape of the prim. Try this now: Practice dragging the different colored squares to alter both the shape and size of your cube. Try making a large flat rectangle, tall thin tower and everything in between.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 88 of 438

Step 3: Using numbers to resize a prim Just as with positioning and rotating a prim, you can use exact numbers to size a prim. A prim is always rezzed a particular size. A cube, for example, always begins as half a meter (0.500) on each side. Tip: You may have noticed that when you stretched your prim, it stopped at some point. You cannot make a prim larger than 10 meters in one direction. Prims also cannot be smaller than 0.010 meters when you resize them using these methods. Try this now: Practice entering different values for each of the axes to see how they affect the size and shape of the cube. Step 4: Practice stretching and resizing other shapes Other shapes stretch and size in slightly different ways. Try this now: Take a few minutes to see how you can alter the other shapes you have to work with.

2-3.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Now you can stretch and make shapes different sizes. Can you put them together to make a more complex shape? A snowman, for example? Take some time to create something that takes several prims. You can move prims so they are partially inside each other to create really interesting shapes! When you are done experimenting, make sure to take a few minutes to clean up!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 89 of 438

An Introduction to Building Linking a Prim LEVEL: 2 MODULE: BUILDING: INTRODUCTION – MISSION 4

2-3.4 Introduction In the last mission, you started to put together a more complex object using at least a few prims. You may have wished to “glue” it together somehow and keep it. But how? That is what you will tackle in this mission!

2-3.4.1 Instruction Linking is the process of attaching prims together so they can be moved as one object. In this mission you will learn how to link and unlink prims. You will also learn how to edit a prim, even when it’s linked to another prim. Finally, you will learn about root prims and why they are important.

2-3.4.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Linking two prims Rez two prims close to each other. R-click (Cmd-click) on one of the prims to select it and choose Edit mode. Holding down the Shift Key, click on the other prim. You will notice that they are now both highlighted in yellow. From the top menu bar, choose Tools > Link (Ctrl-L) to link them both. Now, if you go position them, you can move them both. Try this now: Rez two prims and link them. Move and rotate them around. Note: If prims are too far apart, you will get a message saying they cannot be linked. The smaller the prim, the closer it must be to another prim to be linked.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 90 of 438

Step 2: Unlinking a group of prims To unlink a group of prims, R-click on them and choose Tools > Unlink (Ctrl-Shift-L) from the top menu bar. Try this now: Unlink the two prims you just linked. Step 3: Linking more than two prims If you are working with many prims, you can R-click (Cmd-click) on the first one, press the shift key down and carefully shift-click on each other prim. When you are certain you have selected all of them, Select Tools > Link (Ctrl L). Try this now: Rez at least three or four prims and link them all. Check to see if they are linked by moving them as a group. If one gets â&#x20AC;&#x153;left behindâ&#x20AC;?, you can select the group of prims and then shiftclick on the ungrouped prim and link it as well. Step 4: Editing just one prim To change or delete just one prim in a group, select Edit Linked Parts from the Edit window. Then, click on the prim you want to edit. Try this now: Use the Edit Linked Parts button to edit just one prim. Try adjusting the position, resizing or rotating it. Step 5: Unlinking just one prim To unlink a single prim, make sure Edit Linked Parts is selected in the Edit Window. Click on the prim you want to unlink. Then select Tools > Unlink (Ctrl-shift-L) to unlink. Now, you can delete that prim without it affecting the other linked prims. Try this now: Select, unlink and delete just one prim in a linked group. Make sure you can do this without unlinking all the other prims! Step 6: About Root Prims A root prim is the last prim you select when linking a group of prims and has some special qualities you will want to be aware of: o The position of a group of linked prims is based on the location of the root prim. o The name of a group of prims is based on the name of the root prim. o Some scripts will act on the root prim in a special way. To find the root prim of a linked object, R-click (Cmd-click) on it so that it is in Edit mode. All the prims will be highlighted in blue except the root prim, which will be highlighted in yellow. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 91 of 438

Try this now: Find something that looks complicated enough to be made from more than one prim. R-click (Cmd-click) on it and choose Edit. You should see each prim highlighted, with the root prim in yellow. Note: This is a wonderful way to see how objects have been made! Step 7: Renaming and keeping your new Object By default, any group of linked prims is called Object. As soon as you create and link something you think youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;d like to keep, you should rename it with a descriptive name. To rename an object, R-click (Cmd-click) on it and choose the General tab from the Edit window. Double-click on Object in the Name field and type in your new name. You may also type a description in the Description field if you wish. Now, when you put your new creation into your Inventory, youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ll be able to find it much more easily.

2-3.4.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: What object can you make using some of the skills you now know? A chair? Simple house? Table? Take some time and try to make and link something using at least 5 prims. Remember to name your object when you are done.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 92 of 438

Avatar: Clothing Module Overview LEVEL: 2 MODULE: AVATAR: CLOTHING – OVERVIEW

2-4.0 Introduction Tired of that t-shirt and jeans your avatar may be wearing? Wouldn’t it be great to put on something that reflects your style? You can make new outfits from clothes you already have in your Inventory! In fact, you can make and style new, one-of-a-kind creations just by using the tools in Second Life. This module will show you how.

2-4.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing. Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Technology – Understands the relationships among science, technology, society, and the individual - Observes common courtesies and acceptable use policies while telecomputing o Behavioral Studies – Understands that group and cultural influences contribute to human development, identity and behavior. 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 93 of 438

POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Finding other clothes in your Inventory o Changing your clothes in different ways o Modifying your clothes using the Appearance menu sliders o Saving modified clothing o Making new clothes using the Appearance menu sliders o Changing the texture or fabric of your new clothes You will demonstrate your new powers by: o • Using basic Library clothing to further individualize your look o • Modifying and saving an item of clothing o • Making and saving a new item of clothing

Location

Library clothing items Inventory > Library > Clothing

Fabric Textures Inventory > Library > Textures > Fabrics

2-4.0.2 Action Plan

TERMS: Drag onto: Clicking and holding an item – and then dragging it across the computer screen to a specific area. Permissions: Rules that define what an object’s owner can do with it (For example: copy, modify and/or transfer). Texture: An image or graphic applied to an item of clothing (or any other object or part of an avatar). Modify: To make changes to an avatar, object or script.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 94 of 438

TAKE ACTION: How do people around you think about someone who dresses â&#x20AC;&#x153;a certain wayâ&#x20AC;?? Are their views always accurate? What would others think about you if you dressed differently? Using all of your clothing skills, combine a few clothing items already in your Inventory with a few items you made from scratch or modifed to dress differently than you would in real life. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Show off your new clothes-making skills by proudly wearing your new outfit for your friends and others around you. As you walk around in Second Life wearing your new outfit, what does it feel like? How do people treat you? Blog about it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 95 of 438

Avatar: Clothing Changing your Clothes LEVEL: 2 MODULE: AVATAR: CLOTHING – MISSION 1

2-4.1 Introduction You’ve done a great job modifying your avatar to look a certain way. This module will help you use some of those same skills to modify Clothing.

2-4.1.1 Instruction As you explored the Inventory in Level 1, you may have noticed more clothing items under Inventory > Library > Clothing. You may have even begun to try a few items on! However, there are a few different tricks and ways of finding and putting on clothing items. Knowing these tips will help you find just what you’re looking for quickly and easily.

2-4.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Find out what you are already wearing. If you just want to change one item of clothing, it can be useful to see exactly what you already have on. Fortunately, there is an easy trick that will help you. In the Inventory search bar, type: Worn. All the items you are wearing will show up – Shape, Skin, Eyes, and Clothing items. Try it now: Type Worn in the Inventory search window and notice what you are currently wearing. Step 2: Noticing Clothing Layers Just as in real life, clothing in Second Life appears on your avatar in layers. Understanding how clothing items will show up can help you invent really interesting outfits. The upper half of your avatar puts on the following layers from first to last: Gloves > Undershirt > Shirt > Jacket The jacket layer is longer than the other layers and can be used for shirts that go over pants or skirts.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 96 of 438

The lower half of your avatar puts on the following layers from first to last: Socks > Underwear > Pants > Skirt The skirt and pants layer can be worn at the same time. Note: The Teen Grid does not offer undergarment options. Step 3: Changing a single item of clothing Now that you understand how clothing can be layered, try changing one item of clothing. Let’s try changing a shirt. In the Inventory Search bar, type: Shirt. All the items that contain that word in their description will show. You can drag and drop an item directly onto your avatar. Try it now: Choose a shirt you would like to put on. Click and drag that shirt from the inventory onto your avatar. In a few seconds, you will see the new shirt appear! You can also R-click (Cmd-click) on that item in your inventory. A menu will appear that includes an option to Wear. Try it now: In your Inventory, choose a shirt you would like to wear and R-click (Cmd-click) on that item. Choose Wear. Step 4: Changing an entire outfit You can also completely change an outfit at one time. Let’s find some outfits to practice with. Go to Inventory > Library > Clothing. You will notice folders containing complete clothing outfits (as well as shapes and skins). You can change all your clothes at one time by dragging a folder of clothing items onto yourself. Try it now: Choose a folder of clothing items and drag onto yourself. It will take a moment for everything to appear. Note: You may also find that you are still wearing some item from your first outfit – a skirt for example. If this is the case, R-click (Cmd-Click) on that item and choose Detach from the pie menu that appears. You may also find that you’ve lost other attachments – like some types of hair! If this happens, Search in your Inventory for what you’ve lost and Wear it again. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 97 of 438

2-4.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Now you do it! At this point, you may look a little… eclectic. :-) Take a few moments and use your new skills to change your clothes to reflect your avatar’s personality.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 98 of 438

Avatar: Clothing Modifying Clothes LEVEL: 2 MODULE: AVATAR: CLOTHING – MISSION 2

2-4.2 Introduction Just as with avatar shapes and skins, you can modify clothing items to reflect your personal taste! In fact, you can modify the fit, style and color, just by using the Appearance pane tools.

2-4.2.1 Instruction Modifying already created items in Second Life is fun and easy. As long as the clothing maker has set permission to modify, you can really play around with an item and change it a lot! Using the Appearance pane, you can use Clothing sliders to modify the fit, style and color of an already existing piece of clothing.

2-4.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Finding an item of clothing to modify An item can only be changed if the original creator has given permission for it to be modified. It’s easy to find this out. Let’s find an item of clothing and then check to see if it has modify permissions. Try this now: Navigate to the following item: Inventory > Library > Clothing > More Outfits > Ruth > Light Blue Pants R-Click (Cmd-Click) on Light Blue Pants. In the drop down menu that appears, choose Properties. In the information window that appears, you should see the Modify option as checked.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 99 of 438

Step 2: Wearing pants and opening Appearance pane Try this now: Using the drag and drop technique you learned in the last mission, drag those pants onto your avatar. Try this now: R-click (Cmd-click) on your avatar. Choose Appearance from the pie menu. Step 3: Using the Appearance sliders to modify style and fit Would you like those pants to be looser, longer or flared? You can use the Appearance sliders to adjust the style. Try this now: Choose the Pants button on the left hand side of the Appearance pane. A number of slider options will be available to change the look of those pants. Adjust the sliders to change the style of the pants to your liking. Step 4: Using the Appearance sliders and Color Picker to tint an item of clothing You can also adjust the color of an item of clothing! The pants you have on are a light color, which makes them easy to tint. Try this now: In the Appearance pane, Click on the Color Tint box. The Color Picker window will appear with a number of pre-selected color choices, as well as a spectrum of colors to select. Double-click on a color to change the tint of your pants. You may notice that lighter colors allow the details of the pants to show through more clearly. Experiment with different colors until youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve settled on one you like. Step 5: Renaming and Saving your new pair of pants When you modify an item, you can save and rename it as a brand new item! (Your original pair of pants will still be in your inventory.) Try this now: Choose Save As from the Appearance pane. Click on the box that appears and type in a descriptive name for your new pair of pants. Choose Save.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 100 of 438

2-4.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: For extra practice, find at least one other piece of clothing to modify, rename and save. A good shirt to modify is also in the same “Ruth” folder that contained the pants you just worked on. Inventory > Library > Clothing > Ruth > Violet Shirt Make sure you modify both the style and color of the shirt! Don’t forget to give it a new name and Save!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 101 of 438

Avatar: Clothing Making New Clothes LEVEL: 2 MODULE: AVATAR: CLOTHING – MISSION 3

2-4.3 Introduction You aren’t limited to only modifying clothing someone else has made. You can create clothing from scratch! While highly detailed clothing is made using image editors, such as Photoshop, you can use the Appearance pane to make simple clothing items.

2-4.3.1 Instruction In the last mission, you learned how to modify and tint an item of clothing. In this mission, you will also learn to create a brand new item, and apply a Texture. Your Inventory Library has several fabric textures, such as cotton, linen, wool and leather. In fact, there’s nothing to stop you from making a shirt or pair of pants with any texture! Let’s learn how to do this now.

2-4.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Creating a new clothing item Let’s try making a new shirt! Note: You may wish to have an Undershirt on during this mission. If you aren’t wearing one, search in your Inventory and drag one onto yourself now. Try this now: R-click (Cmd-click) on yourself, choose Appearance, and open up the Appearance pane. Choose the Shirt button on the left hand side. Choose the Take Off button to take off your current shirt. Now, choose Create New Shirt. You are now wearing a brand new shirt!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 102 of 438

Step 2: Choosing a style for your new shirt As in the last mission, you can modify this shirt to your liking. Try this now: Using the Clothing sliders, give your new shirt a new style and fit. Step 3: Choosing a Fabric for your shirt You can also choose a Texture for your shirt. There are many Textures that look like fabrics – as well as many other materials! Try this now: Above the Color/Tint box is a Fabric box. Double-click on it to open the Texture Picker. Within the Texture Picker is an inventory of all the textures you currently have. Open the following files to get to the fabric textures: Library > Textures > Fabric Click once on the texture named: Fabric – Stripes Horizontal 2. If the pattern on your shirt doesn’t change, either choose the Select button on the Texture Picker, or check to see that the Apply Immediately box is checked. Step 4: Choosing a Color for your new shirt Now might be a great time to tint your new shirt. You can do that using the Color Picker you learned about in the last mission. Try this now: Using the Color/Tint box and Color Picker, choose a nice color for your shirt. Step 5: Make last adjustments, rename and save Now’s your chance to readjust the style, color or texture of your new shirt. After you’re happy with the changes, rename and Save! Try this now: Save As and rename your shirt with a distinctive name. Step 6: Finding your new shirt When you make new clothing, it will show up in your My Inventory under Clothing. Try this now: Find the shirt you just made Inventory > My Inventory > Clothing

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 103 of 438

2-4.3.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: How do people around you think about someone who dresses â&#x20AC;&#x153;a certain wayâ&#x20AC;?? Are their views always accurate? What would others think about you if you dressed differently? Using all of your clothing skills, combine a few clothing items already in your Inventory with a few items you made from scratch or modifed to dress differently than you would in real life. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Show off your new clothes-making skills by proudly wearing your new outfit for your friends and others around you. As you walk around in Second Life wearing your new outfit, what does it feel like? How do people treat you? Blog about it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 2

GKCx - 104 of 438

Dedicated to our fathers.

GKCx by Jeremy Kemp, Stephen Kemp is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Noncommercial-Share Alike 3.0 United States License.

GKCx - 105 of 438

Global Kids' Second Life Curriculum LESSON PLANS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; LEVEL 3

Global Kids' Second Life Curriculum. Fall, 2007. ÂŠ2007.

GKCx - 106 of 438

TABLE OF CONTENTS

STANDARDS

Learning Standards addressed in this curriculum BUILDING: PLAYING WITH SHAPES

Module Overview 3-1.0 Introduction 3-1.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 3-1.0.2 Action Plan

Different Ways to Rez Basic Shapes 3-1.1 Introduction 3-1.1.1 Instruction 3-1.1.2 Practice 3-1.1.3 Action Plan

Attachment Points 3-1.2 Introduction 3-1.2.1 Instruction 3-1.2.2 Practice 3-1.2.3 Action Plan

Hollow and Hollow Shape 3-1.3 Introduction 3-1.3.1 Instruction 3-1.3.2 Practice 3-1.3.3 Action Plan

Taper, Top Shear and Dimple 3-1.4 Introduction 3-1.4.1 Instruction 3-1.4.2 Practice 3-1.4.3 Action Plan

Attachment Points 3-1.5 Introduction 3-1.5.1 Instruction 3-1.5.2 Practice 3-1.5.3 Action Plan

COMMUNICATING: INSTANT MESSAGING

Module Overview 3-2.0 Introduction 3-2.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 3-2.0.2 Action Plan

More ways to IM 3-2.1 Introduction 3-2.1.1 Instruction 3-2.1.2 Practice

1 2

2 2 2 3

5 5 5 5 6

7 7 7 7 8

9 9 9 9 10

12 12 12 12 13

14 14 14 14 15

17 17 17 18

20 20 20 20

GKCx - 107 of 438

3-2.1.3 Action Plan

IM to Email 3-2.2 Introduction 3-2.2.1 Instruction 3-2.2.2 Practice 3-2.2.3 Action Plan

IMing a Group 3-2.3 Introduction 3-2.3.1 Instruction 3-2.3.2 Practice 3-2.3.3 Action Plan

22 22 22 22 23

24 24 24 24 25

MEDIA: SNAPSHOTS

Module Overview

3-3.0 Introduction 3-3.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 3-3.0.2 Action Plan

Saving Snapshots to Disk 3-3.1 Introduction 3-3.1.1 Instruction 3-3.1.2 Practice 3-3.1.3 Action Plan

Saving Snapshots to Your Inventory 3-3.2 Introduction 3-3.2.1 Instruction 3-3.2.2 Practice 3-3.2.3 Action Plan

Putting a Snapshot in Your Profile 3-3.3 Introduction 3-3.3.1 Instruction 3-3.3.2 Practice 3-3.3.3 Action Plan

Sending a Postcard 3-3.4 Introduction 3-3.4.1 Instruction 3-3.4.2 Practice 3-3.4.3 Action Plan

Giving Snapshots 3-3.5 Introduction 3-3.5.1 Instruction 3-3.5.2 Practice 3-3.5.3 Action Plan

TEXTURES: AN INTRODUCTION TO TEXTURES

Module Overview 3-4.0 Introduction 3-4.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 3-4.0.2 Action Plan

Finding and Using Textures 3-4.1 Introduction

26 26 28

29 29 29 29 30

31 31 31 31 32

33 33 33 33 34

35 35 35 35 36

37 37 37 37 38

39 39 39 40

41 41

GKCx - 108 of 438

3-4.1.1 Instruction 3-4.1.2 Practice 3-4.1.3 Action Plan

41 41 42

Color and Transparency

3-4.2 Introduction 3-4.2.1 Instruction 3-4.2.2 Practice 3-4.2.3 Action Plan

43 43 43 45

Repeats 3-4.3 Introduction 3-4.3.1 Instruction 3-4.3.2 Practice 3-4.3.3 Action Plan

Offsets 3-4.4 Introduction 3-4.4.1 Instruction 3-4.4.2 Practice 3-4.4.3 Action Plan

46 46 46 46 47

48 48 48 48 49

GKCx - 109 of 438

Learning Standards addressed in this curriculum McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

GKCx - 110 of 438

Building: Playing With Shapes Module Overview LEVEL: 3 MODULE: BUILDING: SHAPES – OVERVIEW

3-1.0 Introduction Cubes, spheres and pyramids are all great shapes to use for building. By now, you’ve probably looked at amazing and unusual shapes and wondered, “How did they DO that?” In this module, you will learn how to edit these basic shapes to make fantastic new building blocks to use in your builds. The information in this module is easy to understand and FUN! Take the time to try out each of the concepts. You will be rewarded with the knowledge you need to make whatever shape you can imagine.

3-1.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing: Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing - Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Engineering Education – Understands elements of planning construction projects – Understands the steps involved in designing construction projects (e.g., planning, generating layouts, developing drawings with measurements and details of construction considering constraints, selecting materials) o Mathematics – Understands and applies the basic and advanced properties of the concepts of geometry - Uses properties of and relationships among figures to solve mathematical and real-world problems o Mathematics – Understands and applies basic and advanced properties of the concepts of measurement - Uses unit analysis to solve problems involving measurement and unit conversion (e.g., between metric and U.S. customary systems, foreign currency conversions) o Mathematics – Understands the physical and human characteristics of place - Knows how social, cultural, and economic processes shape the features of places 21st Century Student Outcomes: Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 111 of 438 URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

o Learning and Innovation Skills – Creativity and Innovation o Information, Media and Technology Skills – ICT (Information, Communications and Technology) Literacy o Life and Career Skills – Social & Cross-Cultural Skills POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Rezzing different shapes in different ways o Cutting and hollowing prims o Tapering and shearing prims o Twisting prims You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Creating amazing new shapes to use in your own creative builds Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o Levels 1and 2 MATERIALS: Item

TERMS: Taper: Decreasing the size of one end of an object. Shear: Cutting the end off an object at an angle.

Location

No special items needed

3-1.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, let’s see if you’ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 112 of 438

TAKE ACTION: Shelter â&#x20AC;&#x201C; a house -- is a basic need for each person on this planet. However, shelters in different parts of the world can look very different. Each part of the world designs shelters to meet the specific needs and resources of that area and culture. Using all of your new building skills, design and build a shelter for people in an area of the world unfamiliar to you. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Blog about your shelter. Include a snapshot! Why did you choose that area of the world? Does your shelter look like actual shelters in that area? Why did you make the building choices you did? How is it similar or different from your own home?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 113 of 438

Building: Playing With Shapes Different Ways to Rez Basic Shapes LEVEL: 3 MODULE: BUILDING: SHAPES – MISSION 1

3-1.1 Introduction All building starts with putting together basic shapes. Just like a real set of wooden building block, different shapes can be stacked and put together to form new shapes. However, in Second Life, you can start with a basic shape and change it into something very different. Before you learn how to change, or edit, basic prim shapes, let’s review the different ways you can rez these basic shapes.

3-1.1.1 Instruction There are two main ways you can rez a basic shape. You can use the Edit window to create a basic shape or you can create a default cube and then change its shape. Let’s practice both ways now..

3-1.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Using the Edit window to rez a basic shape In earlier missions, you became very familiar with R-clicking (Cmd-click) on the ground, choosing Create from the pie menu and rezzing many cubes! However, you can choose which shape you want to rez by opening the Edit window before you create a prim. TRY THIS NOW: Open the Edit window from the top menu bar. Select the Create button. Select one of the shapes you see. Tools > Edit > Create button > Shape button Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 114 of 438

Now, click on the ground to create that shape. Using this method, practice selecting and rezzing each of the basic shapes shown. Note: You will not be able to rez the plant shapes unless you own the land on which you are building. Step 2: Changing a cube to another basic shape You can also begin by rezzing the default cube and then changing it to another basic shape. With a cube in Edit mode, open the Edit window to the Object tab. In the Edit window, on the left side of the Object tab, is a dropdown menu: Building Block Type. Clicking on the down arrow will show a menu of basic shapes. Clicking on one of those shapes will change the cube to that shape! TRY THIS NOW: R-click (Cmd-click) on the ground, choose Create from the pie menu and rez a cube. With the Edit window open to the Object tab, choose the Building Block Type drop-down menu and choose another shape. Now click through the other shapes to see what happens. If you try to go back to your original shape, you may find it has changed. Try clicking back on the Box shape to see what it looks like now. Note: A Sculpted prim shape is a special kind of prim that will be covered in a later building module. For now, just explore the basic shapes.

3-1.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Make sure you take the time to play around with all the shapes. Spending some time now will make you a better and more creative builder in the long run.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 115 of 438

Building: Attachments Attachment Points LEVEL: 3 MODULE: BUILDING: SHAPES – MISSION 2

3-1.2 Introduction Building is just going to get cooler and cooler. What if you could just cut a “chunk” or a “wedge” out of a shape?

3-1.2.1 Instruction You can cut different sized chunks out of shapes using the Path Cut Begin and End control. You will experiment with different basic shapes to see how this control affects each of them. Let’s begin!

3-1.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: The Path Cut Begin and End control The Path Cut Begin and End control is located below the Building Block Type dropdown menu. The Path Cut Begin and End control will cut a section out of any shape you rez. The path it cuts is along the Z axis (the blue axis). The width of the slice, or chunk, that is removed depends on the Begin (B) and End (E) number values you choose. Values can range from 0.000 – 1.000. TRY THIS NOW: Rez a cube. Make sure your cube is in Edit mode. With the Object tab of the Edit window open, use the up/down arrows of the Path Cut control to change both the B (Begin) and E (End) number values. Do you see how your choices affect the size of the “chunk” that is removed? Selecting a small value will look like a small slice has been cut out of your prim. A large value will leave only a slice. TRY THIS NOW: Try removing slices or chunks from each of the other basic shapes. Experiment with different number settings to see if you can make a shape exactly the way you want it. Take your time!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 116 of 438

3-1.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Naming and saving favorite shapes is a real timesaver when you build. Good builders donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t recreate a common shape each time they build; they take it out of their inventory. Take a few moments to rename and save some of the great new shapes you think you will use in your future building projects. You might also take a few minutes to practice your texturing. Slightly changing the color of a cut face can really improve the look of an object.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 117 of 438

Building: Playing With Shapes Hollow and Hollow Shape LEVEL: 3 MODULE: BUILDING: SHAPES â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 3

3-1.3 Introduction What if you could cut a hole in the middle of a shape and hollow it out. You can!

3-1.3.1 Instruction Every basic shape can be hollowed out. In fact, even the shape of the hole can be changed. For example, you can put a square hole in a sphere or a round hole in a pyramid.

3-1.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Making a default hole When you first rez any basic shape, it is not hollow. To hollow a shape, choose the Hollow control, which is usually right underneath the Path Cut Begin and End control. A shape can be hollowed up to 0.95%. It is usually hollowed along the Z axis (blue axis). TRY THIS NOW: Rez a cube. Using the Hollow control, select the up/down arrows to hollow the cube. Do you see how the higher numbers make the hole in the cube larger? Step 2: Changing the default hole shape Once you begin to make even a small hole in a shape, the Hollow Shape drop down menu will become active. Now you can change the shape of the hole to a circle, square or triangle. TRY THIS NOW: Rez a cube and hollow it. Rotate it so you can see the shape of the hole. It should be square to match the square shape.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 118 of 438

Select the Hollow Shape drop down menu and select Circle or Triangle. Notice how the shape of the hole changes instantly! Step 3: Hollowing other shapes Actually seeing what happens to other shapes can inspire you with new building ideas. TRY THIS NOW: Select other shapes and experiment with hollowing them. Change the shape and size of the holes. Note: The Ring, Torus and Tube shapes hollow much differently than the other shapes. Make sure you take the time to really look at them. Step 4: Combining Hollowing with Cutting When you begin to combine different building controls, you can really come up with some interesting shapes. TRY THIS NOW: Look at the bench in the photo. It is made of three basic cubes. The texture is the Old Wood texture in your default Library Inventory. You’ve already learned everything you need to recreate it. Can you? *Hint: You can find the steps below if you get stuck.

3-1.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Using all the building knowledge you have so far, make something wonderful. You are going to be a fabulous builder! *Hint: How to make the bench Rez a basic cube. Stretch and flatten it to make the bench seat. Rez a second cube, and cut it to make a “V” shape for the legs. (You may need to rotate it at this point.)

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 119 of 438

Narrow the width of the legs to your liking.

Hollow the second cube to your liking and change the Hollow Shape to circle. Apply a texture to both the seat and leg section.

Select the leg section and shift-drag to make another leg section. Position the legs and top so they look like a bench. Link the three prims together and rename. Nice job! .

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 120 of 438

Building: Playing With Shapes Taper, Top Shear and Dimple LEVEL: 3 MODULE: BUILDING: SHAPES – MISSION 4

3-1.4 Introduction You have already come a long way in learning how to edit and change basic prim shapes. Now things are about to get really interesting. Different shapes can react much differently to the same control. Two of those controls are Taper and Top Shear.

3-1.4.1 Instruction When you taper something, you usually make it smaller at one end. When you shear something, it usually looks a little lopsided – like it’s leaning over a bit. However, how Taper and Top Shear look with different basic shapes can be very different! For this mission, your job is to really experiment with all the different basic shapes to see what happens. Note: As you follow along, you will notice that different shapes show Taper and Top Shear in different places in the Object tab of the Edit window.

3-1.4.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Taper When a prim is tapered, the top end usually becomes smaller. A prim can be tapered from 0.00 to 1.00 percent on both the X (red) and Y (green) axes. If you can choose negative taper values, such as -0.01 to -1.00, [for a prim, the bottom end will be tapered. TRY THIS NOW: Rez a cube and a cylinder. For both, use the Taper control up/down arrows to taper both the X and Y axes to 1.00. Did you get a pyramid and a cone? Experiment to see what happens if you use smaller taper values. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 121 of 438

Step 2: Tapering other shapes While a sphere cannot be tapered, the other shapes can. The results can be really surprising! TRY THIS NOW: Rez all the other shapes (except for the sphere and half sphere). Really experiment with the amounts of X and Y taper. What is the most surprising shape you have discovered so far? Step 3: Dimple Spheres and half spheres cannot be tapered. Instead, they can be dimpled Just like the dimples on someoneâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s chin, a dimple on a sphere makes a small dent, just at the end. TRY THIS NOW: Rez a sphere. Change the numbers in the Dimple Begin and End control to see what happens. What might you make if you also hollowed that sphere? Step 4: Top Shear For some prims, such as cubes and cylinders, the Top Shear control will make them look like they are leaning to one side. For other prims, such as toruses, or rings, Top Shear will distort them in unexpected ways! You can use Top Shear on the X (red) or Y (green) axis â&#x20AC;&#x201C; or both! TRY THIS NOW: Rez each basic prim shape and experiment with the Top Shear control. Change the settings for both the X an Y axes and see what happens.

3-1.4.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Are you beginning to see how much you can change those basic prims? It can really be fascinating to play with shapes. At this point, you are probably surrounded by your strangely-shaped objects. Take a moment to clean up. Name and save shapes you really like and delete the rest. Now travel around Second Life, and R-click (Cmd-click) on objects you see and choose Edit. The prims will be outlined and you can see what kinds of shapes are being used in some of your favorite builds. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 122 of 438

Building: Attachments Attachment Points LEVEL: 3 MODULE: BUILDING: SHAPES – MISSION 5

3-1.5 Introduction When you began this module, you may never have dreamed you could make these kinds of shapes. But wait – there’s more! You can twist prims, too.

3-1.5.1 Instruction In this last mission on shapes, you will learn to twist different shapes in different ways. Much like twisting a towel or crumpling a piece of paper, twisting prims will lead to some very interesting shapes. Take your time and fully explore how the “twisting” controls affect each different shape. For some shapes, you will have additional twist controls, which will be explained along the way.

3-1.5.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Simple Twist Some shapes, such as cubes and cylinders, have only a simple Twist Begin and End control. To really twist these shapes, choose a large beginning number and a large negative ending number. TRY THIS NOW: Rez both a cube and a cylinder and experiment with twisting them using the Twist Begin and End control. To really see the twists, you may want to stretch them into columns first. Other shapes that are based on the cube and cylinder shape will act much the same way. Try twisting pyramids, triangles and cones. Step 2: Twisting Spheres Like cubes and cylinders, spheres have only the Twist Begin and End control. However the results of using that one control are really neat! TRY THIS NOW: Rez a sphere. Change the numbers on the Twist Begin and End Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 123 of 438

control to see what happens. Pretty fascinating! Tip: Combining the control with hollow and dimple can make amazing flower petal-like shapes. Step 3: Toruses, Tubes and Rings As you’ve seen all along, these shapes always seem to do unexpected and surprising things. Twisting them is no exception. You can easily make springs and curl shapes. In fact, these shapes have additional “twist” controls you can change. In addition to Twist Begin and End, you can control the: o Hole Size – The size of the hole in the middle of the spring. o Radius Delta – The extent to which each individual coil becomes smaller or larger. o Revolutions – How many coils are in a spring shape. o Skew – How flat or rounded each coil appears. Play with these and you will end up with some amazingly complex shapes. This is one reason that many plant-like and hair prims begin with toruses or tubes – they can be changed in radical ways. TRY THIS NOW: Rez a torus. Begin by changing the Twist Begin and End controls. Now, experiment with the Hole Size. Do you see the size of the hole in the middle of the spring changing? Finally, change the Radius Delta and Revolutions controls to see what they will do. As you change the Radius Delta, each individual coil in your spring will get smaller and smaller, like a pyramid of coils. The higher the Revolutions, the more coils in your spring! Tip: Expert builders spend a lot of time learning how to make exactly the “right” shape. There is just no shortcut to figuring these shapes out. If you find you’ve made something unique and beautiful, name and save it!

3-1.5.3 Action Plan Learning about shapes never ends. Just when you think you've seen it all, you learn something new. The best builders never stop learning! What would happen if you were to combine "twists" with all the other techniques you've learned in this module? TAKE ACTION: Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 124 of 438

Shelter â&#x20AC;&#x201C; a house - is a basic need for each person on this planet. However, shelters in different parts of the world can look very different. Each part of the world designs shelters to meet the specific needs and resources of that area and culture. Using all of your new building skills, design and build a shelter for people in an area of the world unfamiliar to you. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Blog about your shelter. Include a snapshot! Why did you choose that area of the world? Does your shelter look like actual shelters in that area? Why did you make the building choices you did? How is it similar or different from your own home?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 125 of 438

Communicating: Instant Messaging Module Overview LEVEL: 3 MODULE: COMMUNICATING: INSTANT MESSAGING – OVERVIEW

3-2.0 Introduction In Level 1 you learned what an Instant Message is and how you can send one to a nearby resident. You only touched the tip of the iceberg; now it is time to go deep. Really deep. In this module you will learn everything there is to know about Instant Messaging.

3-2.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Listening and Speaking – Uses listening and speaking strategies for different purposes - Adjusts message wording and delivery to particular audiences and for particular purposes (e.g., to defend a position, to entertain, to inform, to persuade) o Engineering Education – Writing –Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Mathematics – Understands the relationships among science, technology, society, and the individual - Observes common courtesies and acceptable use policies while telecomputing o Mathematics – Displays effective interpersonal communication skills - Knows strategies to effectively communicate in a variety of settings (e.g., selects appropriate strategy for audience and situation) 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 126 of 438

POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o • Instant messaging using calling cards o • Instant messaging using the Communicate button o • Receiving instant messages in your email o • Instant messaging a group o • Creating IM groups and instant messaging them You will demonstrate your new powers by: o • Instant messaging residents who are not near you o • Receiving instant messages in your email o • Instant messaging a group o • Creating IM groups and instant messaging them Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o Levels 1and 2

TERMS: IM (Instant Message): The exchange of typed messages between computer users in real time via the internet.

MATERIALS: Item

Location

Calling Cards

Inventory > My Inventory > Calling Cards

3-2.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, let’s see if you’ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 127 of 438

TAKE ACTION: Collaborate on a short story with a group of friends using IMs. For this exercise you can create a new IM group or use an existing group. Assign an order to the members of the IM group. Have each person IM a sentence of the story on his/ her turn. You decide when the story ends.

SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Capture the log of the story created by your group and blog it. Make sure to ask the group if they mind having their story “published”!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 128 of 438

Communicating: Instant Messaging More ways to IM LEVEL: 3 MODULE: COMMUNICATING: INSTANT MESSAGING â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 1

3-2.1 Introduction You already know how to IM avatars near you. You can also send IMs to someone who is not near you!

3-2.1.1 Instruction This mission will show you the different ways in which you can send an IM to those that are not around you.

3-2.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Sending an IM using calling cards You can send an IM to any person you have a calling card for. Locate and select their calling card from your Inventory. Double-click on the card to view their profile. Then click on the Instant Message button on their profile Second Life tab. You can also R-click (Cmd-click) a calling card and select Send Instant Message from the drop down menu. TRY THIS NOW: IM someone using his or her calling card. Step 2: Communicate button Click the blue Communicate button at the bottom left corner of the screen. In the window that opens, click the Friends tab on the left.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 129 of 438

Select a friend by clicking on the name. Then press the small blue IM button on the right or double click a name to send an IM. You can have multiple IM conversations at the same time and they will appear as different tabs in the same window. Click on the Contacts tab at the bottom of the window to select another person you want to send an IM to. TRY THIS NOW: IM someone using the Communicate button.

3-2.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: IM a few friends and ask them to describe one action they have taken to stop global warming. Also tell them one action you have taken to protect the environment.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 130 of 438

Communicating: Instant Messaging IM to Email LEVEL: 3 MODULE: COMMUNICATING: INSTANT MESSAGING – MISSION 2

3-2.2 Introduction So now you know how to IM someone who is not near you. You can also IM someone who is offline. They will see the IM when they log back into Second Life or sooner if they have it set up so that IMs get sent to their email. I bet you didn’t know that could be done. And there’s more, if they reply to the email you will receive the IM in Second Life instantly.

3-2.2.1 Instruction This mission will show you how you can receive Instant Messages in your email and reply to them without being inworld.

3-2.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: IM to email The following setup will ensure that your IMs get sent to your email address: o In the Edit menu, click on the last option called Preferences o In the Preferences window, click on the Communication tab on the left o On the right, select the option IM to Email. Your email address will appear in brackets. If it is not the correct one, you will have to log into your account on http://www.secondlife.com to change it. o Press Apply and then Ok

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 131 of 438

TRY THIS NOW: Ask a friend to send you an IM after you have logged off Second Life. Check your email to see if you received it. Then reply to the email.

3-2.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Start an IM conversation with a friend when you are inworld. Then log off Second Life and continue your IM conversation via email.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 132 of 438

Communication: Instant Messaging IMing a Group LEVEL: 3 MODULE: COMMUNICATING: INSTANT MESSAGING â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 3

3-2.3 Introduction Just when you thought you had learned everything about Instant Messaging you find out about group IM.

3-2.3.1 Instruction This mission will show you not only how to IM a group that you are a part of in Second Life, but also how to create custom IM groups using your calling card list. Then, you can send IMs to all members of the group at once.

3-2.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: IM a group Click on the Groups tab in the Communicate window. If you are part of a group in Second Life, your group will be listed there. Double-click on the list to send an IM to the group. Try this now: If you are part of a group in Second Life, IM the group. Step 2: Create IM groups You can also create other IM groups of residents you want to communicate with on a regular basis by creating a calling cards folder for the group. R-click (Cmd-click) the Calling Cards folder in the Inventory and select New Folder. Give it a name that best describes the group. Rclick (Cmd-click) and choose Rename. Copy the calling cards of the desired residents and place them in that folder. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 133 of 438

R-click (Cmd-click) on a calling card and choose Copy, then R-click (Cmd-click) the folder and choose Paste. Tip: Copy allows you to put the same person in multiple folders. You can start an IM session with all the residents in a folder by R-clicking (Cmd-click) on the group's folder, then selecting Start Conference Chat from the drop down menu. Start Conference Chat opens the conversation with everyone in your folder who is currently online. Offline residents will not receive the conversation. TRY THIS NOW: Create two IM groups and send each group a quote or a thought for the day that you think they would enjoy.

3-2.3.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: Collaborate on a short story with a group of friends using IMs. For this exercise you can create a new IM group or use an existing group. Assign an order to the members of the IM group. Have each person IM a sentence of the story on his/ her turn. You decide when the story ends. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Capture the log of the story created by your group and blog it. Make sure to ask the group if they mind having their story â&#x20AC;&#x153;publishedâ&#x20AC;?!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 134 of 438

Media: Snapshots Module Overview LEVEL: 3 MODULE: MEDIA: SNAPSHOTS – OVERVIEW

3-3.0 Introduction In this module you will find out how to record some of your Second Life memories by taking photos as you explore the virtual world. You can build up a virtual photo album on your computer of snapshots of your friends from all over the real world. Once you’ve got some cool photos, how about sharing them with your friends? You can give copies of the snapshots in your Inventory to other people. You can send your real life friends a postcard from your virtual holiday to make them envious. You can even send your photos to image-sharing websites to show the rest of the world! You can also use your photos as textures on prims or in your profile.

3-3.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing- Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Technology – Knows the characteristics and uses of computer hardware and operating systems - Knows features and uses of current and emerging technology related to computing o Visual Arts – Understands and applies media, techniques, and processes related to the visual arts - Applies media, techniques, and processes with sufficient skill, confidence, and sensitivity that one’s intentions are carried out in artworks o Geography – Understands that culture and experience influence people's perceptions of places and regions - Understands why places and regions are important to individual human identity and as symbols for unifying or fragmenting society

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 135 of 438

21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

o Learning and Innovation Skills – Creativity and Innovation o Learning and Innovation Skills – Communication and Collaboration o Information, Media and Technology Skills – ICT (Information, Communications and Technology) Literacy o Life and Career Skills – Social & Cross-Cultural Skills POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Taking pictures of what you can see on your screen (snapshots) o Saving snapshots on your computer’s hard drive o Saving photos to your Inventory and renaming them o Using snapshots as textures on prims o Putting a snapshot into your profile o Emailing a snapshot to your friends and to photo sharing websites o Giving a snapshot to other avatars o Changing the way other people can use your photos You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Using your snapshots as your computer desktop picture or in a screensaver o Taking a photo of your friends and putting it on a prim on your wall o Taking a snapshot suitable for finding work in SL or running a business. o Posting favorite photos on a photo-sharing website Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o Levels 1 and 2

TERMS: Snapshot: a photograph taken in Second Life Postcard: a snapshot sent by email

o Level 3 Module: Texturing: An Introduction

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 136 of 438

MATERIALS: Item L$10 for each snapshot you save (upload) to your inventory

Location World > Buy L$

3-3.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, let’s see if you’ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: You are going to take a set of snapshots in which each new photo has the last photo you took in the background. This gives an effect of standing in a fairground Hall of Mirrors! Part of the challenge is to find people from other countries around the world. You might want to use an atlas or Google Maps to see where these countries are in the world. To set up for the challenge, create a flat rectangular prim as tall as an avatar. Now choose one of the snapshots you have taken of yourself. Use it to texture the prim. The challenge: 1. Find another avatar from a different country or state than yourself. 2. Take a snapshot of them standing next to your prim. 3. Rename the snapshot so that it has the name of the avatar and their country or state. 4. Give them a copy of the snapshot you have taken as a thank you. 5. Use the new snapshot you have just taken as a new texture for your prim. Repeat steps 1 to 5 as many times as you can, with someone from a different country or state each time. You will be adding someone new to the picture every time, until eventually you can’t see the original picture of you any more! How many times can you repeat the stages? How many people from different countries or states have you found?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 137 of 438

Media: Snapshots Saving Snapshots to Disk LEVEL: 3 MODULE: MEDIA: SNAPSHOTS – MISSION 1

3-3.1 Introduction When you are traveling around Second Life you can see some incredible places, people and events. You can record some of your Second Life memories by taking photos as you explore the virtual world. You can even build up a virtual photo album on your computer of snapshots of your friends from all over your offline world.

3-3.1.1 Instruction The Snapshots feature of Second Life allows you to take pictures of what you can see on your screen, with or without showing all the menus and windows. You are going to start by taking snapshots and saving them on your computer’s hard drive.

3-3.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Taking simple snapshots Click on the Snapshot button on the bottom menu. This will bring up the Snapshot Preview window. Select the Save snapshot to hard drive option and press Save. You can then choose where on your hard drive to save the picture. Make sure you give the snapshot a name you will remember later. It is very difficult to find your favorite pictures when they are all called Snapshot1, Snapshot2, etc. Try this now: Take a shot! Save it to your hard drive and rename it something that will help you remember what it shows. Step 2: Taking a new photo Just like in real life, sometimes people look away or aren’t in the right position when you take a photo. It is very easy to take another picture quite quickly, though.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 138 of 438

TRY THIS NOW: Click on the Snapshot button to bring up the Snapshot window. There will be a little picture of the snapshot you have just taken. Try pressing the New Snapshot button. Did a new photo appear in the window? Save the photo when you are happy with it by clicking Save. Step 3: Adjusting angles Not happy with the framing or angle of your first snapshot? Your friend’s head isn’t in the picture? Can’t fit all of the building in the photo? TRY THIS NOW: Use your Camera Controls to move the camera then click New Snapshot when you are happy with how it looks. Try taking some snapshots of a place or object at strange angles. Does it still look recognizable? Step 4: Changing the time of day What if you want to take a photo of a friend and it is nighttime? Using the feature, Force Sun, you can make the sun appear to be a different time of day. World > Force Sun > Time of day options The changes will only apply to your own computer and last until you rest the option or log off. TRY THIS NOW: Use Force Sun to change the time of day and take a photo. When you are done, you can change the sun back by choosing Region Default.

3-3.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Take a photo of the same subject, but three different ways. In one photo change the sun. In all three change your camera angle without moving the position of your avatar. Save them all to your desktop with a good name, such as “Sandyportrait,” Sandyatmidnight," and “Sandyfromabove.”

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 139 of 438

Media: Snapshots Saving Snapshots to Your Inventory LEVEL: 3 MODULE: MEDIA: SNAPSHOTS – MISSION 2

3-3.2 Introduction What if you want to use your own pictures within Second Life? You can use them as textures on prims and show your photography skills to other people.

3-3.2.1 Instruction The Snapshots window allows you to save photos to your Inventory. You can use snapshots as textures on prims to make photo frames, posters or even large backdrops for a movie set or photo shoot. You will need L$10 for each snapshot you take in this mission.

3-3.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Taking a snapshot Click the Snapshot button to display the Snapshot window. There are three saving options in this window. Select the Upload a snapshot option. When you are happy with the snapshot angle and framing, click Save. In your My Inventory is a folder called Photos. Open this folder and double-click on the file called Snapshot. The snapshot that you took will open in a separate window. Step 2: Renaming the snapshot It is very easy to take a lot of snapshots and then forget which photo is which. It is a good idea to name your photos as you take them. Then, you can search for them when you need them. TRY THIS NOW: In your Photos folder, find the snapshot you just took. R-click (Cmd-click) the file and select Rename. Now type in a better name for the photo, such as “My friends in the Global Kids volcano”. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 140 of 438

Step 3: Using your snapshot as a prim texture You can use your Snapshots as textures on prims. TRY THIS NOW: Find an area where you can build, such as a sandbox. Create a cube on the ground. To add your texture to one side of a cube, drag the photo texture from your inventory onto the prim. Try this now on a few of the sides of the prim. Now try changing the texture of all the sides at the same time. Right-click on the prim and select Edit. Select the Texture tab and click on the texture square (it should be a wooden pattern). You should now see a window with your Inventory. Open the Photo Album folder and pick your new photo. Your photo will now be on all sides of the prim. You can stretch your cube to look like a poster or billboard, name it and take it back into your Inventory. Then, you can give a copy to friends whenever you want!

3-3.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Take a photo of your Second Life friends and put it in a prim you could hang on the wall.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 141 of 438

Media: Snapshots Putting a Snapshot in Your Profile LEVEL: 3 MODULE: MEDIA: SNAPSHOTS – MISSION 3

3-3.3 Introduction What kind of person are you in Second Life? What image do you want to give to other people? You can be a smart business person, a furry party animal, goth and emo, bling and colorful – anything! One of the ways people find out what kind of person you are in Second Life is by looking at your profile..

3-3.3.1 Instruction You can put a snapshot into your Profile.

3-3.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Taking a good snapshot Profile snapshots can look small. The best shots will be fairly close up. TRY THIS NOW: Use Camera Controls to focus on your head and shoulders. Take a snapshot of yourself. When you are happy with the picture, save it to your inventory and rename with a descriptive name like “Profile Photo”. Step 2: Adding a profile photo R-click (Cmd-click) on your own avatar and select Profile from the pie menu. Select the Second Life tab of your Profile.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 142 of 438

Double-click on the photo square and you will see your inventory appear. Find the photo you want and select it.

3-3.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Look at the photos in the profiles of a few of the people you have met. Compare theirs with your own. Take a new photo of yourself and make it your photo in your profile.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 143 of 438

Media: Snapshots Sending a Postcard LEVEL: 3 MODULE: MEDIA: SNAPSHOTS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 4

3-3.4 Introduction Did you ever want your real life friends to see some of the fun you have in Second Life? You can send them a postcard from your virtual holiday to make them envious. You can even send your photos to image-sharing websites to show the rest of the world!.

3-3.4.1 Instruction You can email a snapshot as a postcard to yourself, your friends or to websites like Snapzilla and Flickr.com. These options are free.

3-3.4.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Email yourself You can see what postcards to your friends will look like by sending a postcard to your own email address. TRY THIS NOW: Take a snapshot, this time selecting Send a postcard, then click Send. Type your own email address into the Recipientâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Email. Type in a subject and a silly message to yourself and click Send. Now go to your email, find the one you just sent, and open up it. Step 2: Send postcards to your friends TRY THIS NOW: Visit your favorite place in Second Life and take a snapshot.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 144 of 438

Select Send a Postcard, but this time type in your friend's email address. Type a subject and a message to your friend to say why you like this place or why they should join Second Life. Step 3: Send postcards to the web You can also add a snapshot to online photosharing applications. TRY THIS NOW: Take another snapshot and choose Send a Postcard. This time type in teen@slpics.com into the Recipientâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Email box. In the subject box type the title of your photo. In the message box type a description or a comment about your photo. Now open a web browser and go to the Snapzilla website at www.slpics.com. In the quick find section on the left, type your avatar name into the starting with box. Select your avatar name to see your snapshot.

3-3.4.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: There are more facilities and options available on Snapzilla if you set up an account. If this interests you, click on Register for Snapzilla on the left side of the page, enter your details and follow the instructions for linking the account to your avatar. Now you can choose favorite photos so you can find them again, change titles, descriptions and tags of your snapshots, and leave comments about photos. Try adding a comment about someone elseâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s snapshot. If you have an account on Flickr.com then you can send snapshots to your Flickr page. Read the instructions on www.flickr.com/account/uploadbyemail to find out how to set up your account and find out the special email address to use.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 145 of 438

Media: Snapshots Giving Snapshots LEVEL: 3 MODULE: MEDIA: SNAPSHOTS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 5

3-3.5 Introduction So, now youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve got some cool photos. How about sharing them with your friends? You can give copies of the snapshots in your Inventory to other people.

3-3.5.1 Instruction You can give a snapshot to another avatar who is standing next to you or to avatars on your Contacts list. You can also change the way other people can use your photos.

3-3.5.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Getting snapshots ready to give to your friend Before you give someone a snapshot, you need to decide what you want them to be able to do with it. You can set permissions for a snapshot, just like any other created object. TRY THIS NOW: Open your Inventory and find one of your snapshots. R-click (Cmd-click) on it and select Properties. This will open up the Inventory Item Property window. If you want your friend to be able to change the name of your snapshot, check the Modify box. If you want your friend to be able to make another copy of your snapshot, check the Copy box. If you want your friend to give the snapshot to anyone else, check the Resell/Give away box. Step 2: Giving your snapshots to people near you

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 146 of 438

TRY THIS NOW: Open your Inventory and find a snapshot. Drag the snapshot onto an avatar to give it to him or her. The snapshot will automatically open on his or her screen for them to view. Ask him or her to do the same with you, so you can experience it. Step 3: Giving your snapshots to other people If your friend is not logged on or is on another sim, you can still give him/her a snapshot. TRY THIS NOW: Select the Communicate button to open your contacts list. Pick the friend you want to send the photo to and open their profile. Drag the snapshot from your Inventory into the Give Item section of the Second Life tab.

3-3.5.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: INFINITE SNAPSHOT CHALLENGE You are going to take a set of snapshots where each new photo has the last photo you took in the background. This gives an effect of standing in a fairground Hall of Mirrors! Part of the challenge is to find people from other countries around the world. You might want to use an atlas or Google Maps to see where these countries are in the world. To set up for the challenge, create a flat rectangular prim as tall as an avatar. Now choose one of the snapshots you have taken of yourself. Use it to texture the prim. The challenge: 1. Find another avatar from a different country or state than yourself. 2. Take a snapshot of them standing next to your prim. 3. Rename the snapshot so that it has the name of the avatar and their country or state. 4. Give them a copy of the snapshot you have taken as a thank you. 5. Use the new snapshot you have just taken as a new texture for your prim. Repeat steps 1 to 5 as many times as you can, with someone from a different country or state each time. You will be adding someone new to the picture every time, until eventually you canâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t see the original picture of you any more! How many times can you repeat the stages? How many people from different countries or states have you found?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 147 of 438

Textures: An Introduction to Textures Module Overview LEVEL: 3 MODULE: TEXTURES: AN INTRODUCTION TO TEXTURES – OVERVIEW

3-4.0 Introduction As you look around Second Life, you will notice that objects are not only made up of shapes, but also patterns, known as textures. Great-looking objects have great-looking textures! In this module, you will learn how to apply great-looking textures to everything you build.

3-4.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing - Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Technology – Knows the characteristics and uses of computer hardware and operating systems - Knows features and uses of current and emerging technology related to computing o Mathematics – Understands and applies the basic and advanced properties of the concepts of geometry and measurement - Uses unit analysis to solve problems involving measurement and unit conversion o Visual Arts – Understands and applies media, techniques, and processes related to the visual arts - Applies media, techniques, and processes with sufficient skill, confidence, and sensitivity that one’s intentions are carried out in artworks 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 148 of 438

POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Putting graphics and images (textures) onto objects you create o Changing the color and transparency of an object o Changing how the size of a texture looks on an object You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Texturing created objects o Tinting and changing the transparency of created objects o Changing a texture to look the right size on each side of an object

TERMS: Texture: A graphic or image applied to an avatar or object.

o Levels 1 and 2 MATERIALS: Item

Location

Textures

Inventory > Library > Textures

3-4.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, letâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s see if youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: You now have the power to modify, or change, the texture of objects. You can find some objects to re-texture in your Library. In your Library, find the Basic Chair. Use your new texturing skills to change the look of your chair to reflect you. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Why did you choose the textures you did? What do they say about you? Blog it! Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 149 of 438

Textures: An Introduction to Textures Finding and Using Textures LEVEL: 3 MODULE: TEXTURES: AN INTRODUCTION TO TEXTURES – MISSION 1

3-4.1 Introduction What makes something look like it’s made of stone, fur or metal? The answer: Textures. Textures are graphics or images that are applied to an avatar or object. Now that you have some basic building skills under your belt, it’s time to make your creations look like something other than plywood!

3-4.1.1 Instruction Applying textures to an object is quick, easy and a ton of fun. In this mission, you will learn how to find images and textures and place them on an object.

3-4.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Finding textures You can use both Textures and Snapshots to change the look of your object. You have been given some textures and snapshots to use in your Inventory Library. Inventory > Library > Photo Album or Textures TRY THIS NOW: Find the Photo Album and Textures folders in your Inventory Library. Open the folders and double-click on a few textures and snapshots to see what you have there Step 2: Putting a texture on an object Rez a cube and make sure it’s in Edit mode. Choose the Texture tab. You will see a small square in the Texture tab labeled Texture. This is the texture that’s on your prim. Plywood, right? Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 150 of 438

To change that texture, double-click on the plywood square in the Texture tab. The Texture Picker window will come up, showing the texture currently on your object. It will also show you a list of all the textures and snapshots you have in your Inventory. TRY THIS NOW: Double-click on the texture square in the Texture tab. In the Texture Picker wndow, navigate to: Library > Textures > Wallpaper > Wallpaper – Blue Click once on Wallpaper – Blue to apply it to your prim. Did you see your prim change? Note: You can also search for a specific texture using the Search bar at the top of the Texture Picker. Step 3: Changing the texture on one side of a prim Each face (side) of a prim can have a different texture. To change the texture of each face, choose the Select Texture button from the Edit window. You will see a target on each face of the prim. Click on the face you would like to change. Now, you may select a new texture by double-clicking on the Texture square in the Texture table and clicking on a texture from the Texture Picker window. TRY THIS NOW: Select each face of your prim and apply a different texture to each one. (To see the top and bottom, you may need to reposition your prim or use Camera Controls for a better look.)

3-4.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Using your new building skills, take some time to rez some different shapes and sizes – and then texture them. Notice how the same texture looks on different shapes.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 151 of 438

Textures: An Introduction to Textures Color and Transparency LEVEL: 3 MODULE: TEXTURES: AN INTRODUCTION TO TEXTURES â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 2

3-4.2 Introduction Sometimes a texture is almost perfect. If only you could change the color just a bit. Guess what? You can. In fact, you can even make it almost transparent for special effects.

3-4.2.1 Instruction While you canâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t completely change colors in a texture, you can tint a texture or make it a solid color.

3-4.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Tinting a texture Rez a prim with the default plywood texture. Make sure it is in Edit mode. In the Texture tab, right next to the Texture Picker window, is a white box called Color. This is the Color Picker window. Click on it to bring up the Color Picker. By default, the Apply Immediately box in the lower left corner should be checked. To change the tint of your prim, click on any of the colored boxes towards the bottom of the Color Picker. TRY THIS NOW: With your prim in Edit mode, choose the Color Picker and click on one of the colors already provided for you. Notice that the wood grain still shows through the tint. Step 2: Choosing your own colors You are not limited to the colors already in the Color Picker. You may also design you own and save them to use on your projects. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 152 of 438

In the Color Picker, click anywhere on the large rainbow of colors (Spectrum). The exact color youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve chosen will appear in the box Current color. You will also see a slider to the right to adjust your color to be lighter or darker. If Apply Immediately is checked, you should see your prim take on the new color right away. If you would like to save that new color, just drag it out of the Current Color box to replace one of the default colors. TRY THIS NOW: With your prim selected, open the Color Picker and use the Spectrum to create a new color. Click on the light/dark slider to adjust. Drag it from the Current Color box to replace a default color. Note: You may also choose RGB values in the upper left corner to select a color. Step 3: Choosing a solid color To make a prim a solid color, open the Texture Picker and choose the Blank button. Your prim will look solid white. Now, you can use the Color Picker to tint it a solid color. Note: You may also select the Select Texture button to tint each face of a prim separately. Step 4: Transparency You can make an object up to 90% transparent using the Transparency control. While 0% is fully visible, 90% will make your object look like a faint shadow. TRY THIS NOW: Change the transparency of your prim. Note: There are completely, 100% transparent textures to be found in Second Life. However, you are not given one in your beginning Library. A friend or package of free textures may have a truly transparent texture you can use.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 153 of 438

3-4.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Try this for fun: Rez a cube and stretch it to look like a wall. Texture it with something like bricks or stone. Now, use Select Texture to select just one side and change the transparency to 90%. If you look at it from all sides, you will find you just made a one-way see-through wall!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 154 of 438

Textures: An Introduction to Textures Repeats LEVEL: 3 MODULE: TEXTURES: AN INTRODUCTION TO TEXTURES – MISSION 3

3-4.3 Introduction Now that you’ve begun texturing, you might be wondering how to make those textures look just right. How do you make each side (or face) of an object look proportional. That’s what this mission is all about.

3-4.3.1 Instruction When you apply a texture to a prim, it will completely fill each face exactly one time. If all the faces of your prim are the same size, it’s no problem. But what if you make something like a rectangle with different sized faces? You can fix that problem by adjusting the number of times a texture repeats on each side of your prim. It’s easy – and it will make your creations look so much better!

3-4.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Creating a prim with different sized faces When you create a prim with different sized faces, you will notice that the texture on each face “looks” different. TRY THIS NOW: Rez a plywood cube. Now stretch it to look like a wall. The wall in the example is: X: 3.0 Y: 0.5 Z: 2.0 Step 2: Applying a texture to all faces Depending on the texture you choose, you may notice a big difference in how a texture looks on each face. TRY THIS NOW: Choose the following texture from your Inventory Library and apply it to your wall.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 155 of 438

Texture Picker > Library > Textures > Buildings > Bricks Look at each face. Do you see how the bricks on the ends of the wall look squished? Step 3: Adjusting the texture repeat To make a texture look right (or proportional) on each face of your wall, you can change the repeat. In the Texture tab of the Edit window, the repeat is usually set to 1.000, which means the texture will repeat exactly one time. You may use the arrows to make the texture repeat fewer or more times. TRY THIS NOW: With your wall in Edit mode, make sure the Select Texture button is selected. Click on the target on the end of the wall (a skinny side). Change the repeat to the following: Horizontal: 0.200 Vertical: 1.000 Do the bricks on the end look better to you now? Feel free to adjust the repeats to see what the changes look like. Step 4: Flipping a texture Sometimes, you may get a better look by completely flipping a texture. You can do this by checking the Flip box next to the Repeats Per Face settings. TRY THIS NOW: Select just one face of your wall. Check and uncheck the Flip box for the horizontal and vertical repeat settings.

3-4.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Rez a few different shaped prims and apply different textures to them. Practice changing the horizontal and vertical repeats. Do you find you like oversize, fantasy-like textures or more realistic ones?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 156 of 438

Textures: An Introduction to Textures Offsets LEVEL: 3 MODULE: TEXTURES: AN INTRODUCTION TO TEXTURES – MISSION 4

3-4.4 Introduction Someone once said, “Variety is the spice of life.” If everything looks like it was stamped out of the same mold, it doesn’t look real.

3-4.4.1 Instruction You can add variety to your texturing by using the Offset feature in the Texture tab. Offset will allow you to slightly change the way your texture is applied to your objects.

3-4.4.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Making some steps Let’s say you want to make some wood steps. In real life, you know they would each have the same wood pattern. But you also know that they would look different from each other. TRY THIS NOW: Rez a cube. Stretch and flatten it to form a step. The step in our example is: X: 1.500 Y: 1.000 Z: 0.225 Texture it with: Inventory > Library > Textures > Atoll Textures > Atoll Woodwalkway Use the Select Texture button and adjust the front repeat of the step to: Horizontal: 1.000 Vertical: 0.500

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 157 of 438

Shift-click and drag to duplicate the step. Duplicate and position three or four steps to form stairs. NOW: Do you see how each step looks exactly the same? It looks pretty good – but not great. Step 2: Using Offset You can use Offset to adjust the texturing on an entire prim, or just one side at a time. It will depend on the texture and look you want. In real life, these wood steps would look like they were each made of different boards instead of the same ones. Let’s change that. TRY THIS NOW: In Edit mode, select the bottom step. In the Texture tab, change the Offset to: Horizontal: 0.300 Vertical: 0.800 Select the other steps one at a time. Change the Offset differently for each one. You don’t have to use “round” numbers. Tip: Combining Offset with Flip might give you even better results!

3-4.4.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: You now have the power to modify, or change, the texture of objects! You can find some objects to re-texture in your Library. In your Library, find the Basic Chair. Use your new texturing skills to change the look of your chair to reflect you! SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Why did you choose the textures you did? What do they say about you? Blog it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 3

GKCx - 158 of 438

Dedicated to our fathers.

GKCx by Jeremy Kemp, Stephen Kemp is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Noncommercial-Share Alike 3.0 United States License.

GKCx - 159 of 438

Global Kids' Second Life Curriculum LESSON PLANS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; LEVEL 4

Global Kids' Second Life Curriculum. Fall, 2007. ÂŠ2007.

GKCx - 160 of 438

TABLE OF CONTENTS

STANDARDS

Learning Standards addressed in this curriculum BUILDING: ADDITIONAL FEATURES

Module Overview 4-1.0 Introduction 4-1.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 4-1.0.2 Action Plan

Paramaters 4-1.1 Introduction 4-1.1.1 Instruction 4-1.1.2 Practice 4-1.1.3 Action Plan

Flexi Prims 4-1.2 Introduction 4-1.2.1 Instruction 4-1.2.2 Practice 4-1.2.3 Action Plan

Adding Light 4-1.3 Introduction 4-1.3.1 Instruction 4-1.3.2 Practice 4-1.3.3 Action Plan

About Sculpted Prims 4-1.4 Introduction 4-1.4.1 Instruction 4-1.4.2 Practice 4-1.4.3 Action Plan

GETTING AROUND: MAP AND MINI-MAP

Module Overview 4-2.0 Introduction 4-2.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 4-2.0.2 Action Plan

An Introduction 4-2.1 Introduction 4-2.1.1 Instruction 4-2.1.2 Practice 4-2.1.3 Action Plan

The World Map - Regions 4-2.2 Introduction 4-2.2.1 Instruction 4-2.2.2 Practice

1 2

2 2 2 3

5 5 5 5 6

7 7 7 7 9

10 10 10 10 12

13 13 13 13 14

16 16 16 17

19 19 19 19 20

21 21 21 21

GKCx - 161 of 438

4-2.2.3 Action Plan

World Map Legend

4-2.3 Introduction 4-2.3.1 Instruction 4-2.3.2 Practice 4-2.3.3 Action Plan

23 23 23 25

Zooming and Moving the World Map 4-2.4 Introduction 4-2.4.1 Instruction 4-2.4.2 Practice 4-2.4.3 Action Plan

Landmarks, Friends and Search 4-2.5 Introduction 4-2.5.1 Instruction 4-2.5.2 Practice 4-2.5.3 Action Plan

Location Coordinates 4-2.6 Introduction 4-2.6.1 Instruction 4-2.6.2 Practice 4-2.6.3 Action Plan

Making a SLURL

26 26 26 26 27

28 28 28 28 29

30 30 30 30 31

4-2.7 Introduction 4-2.7.1 Instruction 4-2.7.2 Practice 4-2.7.3 Action Plan

32 32 32 33

TELEPORTING & LANDMARKS

Module Overview: Getting Around 4-3.0 Introduction 4-3.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 4-3.0.2 Action Plan

Set Home 4-3.1 Introduction 4-3.1.1 Instruction 4-3.1.2 Practice 4-3.1.3 Action Plan

Landmarks 4-3.2 Introduction 4-3.2.1 Instruction 4-3.2.2 Practice 4-3.2.3 Action Plan

Teleporting 4-3.3 Introduction 4-3.3.1 Instruction 4-3.3.2 Practice 4-3.3.3 Action Plan

TEXTURES: BEYOND THE BASICS

Module Overview

34 34 34 35

37 37 37 37 38

39 39 39 39 40

41 41 41 41 43

GKCx - 162 of 438

4-4.0 Introduction 4-4.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 4-4.0.2 Action Plan

Fixing Flicker 4-4.1 Introduction 4-4.1.1 Instruction 4-4.1.2 Practice 4-4.1.3 Action Plan

Shiny and Bumpy 4-4.2 Introduction 4-4.2.1 Instruction 4-4.2.2 Practice 4-4.2.3 Action Plan

Light and Shadow 4-4.3 Introduction 4-4.3.1 Instruction 4-4.3.2 Practice 4-4.3.3 Action Plan

Finding and Uploading a Texture 4-4.4 Introduction 4-4.4.1 Instruction 4-4.4.2 Practice 4-4.4.3 Action Plan

Using Textures Wisely and Well 4-4.5 Introduction 4-4.5.1 Instruction 4-4.5.2 Practice 4-4.5.3 Action Plan

44 44 45

47 47 47 47 48

49 49 49 49 50

51 51 51 51 52

53 53 53 53 54

55 55 55 55 56

GKCx - 163 of 438

Learning Standards addressed in this curriculum McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

GKCx - 164 of 438

Building: Additional Features Module Overview LEVEL: 4 MODULE: BUILDING: ADDITIONAL FEATURES – OVERVIEW

4-1.0 Introduction You are now well on your way to creating whatever you can dream up! There are just few more building features that can make your creations really pop. Did you know that you can make a prim wiggle like jello or light up the area around it? You can also create a prim that can be walked through, or can fall to the ground or even disappear after a short time.

4-1.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

o Learning and Innovation Skills – Creativity and Innovation o Information, Media and Technology Skills – ICT (Information, Communications and Technology) Literacy Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 165 of 438

o Life and Career Skills – Social & Cross-Cultural Skills POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Changing qualities of objects so that they can disappear, be walked through or fall to the ground o Making objects that are flexible o Modifying objects so that they give off light o Using sculpted prims You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Creating a variety of objects that wiggle, flop, light up and even disappear! o Rezzing and modifying complex prims (sculpted prims) Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o Levels 1-3 MATERIALS: Item

Location

Sculpted prim textures

Inventory > Library > Textures

4-1.0.2 Action Plan

TERMS: Parameter: A characteristic or quality of a prim. Flexi prim: A regular prim that has special characteristics making it appear flexible. Phantom prim: A regular prim that can be walked or flown through. Physical prim: A regular prim that falls to the ground when positioned above the land.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 166 of 438

TAKE ACTION: Flags represent many of the ideas, values and events countries and other groups of people hold dear. If you were going to make a flag that represented you, what would be on it? Using all the skills youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve learned so far, make a flag that represents you! Use the flexi controls to make your flag flap in the wind. Use the light controls to light up your flag during the night! You may use other skills you already know to build, stage and take a snapshot of what you would like as a texture on your flag. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Why did you choose the images on your flag? What do they represent? Blog it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 167 of 438

Building: Additional Features Paramaters LEVEL: 4 MODULE: BUILDING: ADDITIONAL FEATURES – MISSION 1

4-1.1 Introduction Have you ever wished you could fly through the roof or walk through a wall? What about making an object that just disappears after a minute? You can do all that and more just by selecting some easy-to-use building features called parameters.

4-1.1.1 Instruction In Second Life building, a parameter defines a quality or characteristic of a prim. You can set a prim so it cannot be moved. You can also set it so that it falls to the ground, can be walked through or disappears. Let’s practice these easy features now.

4-1.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Finding the object parameter controls The object parameter controls are located in the Object tab. Edit Window > Object Tab > Object Parameters TRY THIS NOW: Find the object parameters. Notice that they are unchecked. Step 2: Locking an object Choosing the Locked parameter prevents an object from being accidentally moved or changed while building. It’s very useful when building a complex object or when building with others. TRY THIS NOW: Rez a prim. Choose Locked from the object parameters. Try to move it! Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 168 of 438

Step 3: Making an object physical Selecting the Physical parameter makes an object that looks like it responds to gravity. If it is rezzed in the air, it will fall to the ground! TRY THIS NOW: Rez a prim and choose Physical from the object parameters. Position it so that it is in the air above the ground. Close the Edit window and watch it fall! Step 4: Making an object temporary A Temporary object will disappear one minute after it rezzes. This feature can be great for special effects, like fireworks, or when you want to quickly show someone an object. You could even use a temporary prim as a stopwatch! TRY THIS NOW: Rez a prim and check the Temporary parameter. After one minute, you should see it disappear. Step 5: Making an object phantom An object that is Phantom can be moved through. If a wall is Phantom, you can walk through it! TRY THIS NOW: Rez a prim and stretch it so itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s larger than your avatar. Select Phantom from the object parameters. Now walk or fly through your prim!

4-1.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: These parameters are easy to use. You can even combine them! Could any of your previous creations use these features? Go modify them!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 169 of 438

Building: Additional Features Flexi Prims LEVEL: 4 MODULE: BUILDING: ADDITIONAL FEATURES – MISSION 2

4-1.2 Introduction Flapping flags and swirling skirts. What do these have in common? Flexi prims!

4-1.2.1 Instruction Flexi prims are regular prims that have flexible characteristics. They can seem to droop with gravity or sway with the wind. The flexi controls are easy to use and experiment with. Let’s get started!

4-1.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: What is a flexi prim? Flexi prims: o Can be made from any prim based on a cube or cylinder shape. o Are always phantom. o Cannot be physical. TRY THIS: Rez at least six cube or cylinder based shapes. Stretch each one so that it is taller than your avatar. You will change each one as you explore the different ways an object can become flexible! Step 2: Making a prim flexible The Flexi controls are located in the Edit window in the Features tab. Edit Window > Features Tab > Flexible Path Checking the Flexible Path box will make a prim flexible. TRY THIS: Edit a prim to make it flexible. You will see each flexible feature is preset with specific numbers. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 170 of 438

Step 2: Softness The Softness feature controls how soft, or floppy, a prim will appear. TRY THIS: Edit one of your prims and make it flexible. Practice changing the level of Softness. The higher the number, the softer the prim. Move your prim around to really see how soft it looks. Step 3: Gravity This control determines how much a prim will respond to gravity. A high number will make your prim slump over. You can even choose negative numbers if you want an object to have mysterious anti-gravity qualities! TRY THIS: Edit another prim and practice changing only the Gravity setting. Step 4: Drag Drag is the amount of air friction on an object. An object with low drag will wiggle like crazy! A high amount of drag will allow an object to sway gently. TRY THIS: Edit a prim and change the amount of Drag. Step 5: Wind The Wind settings determine how much a prim will react to the Second Life wind. Picture a wind sock or flag that changes direction with the wind. TRY THIS: Edit a prim and change the Wind settings. Try rotating and changing the position of the prim to see how it reacts to the wind. Step 6: Tension The Tension control adjusts the amount of springiness in a flexi prim. The lower the number, the springier it will be. TRY THIS: Change the amount of Tension in a prim. You may need to move it around to notice the change. Step 7: Force X, Y and Z Remember the axis directions? Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 171 of 438

Red: X axis - Green: Y axis - Blue: Z axis Increasing the Force of an axis makes the prim flop along that axis. TRY THIS: Edit a prim and change the amount of Force along each axis. Notice how the prim aligns itself along an axis as you increase the number.

4-1.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Combining the Flexi controls can give you many different results. Experiment!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 172 of 438

Building: Additional Features Adding Light LEVEL: 4 MODULE: BUILDING: ADDITIONAL FEATURES â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 3

4-1.3 Introduction You already know how to make an object glow from within using the Fullbright feature. What if you could make an object give off light like a light bulb? The Light feature allows you to do that!

4-1.3.1 Instruction You can set an object to emit, or give off, light by using the Light feature. Just like a light bulb, it can be dim or bright.

4-1.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Changing day to night To really see light effects, the Second Life time of day should be Midnight. You can force the time of day by using the Force Sun feature. This will only affect how you see the area around you. World > Force Sun > Midnight TRY THIS NOW: Force Sun to Midnight. When you are done with this mission, you can use the same feature to change the sun back using Revert to Region Default. Tip: This effect only lasts until you log out of Second Life.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 173 of 438

Step 2: Making a prim have light The Light controls are located in the Edit window in the Features tab. Edit Window > Features Tab > Light Checking the Light box will make a prim emit light. TRY THIS NOW: Rez a prim and select Light. You will see each feature is preset with specific numbers. Step 3: Setting a light’s color Changing a light’s color will not change the color of the prim, only the light it is emitting. To change a light’s color, click on the white box to bring up the Color Picker window. TRY THIS NOW: Change the color of the light coming out of the prim you rezzed in Step 2. Step 4: Setting a light’s intensity A light’s Intensity refers to how brightly it shines on other objects nearby. The higher the number, the more intense its light. TRY THIS NOW: Change the light intensity of a prim. Step 5: Setting a light’s radius A light’s Radius is the distance a light shines. A low number will cast light for a small area such as around a campfire. A high number allows the light to travel as much as 20 meters. TRY THIS NOW: Change the light radius of a prim. Step 6: Setting a light’s falloff Falloff refers to how fuzilzy or sharply a light ends. A light with a low Falloff number will very gradually fade away. TRY THIS NOW: Change the light falloff of a prim. You will be able to notice this effect much more if the light also has a high intensity.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 174 of 438

Tip: Although you can set how far a light can travel, you cannot set its direction. You can use Radius and Falloff to make sure your light effect stays just in the area you want it to.

4-1.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Adding subtle light effects can add drama and mystery to an object. Try setting out a few lights and see how the look of an object changes â&#x20AC;&#x201C; especially at night. Tip: You can add lights even if the prim itself is transparent!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 175 of 438

Building: Additional Features About Sculpted Prims LEVEL: 4 MODULE: BUILDING: ADDITIONAL FEATURES â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 4

4-1.4 Introduction Sculpted prims are new and special kinds of prims that are actually created outside of Second Life. Although you cannot create them inworld, you can use and modify them to add complex and interesting shapes to your builds.

4-1.4.1 Instruction In previous building modules, you may have noticed Sculpted as a prim type listed in the drop down Building Block Type menu. Sculpted prims are created using 3-D modeling programs and then imported into Second Life. You are given a few sculpted prims in your Inventory. Others are for sale or given as freebies throughout Second Life. Because they are very complex, one sculpted prim can take the place of an object made of many prims. You cannot twist or carve a sculpted prim, but you can change its size, position and rotation.

4-1.4.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Finding sculpted prims Sculpted prims are made up of two textures: o The Sculpt texture determines the shape of the prim. o The Surface texture is the graphic or image on the outside of the prim. Examples of both kinds of textures can be found in your Inventory: Inventory > Library > Textures > Sculpt Textures > Sculpt and Surface Textures

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 176 of 438

Step 2: Creating a sculpted prim shape All Sculpted prims begin as spheres. After rezzing a sphere, choose Sculpted from the Building Block Type drop down menu. A Sculpt Texture Picker will appear. Click on it to choose a Sculpt Texture for the shape of your object. You will also be able to position, rotate and stretch the sculpted prim. TRY THIS NOW: Rez a sphere and change its shape to Sculpted. Open the Sculpt Texture Picker and choose Apple from the folder of Sculpt Textures in your Library. Step 3: Texturing a sculpted prim Sculpted prims can be textured just like regular prims. However, because their shapes are more complex, textures may look different and need to be adjusted. You have textures in your Library specially created to match the Sculpted prim shapes provided for you. They are in a special folder: Surface Textures. TRY THIS NOW: With your apple shape in Edit, select the Texture tab and choose Apple from the Texture Picker. You should now have a very realistic apple! You also have Sculpt and Surface textures to make a number of different fruits. If you have a moment, make a plateful!

4-1.4.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: Flags represent many of the ideas, values and events countries and other groups of people hold dear. If you were going to make a flag that represented you, what would be on it? Using all the skills youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve learned so far, make a flag that represents you. Use the flexi controls to make your flag flap in the wind. Use the light controls to light up your flag during the night!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 177 of 438

You may use other skills you already know to build, stage and take a snapshot of what you would like as a texture on your flag. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Why did you choose the images on your flag? What do they represent? Photoblog it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 178 of 438

Getting Around: Map and Mini-Map Module Overview LEVEL: 4 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: MAP AND MINI-MAP – OVERVIEW

4-2.0 Introduction The world of Second Life is bigger than you think, and growing every day! In order to explore you’ll need to learn how to use the Map, find yourself on it, and learn how to travel to other places within the world.

4-2.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Technology – Understands the relationships among science, technology, society, and the individual - Observes common courtesies and acceptable use policies while telecomputing o Geography – Understands the characteristics and uses of maps, globes, and other geographic tools and technologies - Knows the characteristics and uses of geographic technologies o Geography – Understands the concept of regions - Understands how regional boundaries change (e.g., changes resulting from shifts in population, environmental degradation, shifts in production and market patterns, wars) o Behavioral Studies – Understands various meanings of social group, general implications of group membership and different ways that groups function 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

o Learning and Innovation Skills – Creativity and Innovation o Information, Media and Technology Skills – ICT (Information, Communications and Technology) Literacy

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 179 of 438

POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Using the Mini-Map to travel within Second Life o Opening and reading the World Map o Locating popular places, events, and land for sale using the World Map o Locating friends on the World Map o Traveling to a destination using landmarks or coordinates o Creating and using a SLURL You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Locating and meeting other avatars on the Mini-Map o Using the World Map to figure out which region you are in o Exploring Events, Popular Places, Infohubs and Telehubs on the World Map o Locating a friend on the World Map, or using a landmark to travel on the World Map o Discovering and using the coordinate system for travel within the World Map o Creating a SLURL and sharing it with a real life friend! Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o Levels 1, 2 and 3 MATERIALS: Item

Location

No special materials needed

4-2.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, letâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s see if youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

TERMS: Region: One 256 x 256 meter (65,536 sq.m.) of virtual land. This is sometimes referred to as a sim by many residents. Teleport: A method of direct and immediate travel from one location to another within Second Life. SLURL: A direct teleport link in text form to locations in Second Life, which can be used through the web or email.

GKCx - 180 of 438

If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: Using the World Map, locate a Popular Place. Visit this location and explore. What do you think makes this location so popular, and what does that tell you about the population of this world? If you like this location, make a SLURL and send it to a friend via email. Have them meet you in SL to explore this location together!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 181 of 438

Getting Around: Map and Mini-Map An Introduction LEVEL: 4 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: MAP AND MINI-MAP – MISSION 1

4-2.1 Introduction There are two ways to find your way around the world of Second Life. The World Map is a resizable map of the entire Second Life world while the Mini-Map is a smaller view of wherever you are located First you will explore the Mini-Map, and we will then move on to the larger World Map.

4-2.1.1 Instruction The Mini-Map is useful for finding your way around the world, as well as finding other avatars. It shows only the region you are in, along with the neighboring regions. Your avatar is a small yellow dot. Other avatars in the area are small green dots.

4-2.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Locating and viewing the Mini-Map The Mini-Map may already be visible at the top right corner of your screen. If not, you can open and close the Mini-Map using the Mini-Map button at the bottom of your screen. TRY THIS NOW: Open the Mini-Map. Step 2: Locate yourself and others on the Mini-Map On the Mini-Map you many notice several marks: o Yellow dot – That’s you! o Green dot – that’s another avatar o Green ‘T’ shape – that’s also another avatar – but the T means the avatar is at a higher elevation than you. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 182 of 438

o Green upside-down ‘T’ shape – you guessed it! Another avatar, but this one is lower than you in elevation. TRY THIS NOW: Locate yourself now on the Mini-Map. Fly or walk around a bit and notice that the Mini-Map will stay centered on your yellow dot. Notice how others turn from dots, to ‘T’ shapes, or upside-down ‘T’ shapes. Spin your avatar around some. Notice that the Mini-Map can be used as a compass, as directional indictors (N, S, E, W) move with the map as you turn. Step 3: Zooming and resizing the Mini-Map Want to see more of the world? The Mini-Map can be zoomed out a bit. You can also resize the Mini-Map window a little to see more. TRY THIS NOW: Try pointing your mouse at the Mini-Map. If you have a mousewheel you can zoom in and out by scrolling the wheel. Next, try right clicking the Mini-Map and select from three available zoom levels. Lastly drag the bottom right corner of the Mini-Map to resize the window to a larger or smaller size.

4-2.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Try locating other avatars using the Mini-Map. Select a green mark as your goal, and find that avatar! Remember, you might have to fly up higher or down lower as you approach the avatar. Don’t forget to use your new communication skills to introduce yourself once you DO find your new friend!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 183 of 438

Getting Around: Map and Mini-Map The World Map - Regions LEVEL: 4 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: MAP AND MINI-MAP – MISSION 2

4-2.2 Introduction You’ve learned how to find your way around using the Mini-Map, but there is so much more to the world. The World Map is a resizable map of the entire Second Life world! Perhaps you can think of your Mini-Map as your compass, while the World Map is your atlas.

4-2.2.1 Instruction The World Map will show all of the regions of the world that you can visit. Some regions are connected to form larger land masses, while others stand alone as islands. You are going to explore the World Map and learn a little about the geography of your new world!

4-2.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Opening the World Map There are two easy ways to open the World Map. You can either: o Double click on the Mini-Map o Click the Map button at the bottom of your screen (ctrl+M) TRY THIS NOW: Try both methods. Leave the World Map open for the next step. Step 2: Locating regions on the World Map Now looking at the World Map, you can see that each region is square-shaped and has an individual name (located at the bottom left of the region’s space). Each region represents 65,536 sq. m. of virtual land.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 184 of 438

TRY THIS NOW: Locate yourself on the World Map (you should see the familiar yellow dot from the Mini-Map). What is the name of the region you are located in? Step 3: World Map hover tips Hover your mouse over a space on the World Map. You can now see the name of that region and how many avatars are currently visiting that region. Step 4: Objects and terrain tabs

Locate the two tabs at the top of your World Map window labeled Objects and Terrain. The default tab is the Objects tab, which shows the terrain of the land along with any objects visible from a top-down view of the land. The Terrain tab will more simply show you only the land. Try switching between the tabs. Which view do you prefer?

4-2.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Want some extra practice? Try this: Open the World Map and locate your avatar (you should recognize the yellow dot from the MiniMap). Find out the name of the region you are in, and how many other avatars are currently visiting.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 185 of 438

Getting Around: Map and Mini-Map World Map Legend LEVEL: 4 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: MAP AND MINI-MAP â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 3

4-2.3 Introduction You may have noticed that the World Map can look very cluttered. It might have many colors and icons scattered over it. The World Map can be a very powerful tool when you learn what each of these icons means. You will learn how to use the World Map to locate important and interesting locations within Second Life.

4-2.3.1 Instruction The top right section of the World Map window contains a Legend, or map key. You will recognize the familiar yellow and green dots from the Mini-Map to show yourself and your fellow avatars. In addition, there are icons to designate popular and important locations and events, as well as land that is for sale. You will learn how to customize the World Map to show exactly what you are looking for!

4-2.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Locate yourself on the World Map On the World Map, your avatar is a yellow dot, just like on the Mini-Map. When you first open the World Map your avatar will be centered on the map. Unlike the Mini-Map, the World Map does not rotate. North is always at the top, South always at the bottom. A sheer white triangle coming from your avatarâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s dot represents where you are looking. TRY THIS NOW:

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 186 of 438

Locate yourself on the World Map. Turn yourself around and notice how the white triangle moves with your view. Step 2: Go home A bright blue house icon represents your Home within Second Life. TRY THIS NOW: Select the ‘Go Home’ button at the top right of your World Map window. You are automatically teleported to your home location. In the World Map window you should now see the blue Home icon on the map (it may be partially covered by your yellow avatar dot). Step 3: More legend items Here is a short explanation of the other World Map Legend Icons: o Classifieds – used by residents to advertise products and services o Person – other avatars – similar to the Mini-Map o Infohub – a Welcome Area where residents meet and socialize o Telehub – where residents land when entering a privately owned region o Popular – the most popular places in the world, as measured by the amount of time avatars spend there o Land for Sale – shows land that is currently for sale within Second Life o Events – locations for upcoming events being held in Second Life TRY THIS NOW: Try un-checking all options here and gradually adding each one into view again. You might notice that land that is for sale will also show yellow or purple shading, indicating whether the land is for direct sale or is up for auction. Step 4: The teleport button You can teleport to a selected location on the map using the Teleport button at the bottom right of the World Map window, or by simply double-clicking on that location on the World Map. TRY THIS NOW: Click once on the World Map on one of the special icons. A description of that location or event will appear. To visit this spot use the Teleport button! Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 187 of 438

4-2.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Take a few minutes to look at nearby Events, Popular Places, Infohubs or Telehubs. Read the descriptions to find one that interests you, and then use the World Map to visit this location. You are becoming a world traveler already!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 188 of 438

Getting Around: Map and Mini-Map Zooming and Moving the World Map LEVEL: 4 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: MAP AND MINI-MAP – MISSION 4

4-2.4 Introduction Now that you’ve seen some of the great features of the World Map, you may be wondering how big this world is! Here you will learn to zoom out and further explore the world.

4-2.4.1 Instruction The world of Second Life is large, and is getting larger every day! In order to see the entire world you must learn how to zoom out and how to move around to other areas of the world. Get your explorer’s hat ready You’re about to see just how far the edges of the world can reach!

4-2.4.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Zooming Open your World Map Depending on the size of your window, you probably only see about 30-40 different regions. To get a better idea of the size of the world, you can zoom out. There are two ways to Zoom in and out. o Point to the World Map with your mouse cursor and use the mouse-wheel to zoom in and out again on the map. o Locate the Zoom slider at the bottom right of the World Map window. Use this slider to zoom all the way out. TRY THIS NOW: Practice both ways to zoom in and out. Step 2: Moving the World Map You may notice that when you are zoomed all the way out you lose much of the detail that the World Map provides. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 189 of 438

In order to see more of the world without zooming all the way out you can use your mouse to move the viewable area of the map. TRY THIS NOW: Zoom back in on the World Map far enough so that region names reappear. Next use your mouse to click and drag the map to the side, and up and down to view more of the world. Step 3: Show my location At this point, you are likely viewing an unfamiliar part of the world. At the bottom of the World Map window you will see a blue button called Show My Location. TRY THIS NOW: Click the Show My Location button to re-center the World Map view on your avatar location.

4-2.4.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Try it again! Now that you are centered on your avatar again â&#x20AC;&#x201C; try exploring more of the map on your own. Using what you learned, try to locate which parts of the world have many islands, and which parts have the regions all connected (mainland). Return the view to your location when you have finished.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 190 of 438

Getting Around: Map and Mini-Map Landmarks, Friends and Search LEVEL: 4 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: MAP AND MINI-MAP â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 5

4-2.5 Introduction Have you ever wanted to return to a really great place you found â&#x20AC;&#x201C; or even search for a new one? You can find your friends and take them along with you, all by using the Map.

4-2.5.1 Instruction There are three ways to pinpoint specific locations on the World Map. First, you can locate a friend on the World Map. Next, you can use a landmark to locate a favorite destination. Last, you can locate a specific region name using the Search. These are great timesavers for those of us with busy schedules!

4-2.5.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: My friends In Level 2 you learned how to create friendships with other avatars. If your friend is online, and has given permission for you to track them on the map, then you will be able to select their name in the My Friends drop down menu of the World Map. TRY THIS NOW: Click on the down arrow next to the My Friends drop down menu. Take a look at the list. Are any of your friends available now? Tip: Most people prefer for you to send an IM before just dropping in, so be polite! Step 2: My landmarks Landmarks save your favorite spots in Second Life.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 191 of 438

A quick way to return to a spot that you have a landmark for is to use the My Landmark drop down menu. TRY THIS NOW: Have you made any landmarks yet? If so, check out the list and take a few minutes to revisit a few! Step 3: Region search The Region search box lets you locate a spot based on a Region name. Suppose youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve forgotten to landmark a favorite spot. If you remember the name of the Region the spot was located in, you can type part or the entire region name and click the blue Search button. When the region shows up in the Search Results, just click on it to find that spot on the map! TRY THIS NOW: Type in any letter of the alphabet and hit Search. How many regions show up? Pick one and use the Teleport button to visit the new location.

4-2.5.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: If any of your friends are showing up in the My Friends drop down menu, why not send them an IM and ask if you can visit? If they are not busy â&#x20AC;&#x201C; use the My Friends drop down to locate them on the map and pop on over.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 192 of 438

Getting Around: Map and Mini-Map Location Coordinates LEVEL: 4 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: MAP AND MINI-MAP – MISSION 6

4-2.6 Introduction Are you detail oriented? For those of you who like to be specific, this mission is for you! Each location in the world can be described with a set of numeric coordinates. This mission will help you understand the coordinates and use them to travel within Second Life.

4-2.6.1 Instruction Earlier, you learned that each region consists of 65,536 sq. m. of virtual land. That’s 256 meters long, and 256 meters wide. Every location in Second Life can be described by its X, Y and Z coordinates – just like you learned in the building modules.

4-2.6.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Finding coordinates Start out by viewing your location on the World Map. Every region has its own set of coordinates, starting in the South West corner, and increasing as you move North and East. TRY THIS NOW: Using your mouse, click near the bottom left (SW) corner of the region you are in, The region name, followed by three numbers will appear. For example: Star (9, 4, 103) The first two numbers, the X coordinate (height) and the Y coordinate (width), should be fairly close to zero, as the coordinates count up from the SW corner of a region. Click again on the North East corner. The X and Y values should be closer to 255 now. Remember each region is 256 meters wide in both directions, so the coordinates range from 0 –255

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 193 of 438

The third number, the Z value, has to do with how high you are off the ground, but cannot be modified by clicking on the World Map. Step 2: The location box When you select a location on the map with your mouse the coordinates for that spot will show in the Location Box. These boxes may also be used to select a specific location on the map. By using the small arrows, or typing in numbers between 0-255, you can select a very specific location within the world. TRY THIS NOW: First click on a region on the map, or select one using the Search. Enter a number between 0 – 256 for the X and Y Location Boxes. If you leave the Z box blank, you will land at ground level. Step 3: Show destination and clear After entering the coordinates you’d like to visit, use the Show Destination button to plot this location on the map. Then you can Teleport, or to start over and pick a fresh location, hit the Clear button! TRY THIS NOW: Use the Location box to visit the coordinates (200, 30, 150) of any region.

4-2.6.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Here’s a challenge! Use your new skills to find a region that starts with the same letter as your first name! Then visit the coordinates (200, 30, 150).

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 194 of 438

Getting Around: Map and Mini-Map Making a SLURL LEVEL: 4 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: MAP AND MINI-MAP â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 7

4-2.7 Introduction The last, and most powerful, feature on the map is the Copy SLURL to clipboard button. This feature allows you to share your favorite locations with friends, colleagues or anybody else right on the web, or in an email.

4-2.7.1 Instruction A SLURL is similar to a landmark. It helps you save the coordinates of a location for future travel. SLURLs are powerful. While a URL allows you to visit a web site, a SLURL allows you to visit Second Life via a web browser window and go right to that location within Second Life. For example, you can post a SLURL in a blog to send someone to a specific location within Second Life.

4-2.7.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Copy a SLURL to clipboard Use your new World Map skills to select one of your favorite locations. Do you see the coordinates of that spot in the Location box? These will be used to make your SLURL. Click the Copy SLURL to clipboard button. A window may appear informing you that the SLURL has been made: Step 2: Viewing a SLURL To view your SLURL, try pasting it into the chat window using (CTRL+V) or Edit > Paste. You should see something like this: http://slurl.com/secondlife/Cincta/79/104/16 Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 195 of 438

Step 3: Using a SLURL What can you do with a SLURL? Some ideas: o Include your favorite Second Life Locations in a blog â&#x20AC;&#x201C; and allow your visitors to experience them for themselves! o Add a SLURL to an email, or document that supports HTML. TRY THIS NOW: Log out of Second Life and paste your SLURL into a browser window. What happens? Are you able to get back into Second Life using your new SLURL? After you use the Copy SLURL to clipboard button, your new SLURL will be ready to paste into an email or web editor..

4-2.7.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: Now you are an expert Second Life geographer! Use your new powers to locate a popular place on the World Map. Visit this location and explore. What do you think makes this location so popular, and what does that tell you about the population of this world? If you like this location, make a SLURL and send it to a friend via email. Have them meet you in SL to explore this location together!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 196 of 438

Teleporting & Landmarks Module Overview: Getting Around LEVEL: 4 MODULE: TELEPORTING & LANDMARKS – OVERVIEW

4-3.0 Introduction You already know that walking, running and flying are ways to get around in Second Life. In this module you will learn a new way. It will get you from one location to another in an instant and you will wish you could get around in real life this way too.

4-3.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Technology – Understands the relationships among science, technology, society, and the individual - Observes common courtesies and acceptable use policies while telecomputing o Technology – Knows the characteristics and uses of computer hardware and operating systems - Knows features and uses of current and emerging technology related to computing o Geography – Understands the characteristics and uses of maps, globes, and other geographic tools and technologies - Knows the characteristics and uses of geographic technologies o Geography – Understands the concept of regions - Understands how regional boundaries change (e.g., changes resulting from shifts in population, environmental degradation, shifts in production and market patterns, wars) o Behavioral Studies – Understands various meanings of social group, general implications of group membership and different ways that groups function 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

o Learning and Innovation Skills – Creativity and Innovation o Information, Media and Technology Skills – ICT (Information, Communications and Technology) Literacy

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 197 of 438

POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Setting home to your current location o Creating landmarks o Teleporting using a teleporter o Teleporting using landmarks o Teleporting home o Teleporting other residents You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Setting your home location o Creating a few landmarks o Teleporting yourself and others to new places o Teleporting back home Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o Levels 1, 2 and 3 MATERIALS: Item

Location

Landmarks

Inventory > My Inventory > My Landmarks

TERMS: TP (Teleport): Transport or be transported across space and distance instantly.

4-3.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, letâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s see if youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: Discover three new places in Second Life and note one thing you like about each. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 198 of 438

SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Teleport a few friends to each location, click a group picture and post it on a blog along with a line describing what you liked about the place. How would the real world change if people could actually teleport anywhere they wanted? Not just you, but everyone. Would this be a good or a bad thing? Blog your thoughts.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 199 of 438

Teleporting & Landmarks Set Home LEVEL: 4 MODULE: TELEPORTING & LANDMARKS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 1

4-3.1 Introduction Now that you know you can get to just about anywhere in an instant, you must be eager to start traveling the world in Second Life. Before you embark on your journeys it is important to know where home is so you can return to it anytime.

4-3.1.1 Instruction Home could be a place where you are most comfortable, own land or have a lot of friends. This mission will show you how to set home to your current location. Also remember, you have the freedom to change homes whenever or however many times you want.

4-3.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Where are you?

If you donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t quite know where you are, look at the center of the black menu bar located at the top of your Second Life window. It shows the name and coordinates of the region you're in. TRY THIS NOW: Look at your black bar to know where you currently are.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 200 of 438

Step 2: Set home You can only set your home location on: o Land you own. o Land owned by a group you belong to. To make sure the group is active go to the Edit menu, click the option Groups, select the name of the group you want to make active and click the button Activate. o A Mainland Infohub. An Infohub is the welcome area of the island. By default, the first Infohub you land at after completing orientation gets set as your home location. You can set your home location by going to the World menu and clicking the option Set Home to Here. World > Set Home to Here TRY THIS NOW: Click the option Set Home to Here and see what happens. If you look at the Map, you should see a little blue house at your current location. Step 3: Log in at home The following settings will enable you to always log in at your home location. o Open the Edit menu and select Preferences o Click on the General tab o Under Start Location, select My Home TRY THIS NOW: Try this setting to see how it works.

4-3.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Use your newly acquired skills to set home to your current location. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 201 of 438

Teleporting & Landmarks Landmarks LEVEL: 4 MODULE: TELEPORTING & LANDMARKS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 2

4-3.2 Introduction As you travel around Second Life, you will discover many interesting locations that you will want to go back to. If you have a landmark for that location, you can visit it again!

4-3.2.1 Instruction Landmarks record the three-dimensional position of a place inworld. In this mission, you will learn how to create landmarks for the places you visit so you can teleport back there easily when you want.

4-3.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Create a landmark You can create a landmark by going to World menu and clicking the option Create Landmark Here. Tip: If you get a message saying, "You cannot create a landmark here..." it means the landowner has turned off the option to create landmarks there. TRY THIS NOW: Go to a new location and create a landmark there. Step 2: Viewing a landmark

You will see a landmark appear on your screen showing the name, region name and coordinates of your current location. You do not have to click on anything, the landmark has been created. You can just close this window. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 202 of 438

Step 3: Landmarks folder To view your landmarks click on the Landmarks folder under My Inventory. R-click (Cmd-click) a landmark and select Rename if you wish to change the name. Then, just type your new description in the highlighted area. TRY THIS NOW: Rename the landmark you just created.

4-3.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Create landmarks for some new locations around you and rename them in your Landmarks folder.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 203 of 438

Teleporting & Landmarks Teleporting LEVEL: 4 MODULE: TELEPORTING & LANDMARKS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 3

4-3.3 Introduction You have now covered the basic groundwork and will soon have the power to transport yourself from one location to another in an instant. Not only yourself, but others too, with their permission of course.

4-3.3.1 Instruction In this mission, you will explore the different ways to teleport in Second Life.

4-3.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Using the teleporter This is one of the most basic ways to teleport in Second Life. You will often come across signs that offer teleports to different locations. R-click (Cmd-click) and select Go! to be instantly transported to that location. TRY THIS NOW: Find a teleporter if you can and teleport yourself to that new location. Step 2: Teleporting home You can teleport back home at any time by going to World menu and clicking the option Teleport Home. TRY THIS NOW: Teleport home! Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 204 of 438

Step 3: Using landmarks There are a couple of ways to teleport using landmarks: Double-click on a Landmark in your Landmarks folder under Inventory, and click on the Teleport button. Another way is to R-click (Cmd-click) a Landmark and select the option Teleport to Landmark. TRY THIS NOW: Teleport to one of your landmarks. Step 4: Teleporting someone else You can offer to teleport someone to you if they are your friend or if you have their calling card. There are a number of ways to do this. One way, click on the Friends button, select the name of the friend you want to send a teleport to and click the blue Teleport button at the bottom of the window. They will see an invitation appear on their screen to Teleport or Cancel.

Another way is to open the Calling Cards folder in your Inventory. Double-click a Calling Card to open their profile to the Second Life tab then click on the Offer Teleport button.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 205 of 438

Or easier still, R-click (Cmd-click) a Calling Card and select the option Offer Teleport. TRY THIS NOW: Offer a teleport to someone on your friend list and someone for whom you have a calling card.

4-3.3.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: Discover three new places in Second Life and note one thing you like about each. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Teleport a few friends to each location, click a group picture and post it on a blog along with a line describing what you liked about the place. How would the real world change if people could actually teleport anywhere they wanted? Not just you, but everyone. Would this be a good or a bad thing? Blog your thoughts.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 206 of 438

Textures: Beyond The Basics Module Overview LEVEL: 4 MODULE: TEXTURES: BEYOND THE BASICS – OVERVIEW

4-4.0 Introduction With the information in this second texture module, you will have all the skills you need to become a very good texture artist. The added tips in this module will let you add new textures to your collection and use them with magnificent effect!

4-4.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing - Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Technology – Knows the characteristics and uses of computer hardware and operating systems - Knows features and uses of current and emerging technology related to computing o Mathematics – Understands and applies the basic and advanced properties of the concepts of geometry and measurement - Uses unit analysis to solve problems involving measurement and unit conversion o Visual Arts – Understands and applies media, techniques, and processes related to the visual arts - Applies media, techniques, and processes with sufficient skill, confidence, and sensitivity that one’s intentions are carried out in artworks 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 207 of 438

POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Adjusting textures so they don’t clash (flicker) o Making an object look shiny or bumpy o Adding shadows and light effects to objects o Copying an image from your computer into Second Life to be used as a texture You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Fixing textures on two prims so that the textures look seamless o Making objects that look shiny and bumpy o Making a shadow for an object o Making an object that glows in the dark o Uploading a texture image from your computer and putting it on a prim

Location

Textures

Inventory > Library > Textures

4-4.0.2 Action Plan

TERMS: Flicker: A visual effect that occurs when textures on two touching prims seem to compete for the same visual space. Upload: To import a file (image, sound or animation) from your computer into Second Life. Lag: A slow down in performance.

Before you begin any missions, let’s see if you’ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: How can you begin to use your new texturing skills to make something that will make people think … and maybe take action on an important issue?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 208 of 438

Using everything you know about texturing, create a display or exhibit for people to view on a global issue that is important to you. What do you want people to be more aware of? If you import images to use as textures, make sure you seek permission if necessary. You can even take snapshots inworld to use as textures! Will your display be a series of signs? A structure? Use your imagination! SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Include a snapshot as you blog about your exhibit or display. What were you trying to inform others about? How did you use prims to tell them about your concerns?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 209 of 438

Textures: Beyond The Basics Fixing Flicker LEVEL: 4 MODULE: TEXTURES: BEYOND THE BASICS – MISSION 1

4-4.1 Introduction The mark of a great texture artist is being picky about the details. Have you ever noticed something that looks like a flicker or dotted line between two adjoining prims? Distracting, isn’t it?

4-4.1.1 Instruction Texture flicker happens when two adjacent textures are competing visually on your computer screen. Depending on the angle from which you are viewing your object, one prim or another will seem to “win”. It’s very easy to fix, and one mark of careful texturing!

4-4.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Create two adjoining prims Rez a cube, stretch it into the shape of a wall and texture it. Duplicate that prim and position it so it’s touching the first prim – as if you are building a wall, one prim at a time. At this point, you may or may not actually see some texture flicker. You just never know when it will occur. For the sake of this mission, let’s presume you do. Step 2: Fixing the flicker If you use the Object tab of the Edit window to look at the position of your two prims, you will most likely see that they are lined up exactly. To get rid of flicker, just move one of the sections very slightly. You can change the measurement by as little as 0.002. It won’t really change how your build looks – but it will get rid of that annoying flicker! Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 210 of 438

TRY THIS NOW: Change the alignment of one of the prims you created just slightly. Look at it from different angles to see if you solved the flicker problem.

4-4.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: You may have noticed flicker on some of your early creations. If you have time, go back and use your new knowledge to fix those flicker problems.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 211 of 438

Textures: Beyond The Basics Shiny and Bumpy LEVEL: 4 MODULE: TEXTURES: BEYOND THE BASICS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 2

4-4.2 Introduction How can you make a castle wall look really rugged or a gleaming statue look really shiny?

4-4.2.1 Instruction In addition to choosing just the right texture for the object you are building, you can also control how Shiny and Bumpy it appears. Adding these features to your object will add to its realism and make it really pop! However, the ability to see these features will depend on the viewing preferences of each individual viewer. Computers with less powerful graphics cards may not have Shininess and Bumpiness active. So add these features in addition to all the great texture techniques you are already learning.

4-4.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Shininess and bumpiness The dropdown menus for Shininess and Bumpiness are just below the Texture and Color pickers in the Texture tab. You will also see a drop down menu: Mapping. Most texturing is done with Mapping in the default setting. Step 2: Shininess The Shininess drop down menu offers several levels of shininess: None, Low, Medium, and High. TRY THIS NOW: Rez a prim. Texture it and duplicate it. Set one of the prims to Shininess and compare. These cones have a blank texture, a purple tint and different levels of Shininess.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 212 of 438

Step 3: Bumpiness The Bumpiness drop down menu offers several bumpy textures to use in addition to the texture you choose. TRY THIS NOW: Rez a prim. Texture it if you wish and duplicate it a few times. Set each prim to a different bumpy texture and compare. Even the common plywood texture looks quite different with different bumpy textures on top of it!

4-4.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Can any of your early creations benefit from a shiny or bumpy touch? Go add them now!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 213 of 438

Textures: Beyond The Basics Light and Shadow LEVEL: 4 MODULE: TEXTURES: BEYOND THE BASICS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 3

4-4.3 Introduction In real life, objects have shadows and can be lit up from the sun... or from within! You can add a layer of depth to your objects by using shadows and light in amazing ways.

4-4.3.1 Instruction You have already learned how to tint faces of prims to show shadows and light. The inside of a cut prim might be tinted darker. The top face of a step might be lighter. Although there are some sophisticated ways to add shadows and light, you can easily add a basic shadow or even make something glow.

4-4.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: A basic shadow To add a basic shadow, you can make a prim the same shape as your object, flatten it, tint it and position it under your object like a shadow. TRY THIS NOW: Rez the Beach Ball from your default Library Inventory. Inventory > Library > Objects > Beach Ball Rez a cylinder and tint it with black or a very dark grey. Set the transparency to 90%. Now, use Select Texture to select the top face of the cylinder and set the transparency back to around 50%. Use the Stretch feature to squish the cylinder flat. Now, you have a shadow. Position the shadow under the Beach Ball. Adjust the size and transparency to fit the scene. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 214 of 438

Step 2: Adding light More sophisticated lighting features are covered in the building modules; however, you can make a prim light up using the Full Bright feature in the Texture tab. This is especially useful if you have an object you want people to see no matter what time of day or night they view it. TRY THIS NOW: Rez a prim. Texture it as you wish and duplicate it. Now, select the second prim and check the Full Bright feature in the Texture tab. Thatâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s all there is to it!

4-4.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: How can your creations benefit from shadows or Full Bright? Take a minute to add those features now.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 215 of 438

Textures: Beyond The Basics Finding and Uploading a Texture LEVEL: 4 MODULE: TEXTURES: BEYOND THE BASICS – MISSION 4

4-4.4 Introduction What if you could use a pattern or image you have on your own computer to texture an object? You can.

4-4.4.1 Instruction Second Life has the ability to upload – or copy – images from your own computer to be used as textures for objects, avatars and clothing. Even if you don’t have any special imaging software on your computer, you can still upload photos you take or internet images you have permission to use.

4-4.4.2 Practice Note: Even if you don’t have permission to upload files on the computer you are using, it’s useful to understand this process. If you can’t upload files on the computer you are using, just read along :-) TRY THIS: Step 1: Funding an upload Second Life charges a very small fee to upload a file, such as an image. You will need ten Lindens (L$10) to upload one image. You may purchase Lindens using the blue $button at the top right of your screen. TRY THIS NOW: Make sure you have some Lindens in your account by checking the top right corner of your screen. Step 2: Identifying an image You can upload images that are in a JPEG (JPG) or TIFF format. You cannot upload GIFs. Usually, valid images will have .jpg or .tiff at the end of the file name. A responsible builder also considers copyright laws before importing an image to be used as a texture in a build. Was your image created by someone else? Do you have permission to use it? Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 216 of 438

TRY THIS NOW: On your own personal computer, find an image that you would like to import. Make sure you have permission to import it and that it is in a JPEG or TIFF format. Step 3: Uploading an image Under File, choose Upload Image. You will then be able to search through your computer’s folders and files to the image you want. In the Upload Preview window that opens, you will see the image you selected. You can rename it at this time. Choose the Upload button to continue or Cancel if you’ve changed your mind. Once your image is uploaded you will see it open on your screen as a texture. You can drag your new texture right onto an object or find it in your My Inventory later. TRY THIS NOW: Upload an image using the Upload File feature. File > Upload Image Make sure you rename the file in the Upload Preview window. Rez a prim and drag your new texture onto it. Pretty great!

4-4.4.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: In addition to using your own images as textures, you can often find free textures on the web you can use. You can also use a digital camera to take photos of great textures you see – like a great stone wall, mossy rock or piece of old paper. And… if you are skilled at using an image editor, such as Photoshop, or others, you can make great textures. Do you have another image you would like to upload? Take a minute and do that now. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 217 of 438

Textures: Beyond The Basics Using Textures Wisely and Well LEVEL: 4 MODULE: TEXTURES: BEYOND THE BASICS – MISSION 5

4-4.5 Introduction If you put into practice everything you’ve learned so far about texturing, you will be known for making excellent objects. However, there are just a couple more things you should know to use textures like a pro.

4-4.5.1 Instruction The number and size of textures you use to texture an object can affect the amount of lag someone experiences. Lag is a slow down in performance. You might find that your avatar isn’t responding at fast as usual or that everything just seems sluggish. There are many reasons for lag. One reason is the number of textures being used in a sim: the more textures, the more lag. Another reason for lag is the size of the textures being used. Using textures that are as small as possible can make everything come into focus much more quickly and lessen the lag you might experience.

4-4.5.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Finding the size of a texture When you double-click on any texture in your Inventory, you will see a Texture Preview window open. At the bottom left is the size of the texture. The larger the numbers, the greater the size of the texture. TRY THIS NOW: In your default Library, double-click on the following textures and notice their sizes: Inventory > Library > Snapshots > Nice Sunset 06 Textures > Fabric > TieDye Textures > Terrain Textures > Terrain Textures–Default Set > Default Set–Base Grass Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 218 of 438

Tip: Choosing smaller textures for most of your build will make it come into focus faster and lessen lag. Save the largest textures for when you need a lot of detail For most projects, you can use textures that are 256 x 256 or even 128 x 128. Note: If you are handy with Photoshop or another image editor, resize your images before you import them! Using a texture that is 256 x 256 will be faster than using one that is 512 x 512. Step 2: Looking at the number of textures in a build If you think before you texture, you can reduce the number of textures you use in a build. Ask yourself: o Can I use repeat, offset, rotation or tint to make the different faces look unique? o What about using shininess or bumpiness to vary a look? o Is there a specific part of a texture I can use to make a prim look different from other prims in my object? Tip: If you are doing a big build as a group, decide together on the textures you will use. Using fewer textures will really make a large build appear f-a-s-t!

4-4.5.3 Action Plan You now know more than most people do about texturing! Good job! Just practice what youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve learned and you will create objects that people love to look at. TAKE ACTION: How can you begin to use your new texturing skills to make something that will make people think â&#x20AC;Ś and maybe take action on an important issue? Using everything you know about texturing, create a display or exhibit for people to view on a global issue that is important to you. What do you want people to be more aware of? If you import images to use as textures, make sure you seek permission if necessary. You can even take snapshots in world to use as textures! Will your display be a series of signs? A structure? Use your imagination! SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Include a snapshot as you blog about your exhibit or display. What were you trying to inform others about? How did you use prims to tell them about your concerns?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 4

GKCx - 219 of 438

Global Kids' Second Life Curriculum LESSON PLANS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; LEVEL 5

Global Kids' Second Life Curriculum. Fall, 2007. ÂŠ2007.

GKCx - 220 of 438

TABLE OF CONTENTS

STANDARDS

Learning Standards addressed in this curriculum

AVATAR: ATTACHMENTS

Module Overview

5-1.0 Introduction 5-1.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 5-1.0.2 Action Plan

Attaching and Detaching Attachments 5-1.1 Introduction 5-1.1.1 Instruction 5-1.1.2 Practice 5-1.1.3 Action Plan

Attachment Points

2 2 3

4 4 4 4 5

5-1.2 Introduction 5-1.2.1 Instruction 5-1.2.2 Practice 5-1.2.3 Action Plan

6 6 6 8

BUILDING: POWER BUILDING

Module Overview 5-2.0 Introduction 5-2.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 5-2.0.2 Action Plan

Permissions 5-2.1 Introduction 5-2.1.1 Instruction 5-2.1.2 Practice 5-2.1.3 Action Plan

One Prim Building 5-2.2 Introduction 5-2.2.1 Instruction 5-2.2.2 Practice 5-2.2.3 Action Plan

Grid Building 5-2.3 Introduction 5-2.3.1 Instruction 5-2.3.2 Practice 5-2.3.3 Action Plan

Building with fewer prims 5-2.4 Introduction 5-2.4.1 Instruction 5-2.4.2 Practice

9 9 9 10

12 12 12 12 14

15 15 15 15 16

17 17 17 17 18

20 20 20 20

GKCx - 221 of 438

5-2.4.3 Action Plan

COMMUNICATION: JOINING A GROUP

Module Overview 5-3.0 Introduction 5-3.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 5-3.0.2 Action Plan

23 23 23 24

Introduction to Groups

5-3.1 Introduction 5-3.1.1 Instruction 5-3.1.2 Practice 5-3.1.3 Action Plan

26 26 26 27

Basic Group Information

5-3.2 Introduction 5-3.2.1 Instruction 5-3.2.2 Practice 5-3.2.3 Action Plan

28 28 28 29

Viewing Group Details

5-3.3 Introduction 5-3.3.1 Instruction 5-3.3.2 Practice 5-3.3.3 Action Plan

30 30 30 32

Viewing Group Details

5-3.4 Introduction 5-3.4.1 Instruction 5-3.4.2 Practice 5-3.4.3 Action Plan

33 33 33 34

Group Communication

5-3.5 Introduction 5-3.5.1 Instruction 5-3.5.2 Practice 5-3.5.3 Action Plan 5-3.6 Introduction 5-3.6.1 Instruction 5-3.6.2 Practice 5-3.6.3 Action Plan

35 35 35 36 37 37 37 38

GETTING AROUND: SEARCH

Module Overview 5-4.0 Introduction 5-4.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 5-4.0.2 Action Plan

An Introduction 5-4.1 Introduction 5-4.1.1 Instruction 5-4.1.2 Practice 5-4.1.3 Action Plan

Search Events 5-4.2 Introduction 5-4.2.1 Instruction

39 39 39 40

42 42 42 42 43

44 44 44

GKCx - 222 of 438

5-4.2.2 Practice 5-4.2.3 Action Plan

Search Popular Places 5-4.3 Introduction 5-4.3.1 Instruction 5-4.3.2 Practice 5-4.3.3 Action Plan

Search Land Sales 5-4.4 Introduction 5-4.4.1 Instruction 5-4.4.2 Practice 5-4.4.3 Action Plan

44 46

47 47 47 47 48

49 49 49 49 51

Search Popular Places

5-4.5 Introduction 5-4.5.1 Instruction 5-4.5.2 Practice 4.5.3 Action Plan

52 52 52 53

Search People 5-4.6 Introduction 5-4.6.1 Instruction 5-4.6.2 Practice 5-4.6.3 Action Plan

Search Popular Places 5-4.7 Introduction 5-4.7.1 Instruction 5-4.7.2 Practice 5-4.7.3 Action Plan

54 54 54 54 55

56 56 56 56 57

GKCx - 223 of 438

Learning Standards addressed in this curriculum McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

GKCx - 224 of 438

Avatar: Attachments Module Overview LEVEL: 5 MODULE: AVATAR: ATTACHMENTS – OVERVIEW

5-1.0 Introduction How do you make items “stick” to your avatar, such as hats, jewelry, glasses or even cars? In this module, you will learn about Attachments -- items that you can “attach” to your avatar.

5-1.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing: Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing; uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Engineering Education – Understands elements of planning construction projects – Understands the steps involved in designing construction projects (e.g., planning, generating layouts, developing drawings with measurements and details of construction considering constraints, selecting materials) o Mathematics – Understands and applies the basic and advanced properties of the concepts of geometry - Uses properties of and relationships among figures to solve mathematical and real-world problems 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

GKCx - 225 of 438

o Attaching and detaching attachments o Changing where on your body an attachment attaches o Creating and modifying an attachment You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Using items from your Inventory Library as attachments o Changing the size and position of an attachment o Creating a new object and making it into an attachment Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules:

TERMS: Attachment: An object

that can be attached to an avatar.

o Levels 1-4 MATERIALS: Item

Location

Various Library objects

Inventory > Library > Objects

5-1.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, letâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s see if youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: How do you get other people to take notice and take action? A sign? A slogan? You can make an attachment that communicates a social concern you have and wear it! Instead of waiting for people to walk by a sign or object, you can bring the message to them! SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Make an object that tells about an issue you are concerned about and wear it. When others ask you about your unique attachment, be ready to inform them about your concern. How did others respond? Blog it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 226 of 438

Avatar: Attachments Attaching and Detaching Attachments LEVEL: 5 MODULE: AVATAR: ATTACHMENTS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 1

5-1.1 Introduction Have you ever wanted to add a ring, hat or pair of glasses to your avatar? What about a suit of armor, or a skateboard! All these are Attachments-- objects that can be attached to your avatar.

5-1.1.1 Instruction Almost any object in Second Life can be used as an Attachment. You can attach and detach an object and adjust an objectâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s position while it is attached.

5-1.1.2 Practice Step 1: Attaching an Attachment One way to attach an object is to R-click (Cmd-click) on it in your Inventory and choose Wear. Inventory > Your Object > Wear Try this now: Wear the Torch in your Library. Inventory > Library > Objects > Torch You will notice that it is already positioned in your right hand.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 227 of 438

Step 2: Positioning an Attachment Sometimes, you will notice that an attachment doesnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t look quite right and you want to nudge it just a little to make it perfect. To Edit an attachment, attach it to your avatar, then R-click (Cmdclick) on it and choose Edit from the pie menu. You can use the familiar positioning arrows and rotation rings to position it. Try this now: Find the Hand Lamp in your Library and choose Wear. Inventory > Library > Hand Lamp > Wear You will notice it is already positioned on your left hand! It may need some repositioning. R-click (Cmd-click) on it and choose Edit to adjust the position and rotation so it looks more natural.

Step 3: Detaching an Attachment To detach an attachment, R-click (Cmd-click) on it and choose Detach from the pie menu. Try this now: Detach the Torch and Hand Lamp.

5-1.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: You can experiment with attaching and detaching many different objects in your default Library to see where they will attach on your avatar. You will learn how to set or change an Attachment Point in the next mission.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 228 of 438

Avatar: Attachments Attachment Points LEVEL: 5 MODULE: AVATAR: ATTACHMENTS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 2

5-1.2 Introduction Have you seen amazing avatars that look nothing like a human form? Maybe they are dragons, robots or other kinds of animals. Chances are, those avatars have attachments all over their body. You can create objects and choose where they will be attached!

5-1.2.1 Instruction An avatar has many Attachment Points from which to attach objects. Only one object can be attached to each Attachment Point at a time. You can choose which point will be used for objects you create, or just attach from your Inventory.

5-1.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Selecting and Attachment Point for an object You can choose where an object will attach to your avatar. R-click (Cmd-click) on an object, Attach To and then select one of the attachment points listed. Try this now: Attach the Parrot to your right shoulder. Inventory > Library > Household > Parrot Do you need to reposition or rotate your parrot? Do that now. Now walk around and notice that your parrot rides on your shoulder. When you detach it and attach it again later, it will be perfectly positioned on your right shoulder. Tip: Rename your parrot before you detach it. That way, you can quickly find which parrot in your Inventory is the one trained to ride on your shoulder! Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 229 of 438

Step 2: Creating an object and attaching it Many customized avatars are made up of many objects that have been carefully textured and then attached all over an avatar’s body. You can select an attachment point for a new object as you are working on it! Try this now: Rez a sphere and stretch and resize it so it looks like it should just cover your avatar’s hand. R-click (Cmd-click) and choose Attach from the pie menu.

You will see additional Attachment Points. Choose the Right Hand.

You will probably need to resize and position your object until it just covers your avatar’s hand. What if you went on to add a thumb and cuff shape – like a mitten? You could link and texture it, rename your object and take it back into your inventory. Then, whenever you wanted to wear a mitten, there it would be!

NOTE: You may also see a special kind of attachment call a HUD, or Heads Up Display. These attachments show up on your screen and are seen only by you. They are mostly used as control panels for gadgets. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 230 of 438

5-1.2.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: How do you get other people to take notice and take action? A sign? A slogan? You can make an attachment that communicates a social concern you have and wear it! Instead of waiting for people to walk by a sign or object, you can bring the message to them! SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Make an object that tells about an issue you are concerned about and wear it. When others ask you about your unique attachment, be ready to inform them about your concern. How did others respond? Blog it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 231 of 438

Building: Power Building Module Overview LEVEL: 5 MODULE: BUILDING: POWER BUILDING – OVERVIEW

5-2.0 Introduction You’ve learned almost everything you can about building. But how do you get to the next step? How do you become a power builder… someone who can build quickly and efficiently with others? This module will help you learn those last tips and tricks and have you well on your way to power building!

5-2.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing - Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Engineering Education – Understands elements of planning construction projects – Understands the steps involved in designing construction projects (e.g., planning, generating layouts, developing drawings with measurements and details of construction considering constraints, selecting materials) o Mathematics – Understands and applies the basic and advanced properties of the concepts of geometry - Uses properties of and relationships among figures to solve mathematical and real-world problems o Mathematics – Understands and applies basic and advanced properties of the concepts of measurement - Uses unit analysis to solve problems involving measurement and unit conversion (e.g., between metric and U.S. customary systems, foreign currency conversions) 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

o Learning and Innovation Skills – Creativity and Innovation o Learning and Innovation Skills – Communication and Collaboration

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 232 of 438

o Information, Media and Technology Skills – ICT (Information, Communications and Technology) Literacy o Life and Career Skills – Social & Cross-Cultural Skills POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Making objects that others can modify, copy, give away or resell. o Making objects that others can modify and add to at the same time! o Building fast and aligned objects. You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Making objects with different permissions. o Making objects using advanced building tips and techniques. Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o Levels 1-4 MATERIALS: Item

Location

Objects you have already created

Inventory

TERMS: Permissions: What an owner can do to an object: Copy, Modify, Transfer/Resell.

5-2.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, let’s see if you’ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: Your task is to use everything you’ve learned about building and create an exhibit with other people. Some of the best things in this world have been created in teams, with each person contributing.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 233 of 438

Working together with at least one other person, take turns building an exhibit or scene that expresses your concern about a global issue. You will need to communicate together to divide up tasks. You will also need to make sure everyone has permission to add to and change the exhibit. As you work on a part, make sure to save and rename frequently. Then, give it to the other person by dragging it onto them from your Inventory. They can then rez it and continue to work. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: What was it like to work as a team? Did you need to make compromises? What did you do when you didnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t agree on something? Blog about your experience and the topic you chose for your build.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 234 of 438

Building: Power Building Permissions LEVEL: 5 MODULE: BUILDING: POWER BUILDING – MISSION 1

5-2.1 Introduction Have you ever wanted to do something – but didn’t have permission? Permissions work the same way in Second Life. They allow you to do things.

5-2.1.1 Instruction Every object, prim, avatar attachment, texture and script in Second Life has permissions. Permissions allow you to copy, modify and resell or give away items. If you are going to build with others in a group, you can give them permission to work on the same object. Knowing how to give, and find permissions for any item is very important – especially if you ever plan to share your work in any way. If you don’t make sure every part of an item has the correct permissions, you won’t be able to share it! Let’s figure out permissions right now.

5-2.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Beginning permissions Any time you create a new object – whether it’s a prim, texture or script – it comes with a set of permissions. You have the option of allowing each permission. Edit Window > General Tab > Next owner can: o Modify – allows the next owner to change the item. o Copy – allows the next owner to copy the item. o Resell/Give away – allows the next owner to sell or give away the item. When you rez a new prim, most of the permissions are unchecked. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 235 of 438

Your job is to decide what permissions you would like the next owner to have. TRY THIS NOW: Rez a prim and look at the permissions. Practice checking and unchecking each button to see when each is active. What combination would you choose for an item you wanted to give away AND be modified? Step 2: Finding permissions of items in your Inventory To check the permissions for any item, you can always rez it and open the Edit window. You can also view and even change permissions directly from the Inventory! To check an itemâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s properties, find it in Inventory and R-click (Cmd-click) to open a drop down menu. Select Properties to find out more information about the item.

The Inventory Item Properties Window will show the same information as the General tab in the Edit window. If you created it yourself (or have permission) you can change the permission settings. TRY THIS NOW: Find a chair in your Inventory Library. Inventory > Library > Objects > Chair R-click (Cmd-click) on it and choose Properties to view its permission settings. Can you modify it? Copy it? Give it away? Tip: Seeing permissions this way can be very helpful when choosing textures and scripts for objects you are creating.

Step 3: Setting Group permissions It is so much fun to build something with others! However, you need to make sure everyone has permission to modify the object.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 236 of 438

You can always give a friend the privilege to modify all of your objects (See Friends Module). You can also share an object with everyone in a group just by checking the Share with group box. Then, everyone in a group can be building something at the same time. Very cool! TRY THIS NOW: Rez a prim and check the Share with group box. If you are in more than one group, you will be prompted to choose which group you are sharing with. Find a friend from that group, make sure you both have that group selected as active, and change and modify that prim together! Note: If you aren’t yet in any groups, check out the module on Joining Groups!

5-2.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Power builders double-check the permissions on each script, texture and object they are using before spending a lot of time creating a masterpiece. Taking a moment to plan before you build will save you a lot of frustration later on! If you’ve made something you’re proud of and want to share, take a few moments to check its permissions. Can you share it with others?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 237 of 438

Building: Power Building One Prim Building LEVEL: 5 MODULE: POWER BUILDING: ONE PRIM BUILDING – MISSION 2

5-2.2 Introduction When you build a complicated object, it can take a lot of time to line up all those prims exactly. One prim building will let you build quickly and easily – keeping all those new bits and pieces just where you want them.

5-2.2.1 Instruction By combining skills you already know – such as using the Building Block Type window, shiftdrag duplicating and resizing, together with a fantastic little tool called Copy Selection, you can build an intricate object and only rez one prim! One prim building also allows you to align each prim as it is rezzed. This means you won’t have to measure and adjust so much. This technique makes you s-p-e-e-d-y.

5-2.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Let’s make a Totem pole, just to see how this method works. Step 1: Rez your “One Prim” Every other prim in your build will be based off this one prim. TRY THIS NOW: Find a good spot and rez that first cube! Step 2: Copy Selection Copy Selection allows you to rez an exact copy of a prim exactly aligned to a specific side. With a prim in Edit mode, choose: Edit Window > Create button > Copy Selection (checked) > Center Copy (checked)

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 238 of 438

Now, click on the side of the prim where you would like the new prim to go. TRY THIS NOW: Add a prim to the top of your totem pole using the Center Copy tool. Note: After you add a prim, you will see that the original prim is still selected. To use Copy Selection to continue building up, click on the new prim! Step 3: Changing and resizing shapes Using skills you’ve already learned, you can change each prim’s size and shape as you go along. When you have reshaped a piece, just use Copy Selection to continue. Note: If you really change and manipulate a prim, and then duplicate it using Copy Selection, you might not be able to reshape quite like you’d like. If this happens, just rez a new cube, position it, and keep on going. TRY THIS NOW: Use Copy Selection to continue building your Totem Pole. As you build upwards, change the Building Block Shapes and resize as you wish. You can also click on the sides of a prim to make wings, arms or branches! Step 3: Texturing, Linking and Saving Power builders use objects they’ve made before in new builds. TRY THIS NOW: If you like your Totem pole, make sure you link and rename it and take it into your Inventory.

5-2.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: One prim building allows you to make nicely aligned objects. You can also use Copy Selection to copy an entire object! If you want to duplicate an arch or detail over and over, use this tool! Try it out.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 239 of 438

Building: Power Building Grid Building LEVEL: 5 MODULE: POWER BUILDING: ONE PRIM BUILDING – MISSION 3

5-2.3 Introduction Have you ever wished your prims would just snap into place as you build? If that’s your style, this mission is for you.

5-2.3.1 Instruction The Building Grid option allows you to see a measurement grid as you move and resize objects. It is another tool to line up your prims perfectly. Some power builders love using this feature. Others never use it. It’s up to you to try it and decide for yourself.

5-2.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Finding the Building Grid Selecting the Use Grid from the Edit window allows you to see grid measurements as you move or rotate an object – much like seeing a tape measure lying along the ground. TRY THIS NOW: Select the Use Grid option from the Edit window. Step 2: Viewing the Grid With the Building Grid on, you will see a ruler on each side of an object when you try to move or resize it. TRY THIS NOW: Move an object back and forth along the X, Y, and Z axes. If you move an object using the two-colored arrows, the grid will look like graph paper.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 240 of 438

TRY THIS NOW: Move your object using the two-colored arrows. You can also use the grid when you rotate! TRY THIS NOW: Rotate your object. Do you see how the grid changes to look like a clock? Step 3: Snapping to Grid If you want your prims to snap to the grid measurements like magnets, use Snap to Grid. This can be very useful if you want objects to line up exactly. You donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t even need to use the numbers! To use Snap to Grid, select Enable Sub-Unit Snapping in the Grid options.

Now, move an object and drag your mouse towards the grid ruler. You will see a little white triangle snap to each measurement line. Snap, snap, snap! TRY THIS NOW: Select Snap to Grid and move your prim. You can resize and rotate using Snap to Grid also.

Step 4: Changing the Building Grid measurements The Grid lines are usually half a meter apart (0.500). You can space them closer or further apart by changing the Grid Unit (meters) number. TRY THIS NOW: In the Grid Options Window change the Grid Unit measurement. Move your prim to see the change. Do you like the difference?

5-2.3.3 Action Plan Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 241 of 438

SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: There are a few more options you can play with in the Grid Options window. If like using the Building Grid, take a moment to select each of them and see what they do.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 242 of 438

Building: Power Building Building with fewer prims LEVEL: 5 MODULE: POWER BUILDING: BUILDING WITH FEWER PRIMS – MISSION 4

5-2.4 Introduction Power builders are always aware of the number of prims they are using to create an object.

5-2.4.1 Instruction Although it can be fun to create amazingly complex objects, builders must be aware of prim limits. The number of prims you can have on a plot of land depends on its size. For example, a plot of land 16 x 32 meters (known as a 512) has a limit of 117 prims. Prims can add up quickly! Power builders are always thinking of ways to use fewer prims to create their fantastic objects.

5-2.4.2 Practice TRY THIS: In a previous building mission, you saw how to make stairs more prim efficient by using some of the building tools, such as Cut. You are going to practice being prim efficient by re-designing a table that’s already in your Library. Let’s begin. Step 1: The original table You have many useful items in your Library, but they can be redesigned to make them even better! One is a steel and glass table, found here:

Inventory > Library > Objects > Household > Coffee Table, Glass & Steel Try this now: Find the table in your inventory and rez it.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 243 of 438

Step 2: Finding the number of prims in an object The General tab of the Edit window shows the number of prims an object has. Edit Window > General Tab > 1 Object, ___ Primitives TRY THIS NOW: Find the number of prims in the coffee table.

Step 3: Observing how an object was made Before redesigning an object to have a lower prim count, it can be useful to see how the original creator put it together. Selecting Edit linked Parts allows you to click on each individual prim. TRY THIS NOW: Select the Edit Linked Parts box and click on each prim in the coffee table to see how it was constructed. Step 4: Making a low prim copy How many prims do you think can be taken away from that table? Can it be recreated using 6 prims? 5? 4? It’s like a puzzle.

Your mission here is to recreate it using fewer prims than the original. You may come up with a different solution than someone else. That’s ok! Tip: Hollow cubes will help you reduce the number of prims you need to redesign this table. How many prims did you use to redesign your table? Sometimes, there is more than one best solution. The table in the foreground only used 4 prims!

5-2.4.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: You are now a power builder! How will you use that power? Your task is to use everything you’ve learned about building and create an exhibit with other people. Some of the best things in this world have been created in teams, with each person contributing. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 244 of 438

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 245 of 438

Communication: Joining a Group Module Overview LEVEL: 5 MODULE: COMMUNICATION: JOINING A GROUP – OVERVIEW

5-3.0 Introduction Second Life Groups are a great way to meet people with similar interests. Some groups are focused around Second Life interests, like building or scripting, while others might be about things associated with life outside of Second Life – such as geographical locations, cultures, ideas or hobbies.

5-3.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Listening and Speaking – Uses listening and speaking strategies for different purposes - Adjusts message wording and delivery to particular audiences and for particular purposes (e.g., to defend a position, to entertain, to inform, to persuade) o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing - Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Technology – Understands the relationships among science, technology, society, and the individual - Observes common courtesies and acceptable use policies while telecomputing o Behavioral Studies – Understands various meanings of social group, general implications of group membership, and different ways that groups function o Working with Others – Contributes to the overall effort of a group - Works cooperatively within a group to complete tasks, achieve goals, and solve problems 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

o Learning and Innovation Skills – Communication and Collaboration o Information, Media and Technology Skills – ICT (Information, Communications and Technology) Literacy o Life and Career Skills – Social & Cross-Cultural Skills POWER-UP: Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 246 of 438

(What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Searching for and joining groups that interest you o Viewing a group charter and insignia o Selecting and activating your group title o Viewing the active members of your groups o Learning what roles and abilities are available to you within your groups o Sending group messages and group notices o Voting on group proposals o Visiting group land You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Searching for groups that share your interests o Joining at least one group o Selecting and activating your group titles o Viewing your group abilities o Sending group messages o Reading group notices and proposals Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o Levels 1-4 MATERIALS: Item

Location

Group Information

Search > Groups

TERMS: Insignia: An image or drawing that is the symbol of a group or organization Charter: the goals and rules set by the group founder

5-3.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, letâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s see if youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 247 of 438

TAKE ACTION: Here is a challenge. Identify a social issue in your home community, and use the search directory to find a group relating to this issue. Join the group as a member and select your group title. Explore the roles available to you, and the abilities you have in those roles. If you need a suggestion, join the Global Kids group! Explore the roles available to you, and the abilities you have in those roles. After viewing past group notices and proposals, do you think this group makes use of the democratic process? Do group members have a say in important decisions? Blog it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 248 of 438

Communication: Joining a Group Introduction to Groups LEVEL: 5 MODULE: COMMUNICATION: JOINING A GROUP – MISSION 1

5-3.1 Introduction Joining Second Life Groups is a fantastic way of staying in touch with friends and making new ones! Second Life Groups make it easy for you to organize events and communicate your ideas with groups of people.

5-3.1.1 Instruction Did you know you can belong to 25 groups at a time? You will begin by learning how to find and join a group that interests you.

5-3.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Searching for Groups Click on the Search button at the bottom of your screen, and then click on the Groups tab of the Search directory. Search > Groups Next to the Find box you can type in a phrase or keyword to find groups you’re interested in. When you hit the Search button, you will get a list of groups. TRY IT NOW: Open the Groups tab of the Search window. Search for groups using the keyword learning. Did you get any results? What kinds of things are people gathering to learn together in Second Life? Step 2: Sorting Groups Some groups may have thousands of people in them, but a group only needs 2 members. You can sort the groups by size by clicking on the Members column head.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 249 of 438

TRY IT NOW: Click the Members column header to sort the list. Which group has the most members? Click it again to show the smallest groups.

Step 3: Finding More Groups At the bottom left of the Group Search window you will see a results count showing how many groups matched your search criteria. If there are many groups that matched your search criteria, you may not see a complete list. If this is the case, at the bottom of your search results you will see a blue Next> button to see more results. TRY IT NOW: Search groups for the word club. Were there many? Use the Next> button to see more groups.

5-3.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Take some time to use the Groups Search to find two or three groups you might be interested in joining.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 250 of 438

Communication: Joining a Group Basic Group Information LEVEL: 5 MODULE: COMMUNICATION: JOINING A GROUP – MISSION 2

5-3.2 Introduction You may be surprised by how many Second Life groups there are! SL Groups are created by Second Life residents like you. A group can be formed around almost any topic.

5-3.2.1 Instruction The General tab of the Group window holds all the basic information about a group. You will see the Group Charter, Group Insignia, a list of Owners and visible Members, and basic group preferences. You will find the Join button for any groups set to Open Enrollment.

5-3.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Viewing a Group Charter and Insignia The first thing you will see in the Group window is the Founder’s name, along with the Group Insignia and Group Charter. The insignia is an image representing the group. The Group Charter usually states the purpose or goals of the group, along with any membership requirements. TRY IT NOW: View the Charter and Insignia for one of the groups you found in Mission 1. Are there any rules for membership? Does the Charter state any goals for the group? Step 2: Joining a Group Some groups have Open Enrollment – which means that anyone is permitted to join. If this is the case, there will be a blue Join button beneath the group’s insignia.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 251 of 438

On the Join button you will see the membership dues. Usually, groups are free to join, but sometimes there may be a fee. If the group is not Open Enrollment then you will need to contact a group owner and request an invitation. TRY IT NOW: View the Join options for a few groups. Are most free to join? Are there any groups you are interested that are not Open Enrollment? Step 3: Viewing Group Owners and Members In the bottom half of the Group window you will see a list of Group Members. The names of the Group Owners will appear bold. You can also see each member’s group Title. The online column is only available to current members of the group. If you double click on a member’s name you will be able to view that avatar’s profile window. TRY IT NOW: Find the name of one of the owners of a group that is not open enrollment. Double click that avatar’s name to view his or her profile.

5-3.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Decide on at least one group to join. If the group is open enrollment, use the Join button to become a member. If it is an invite-only group, find one of the owner’s in the Members list. Use the Instant Message button in that person’s profile to send them an IM explaining why you’d like to join the group and request an invitation.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 252 of 438

Communication: Joining a Group Viewing Group Details LEVEL: 5 MODULE: COMMUNICATION: JOINING A GROUP – MISSION 3

5-3.3 Introduction Have you noticed the extra title above some residents’ names? Now that you belong to a group, you can select your own group title.

5-3.3.1 Instruction As a new member of one or more groups, you will learn more about the details of group membership. First you will learn how to view all of your current groups. You will also see how to activate a group title in order to let the rest of the world know about your membership.

5-3.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Viewing your Groups You may belong to a maximum of 25 groups at any time. You can see a list of your current groups by going to the Edit menu and clicking on Groups. This will open the Communicate window directly to the Groups tab. Edit > Groups

TRY IT NOW: Click on the Edit menu and open your Groups list. How many groups are you currently a member of?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 253 of 438

Step 2: Activating a Group Title A Group Title is optional text that can appear along with your name above your avatar. You can select which groupâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s title to activate, or have no group title at all. Within the Group tab of the Communicate window you can select one of your groups in the list and click the Activate button. You should see additional text appear over your avatarâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s head. If you prefer, you can also select the word none in the group list, and then click the Activate button. This will remove any group title from your avatar. TRY IT NOW: Select one of your groups and activate the group title. Remove the title by selecting none, or select another group to activate. Step 3: Viewing more Group Info As a group member, you can see more information about your group. In the Group tab of the Communicate window, you can select a group from the list, and then click the Info button to the right.

This window looks like the Search directory. Now that you are a member of the group, you can view all 5 tabs of the Group window. TRY IT NOW: Open the Group Information window for one of the groups that you belong to. Step 4: Selecting an Active Title Sometimes, you may also have more than one title available to you within a group. In the General tab of the Group window there is a My Active Title drop down menu.

TRY IT NOW: In the General tab of the Group window, locate the My Active Title drop down menu. Your current group title will show. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 254 of 438

If you have more than one title to choose from you will be able to use this drop down menu to select it.

5-3.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Give yourself some time to view what title options are available in the groups to which you belong. Activate the one you would like to use.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 255 of 438

Communication: Joining a Group Viewing Group Details LEVEL: 5 MODULE: COMMUNICATION: JOINING A GROUP â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 4

5-3.4 Introduction As a member of a group, it is important for you to know what your abilities and responsibilities are within the group.

5-3.4.1 Instruction Every member of a group is assigned to at least one role in each group. Each role has a set of permissions or abilities within the group. For example, not all members may be able to invite other members into the group. In this mission you will learn about group membersâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; abilities and roles.

5-3.4.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Viewing Members and Roles The second tab in the Group Information window is Members & Roles. This window has three sections: Members, Roles and Abilities. TRY IT NOW: Open the Group Information window for one of your groups. Switch to the Members & Roles tab, and view the Members, Roles and Abilities sections. Step 2: Viewing Group Members The Members section of the Group Information window has details about each group member, what role(s) they belong to within the group, and their last login date. There are also Invite and Eject options, for members who have been given that ability. TRY IT NOW: Find your own name in the Members list (either scroll through the list or use the built-in search feature). Select your name and view which Assigned Roles and Allowed Abilities you have for that group. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 256 of 438

Step 3: Viewing Group Roles Every group has different roles for its members. Each role has different abilities, and itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s own group title, too. In the Roles window you can learn what the different group roles are, and how many people belong to each. TRY IT NOW: Switch to the Roles tab and select the Title and Description for each role. Which role has the most members?

Step 4: Viewing Group Abilities One of the main differences between roles is the different abilities each has. The Abilities tab explains each ability and shows which roles have that ability. TRY IT NOW: Switch to the Abilities tab within Members & Roles. Select Invite People to this Group. Which roles have this power? Do you?

5-3.4.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Take time to view all of the Abilities for one of your groups. What powers do you have for that group? If you belong to any other groups, find out what abilities you have in those groups; what does one group offer you that another does not?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 257 of 438

Communication: Joining a Group Group Communication LEVEL: 5 MODULE: COMMUNICATION: JOINING A GROUP â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 5

5-3.5 Introduction Now that you belong to a Group, you will need to know how to get in touch with your new friends and take part in the discussions within the group.

5-3.5.1 Instruction Group communication includes a basic group chat, group notices to make announcements to the entire group, and even a voting system to help make decisions that will affect the group.

5-3.5.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Sending a Group IM Sending a Group IM is very much like sending an IM to a resident. In the Communication window, switch to the Groups tab. You may select one of your groups and use the IM/Call button. Your message will be sent to any group members who are currently logged into Second Life. TRY IT NOW: Select one of your groups and send an IM introducing yourself to the other members. Step 2: Viewing Group Notices A Group Notice is an announcement made to the group. It is different from an IM because it is only a single message and it is sent out to all residents, even if they are not logged in. You can also add items to notice, such as a notecard or t-shirt. Residents who are not logged in when the notice is sent will get the notice the next time they log in. You can view past notices or create new ones in the Notices tab

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 258 of 438

of the Group window. You can also sort old notices by subject, name of the sender, or date by selecting Subject, From or Date. TRY IT NOW: Open the Notices tab of the Group window for one of your groups. Sort the list by date, then locate and read the most recent Group Notice. Step 3: Viewing Group Proposals Often a group will want to vote on something. The Group Proposal tool sends out a proposal to the group that is like a group notice, but has a vote option. When all votes are counted, the results can be used to make important decisions. In the Proposal tab of the Group window you can view current and past proposals. Check to see if youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve already voted on any proposals, and (if you have the ability) create a new Proposal. TRY IT NOW: View the Proposals tab of the Group window for one of your groups. Take a minute to view past proposals. Note: If the create new note or create Proposal button is grayed out, go back and look at your group abilities. Do you have the ability to create notes in your role?

5-3.5.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Now that you know how to communicate with your group members, go through your groupsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; past Notices and Proposals. Does it seem like your group uses these tools often?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 259 of 438

Communication: Joining a Group Group Land and L$ LEVEL: 5 MODULE: COMMUNICATION: JOINING A GROUP – MISSION 6

5-3.6 Introduction Did you know that groups can share property or even businesses? Sometimes when people begin a Second Life business together, they will use a group to help manage land owned by the business, and goods and sales for the business.

5-3.6.1 Instruction Group-owned land is land that is not owned by an individual resident, but by the group itself. Land that is deeded to a group may be controlled by any group members with land abilities. A group can also own items that are for sale within Second Life. Funds from the sale of group objects are evenly distributed among members of the group with accounting abilities. Note: Go back to the Members & Roles tab to see which of these abilities you may have in your groups.

5-3.6.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Viewing Group Land and L$ The Land and L$ tab of the Group window displays any land parcels currently owned by the group. TRY IT NOW: View the Group Land and L$ tab of your groups. Do any of your groups own land? If so, take a minute to visit a few of your group parcels. Step 2: Viewing Land Contributions Beneath the list of Group Land is the Contribution section. Here you can see how many square meters of land your group owns. You can also use this window later to add land contribution to the group if you wish. • •

Total Contribution: How many land credits have been donated by members of the group Total Land in Use: How much land is currently owned

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 260 of 438

â&#x20AC;˘

by the group Land Available: How much more land the group can own at this time

TRY IT NOW: Select one of your groups and view the contribution information. Does that group have any extra land credits? Step 3: Viewing Group L$ Groups may not carry a balance of L$. When a Group makes a profit, that profit is distributed to group members with the accounting ability. You can view the group funds, sales and balance in the Group Land and L$ tab. If your group role has the accounting ability, you can also see what your individual share of the current profit is.

TRY IT NOW: Look through your various groups. Do any of your groups seem to be making a profit on a Second Life business?

5-3.6.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: Now that you know all the features available to you within groups, here is a challenge. Identify a social issue in your home community, and use the search directory to find a group relating to this issue. Join the group as a member and select your group title. If you need a suggestion, join the Global Kids group! Explore the roles available to you, and the abilities you have in those roles. After viewing past group notices and proposals, do you think this group makes use of the democratic process? Do group members have a say in important decisions? Blog it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 261 of 438

Getting Around: Search Module Overview LEVEL: 1 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: SEARCH – OVERVIEW

5-4.0 Introduction Now that you have learned many Second Life basics, you will want to begin exploring on your own. To do that, you will need to be able to find the people, places, events and groups that interest you. This module will take you through the Second Life Search Directory.

5-4.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing - Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Behavioral Studies – Understands that group and cultural influences contribute to human development, identity, and behavior o Life Work – Makes effective use of basic tools – Uses work space effectively (e.g., organizes materials, information, computer records) 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 262 of 438

POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Searching for upcoming and current events o Locating the most popular places in Second Life o Finding land for sale o Locating places based on category and keywords of your choice o Searching for people and viewing their avatar profiles o Searching for groups and viewing group descriptions You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Searching the directory for groups, events or places relating to a favorite hobby or interest o Finding an educational event and attending it or setting a reminder for it o Viewing the top 20 Popular Places on the World Map, selecting one to visit and making a landmark for it o Viewing Land Sale descriptions and comparing prices of different land types o Finding locations in Second Life devoted to learning o Using the Search directory to find residents with the same first or last name as you and using Search to view a friendsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; profile o Searching for places, events or groups devoted to helping the environment

Location

No special items

5-4.0.2 Action Plan Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

TERMS: Traffic: A numeric score given to every location in Second Life based on how many residents visit, and how long they stay. Group Charter: The purpose or goals of a group, along with any membership requirements. Insignia: An image used to represent a group.

GKCx - 263 of 438

Before you begin any missions, let’s see if you’ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: Find someone to interview in Second Life. Ask them the following questions through public chat. o What is something you would like to see changed in the world? o What can people like you do to better the situation? Now ask the same question to someone else through IM. Use chat history to copy your conversation. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Using your new skills, use the Search directory to learn what people, places and groups are using Second Life to help the environment. Try the following: o Locate a place that celebrates nature. o Find an event that teaches about an environmental issue or celebrates the earth. o Search for a group devoted to the environment (and, if you like – join it). From what you’ve found, does it seem that people in Second Life are interested in helping the planet? Do you think a virtual world is a good place to spread the word about environmental issues? Why or why not? Blog it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 264 of 438

Getting Around: Search An Introduction LEVEL: 5 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: SEARCH â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 1

5-4.1 Introduction The Search Directory is perhaps the most useful tool in Second Life. You can search the directory for people, places, events and groups. Second Life is a large world, and this tool makes it possible to find exactly what you are looking for.

5-4.1.1 Instruction The Search window is organized into 8 categories: Classifieds, Events, Popular Places, Land Sales, Places, People, Groups, and All. You will begin by exploring the All category, which searches all categories at once. Later you will explore each other category in more detail.

5-4.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Open the Search Directory At the bottom of your screen is a blue button labeled Search.

When you open the Search directory there are 8 tabs across the top. The first tab is All.

TRY IT NOW: Click the Search button and then select the All tab.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 265 of 438

Step 2: Searching for Information The All tab will collect results from all categories at once based on the word or phrase you type in the box next to Find.

Each result type will have a different icon representing its category. TRY IT NOW: Type in the word fun next to Find: and then click the blue Search button in the directory window. What kind of results did you find? Step 3: Getting more Search results After you perform a search, the total results found will show up at the bottom left of the Search directory. Sometimes if there are many records that match your search there will be a blue button at the bottom of the Search directory labeled Next>. TRY IT NOW: Search for the word club. Did you find many results? What kinds of results were found?

5-4.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Take a moment to search the directory for something that interests you. Choose a favorite hobby, collection or interest. Are there any people with that word in their name? Are there any places or groups devoted to this topic?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 266 of 438

Getting Around: Search Search Events LEVEL: 5 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: SEARCH â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 2

5-4.2 Introduction Second Life Events are the scheduled happenings of the world. You can gather with other residents for business or fun, to learn, share interests and play games.

5-4.2.1 Instruction The Events section has 11 categories in it to help you search. You can view events that are happening now or in the future. Just like searching for something on the internet, you can search for key words or phrases that you are interested in. When you find an event that interests you, you can teleport there immediately, or ask for a reminder when that event is beginning.

5-4.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: In-Progress and Upcoming Events Events are organized by their time, date and category. At the top right of the Events page of the directory is the event Search button. Events results list the Name and Date/Time of the event.

Note: Remember that all times are listed in SLT (Second Life Time), which is Pacific time. TRY IT NOW: Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 267 of 438

Select the Events tab of the Search directory and click the Search button to see what events are happening soon. Step 2: Viewing Events by Date Sometimes, you may want to plan ahead and look for events in the future. At the top of the Events page is a Date radio button. The << and >> buttons will move the date forward or backward in time. The Today button will return the date to today. Event results will update as you change the date. TRY IT NOW: Move the date to next Saturday using the >> button and see if there are any events planned yet. When you are finished looking, return the date using the Today button. Step 3: Viewing Events by Category or Keyword Events are also organized by type. You can search in All categories or in a specific category by selecting it from the Category drop down window.

TRY IT NOW: Click the down arrow in the Category drop-down menu and select one that interests you. Click the Search button to see what events are happening in that category.

You can also search events by typing a word or phrase in the Name/Desc box. TRY IT NOW: Narrow your search by using the Name/Desc box to enter a keyword and click Search again. Step 4: Viewing Event Details If you select a specific event in the results list, you will see the details in the right half of the window. The event description will include information about who is hosting, what kind of event it is, and when, where and why the event is being held. It will also let you know if the event is free or if it has a cover charge.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 268 of 438

Beneath the event description are the Teleport and Show on Map buttons, which can be used to visit the event location. Selecting the Notify button will send a reminder when the event is beginning. TRY IT NOW: Select an event in the search results list. Find out how long this event is and how much it will cost to attend. Note: The Create Event button will take you to the Second Life website to create an event listing.

5-4.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Take some time to search the Events page for an educational event that interests you this week. Read the details of the event to find out if itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s right for you. Attend the event if it is soon or use the Notify button to set a reminder for the event.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 269 of 438

Getting Around: Search Search Popular Places LEVEL: 5 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: SEARCH â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 3

5-4.3 Introduction Popular Places are the most visited locations within Second Life. These might be good locations to find other residents or, sometimes, to find a great shop or party!

5-4.3.1 Instruction The Popular Places list is based on how many visitors the place has had, and how much time visitors spend there (its Traffic value). The top 20 locations are listed in the Popular Places tab of the Search directory.

5-4.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: View Popular Places The list of Popular Places is automatically shown when clicking on the Popular Places tab of the Search directory.

The top 20 locations are listed with the name of the location and its Traffic value. Try it now: Click on the Popular Places tab of Search and view the current top 20 locations.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 270 of 438

Step 2: View Popular Place Descriptions When you select one of the locations from the list, you will see the land description in the right half of the Search directory. The land description can include a name and picture and description of the location.

Step 3: Only show places with pictures One search option for Popular Places is to limit the top 20 results to locations whose land description includes a picture.

Try it now: Click the Only show places with pictures checkbox, or uncheck it if it was previously checked. Did the list change slightly? Step 4: Visit a Popular Place Beneath the land description are two buttons for Teleport and Show on Map Try it now: Use the Teleport button to visit the top location in the list.

5-4.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Try using the Show on Map button to view some of the top locations in the Popular Places list. Can you tell by the green dots on the World Map if there are currently many avatars visiting? Find a Popular Place that is currently busy and teleport there to check it out. If you like the location, make a landmark for yourself so that you can return in the future.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 271 of 438

Getting Around: Search Search Land Sales LEVEL: 5 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: SEARCH – MISSION 4

5-4.4 Introduction Do you have dreams of owning your own place in Second Life? The Land Sales tab of the Search directory is your guide to available land.

5-4.4.1 Instruction The Land Sales section of the Search directory is a list of all land that is for sale within Second Life. You can search for land by price, size, or by sale type. Linden Lab sells new land on the web at auctions. Residents sell their land inside of Second Life.

5-4.4.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Searching for Land In the Land Sales page of the Search directory you can search for all land for sale. Try it now: Click on the Land Sales tab of the Search directory. If necessary, uncheck the price checkbox and click the blue Search button. View some of the listings for current land sales. Step 2: Sorting Land Do you want to own land for your own castle? You can sort the search results by land size to find the largest, or cheapest parcel. You can find the exact land you are looking for by sorting by • Property Name • L$ Price • Area • L$/sq.m.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 272 of 438

You can change the sort order of the results list by clicking any of these column heads. Try it now: Sort the results list so that you are viewing the least expensive land for sale by clicking on the L$/sq.m. column. Step 3: Viewing Land Sales Types The first drop down menu on the Land Sales page lets you look at land that is being auctioned or land that is for sale inside Second Life â&#x20AC;&#x201C; either on the mainland or on private estates.

Try it now: Select For Sale â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Mainland and then click the Search button to see what land is currently for sale by residents on the mainland. Step 4: Searching for Land by Price or Area Do you have a budget? Are you looking for a certain size of land? You can use the Price <= L$ option to set the most you are willing to pay. Your current L$ balance will appear in the Price window, but you can type in any value you like. You can also use the Area >= sq.m. to set the smallest size parcel that you would like. Try it now: Check the Price box and enter 10000 for your maximum price. Then check the Area box and enter 512 for your minimum parcel size. Click the Search button and view the results. Is there anything available for that price? Note: Land for sale on private estates may appear very inexpensive, however there are often additional costs to be worked out between the buyer and the estate owner.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 273 of 438

Step 5: View Details of Land Sales When you find some land that looks good, you can get more information on it. Select it in the list to see a description on the right side of the Land Sales page. You will also see the Teleport and Show on Map buttons to check it out!

Try it now: Select a listing that you might be interested in buying one day. View its description for more information.

5-4.4.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Take some time to view various Land Sales descriptions. Use the Land Sale type to filter out different types of Land Sales. Do you notice a difference in the price?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 274 of 438

Getting Around: Search Search Popular Places LEVEL: 5 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: SEARCH â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 5

5-4.5 Introduction Most landowners who want others to find their location list their land in the Places page of the Search directory. This includes shops, clubs, game locations, hang outs, museums, parks and much more.

5-4.5.1 Instruction Almost all locations within Second Life are listed under Places. There are 12 categories to choose from, as well as a keyword search to help you find exactly what you are looking for.

5-4.5.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Places Categories Every location listed in Places will be listed under one of the 12 categories. When searching Places you can select a specific category, or use the Any Category option to search them all.

Try it now: Go to the Places tab of the Search directory and look at the different Categories in the Category drop down menu.

Step 2: Keyword Search You cannot get a listing of all Places â&#x20AC;&#x201C; there are too many. You will have to put a keyword in Find in order to perform a Search.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 275 of 438

Try it now: Leave the Category as Any Category and type in the word club in the Find box. Click the blue Search button to see the results. Step 3: View Places Descriptions By now the land description window you see in the right half of the window should look familiar. It is the same that you saw in Popular Places and Land Sales. The Teleport and Show on Map buttons can be used to visit the location of the place you have found. Try it now: Do a search within two different categories and visit a few locations using the Teleport button.

4.5.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Try using the Show on Map button to view some of the top locations in the Popular Places list. Can you tell by the green dots on the World Map if there are currently many avatars visiting? Find a Popular Place that is currently busy and teleport there to check it out. If you like the location, make a landmark for yourself so that you can return in the future.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 276 of 438

Getting Around: Search Search People LEVEL: 5 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: SEARCH – MISSION 6

5-4.6 Introduction How do you meet people in Second Life – at an event or through a group or another person? The People page of the Search directory is your key to finding and learning about other residents.

5-4.6.1 Instruction The People page of the Search directory lists every active resident of Second Life. From this page you can learn more about residents’ interests and skills, offer friendship or IM other residents. You can even send them L$, or mute them if they are unfriendly!

5-4.6.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Searching for someone There are too many residents of Second Life to list all at once. You must enter all or part of somebody’s name to begin a People Search. Try it now: Click on the People tab of the Search directory. Enter your avatar’s last name into the Find box and click Search. How many people did you find that share a last name with you? Step 2: Viewing a resident’s profile When you click on a name in the results list you will see that resident’s Profile on the right side of the Search directory. You can read a resident’s profile to learn all about them.

• • • • •

2nd Life – Information and picture about the Second Life avatar Interests – shows what interests this resident has within Second Life Picks – shows descriptions and teleport options for some of the residents’ favorite places Classified – a listing of all the resident’s classified ads My Notes – a place where you can take notes for yourself about other residents that they WILL NOT see (it’s just for you)

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 277 of 438

Try it now: View a friend’s information by selecting each of the tabs in their profile. Step 3: Interaction Options At the bottom of the 2nd Life tab are 6 buttons for interacting with that resident.

• • • • • •

Show on Map – this option is only available to friends who have given your avatar permission to track them on the World Map. Offer Teleport – will send the resident an offer to be teleported to your current location. Add Friend – will send the resident an offer to become SL Friends. Pay – will open a box to send L$ to that resident. Instant Message – will open a window to send the resident an IM. Mute – will allow you to no longer receive IMs or local chat from this person.

Note: If an option is grayed out it means that it is not currently available, either because the resident is not currently online or because you do not have permission to use that interaction with that resident.

5-4.6.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Use the Search directory to find out how many residents have the same first or last name as you. If you’ve met someone in SL, find that person in Search, view his or her profile, and send him or her an Instant Message.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 278 of 438

Getting Around: Search Search Popular Places LEVEL: 5 MODULE: GETTING AROUND: SEARCH â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 7

5-4.7 Introduction Are you part of a group in real life? Do you do things together and like some of the same things? Second Life Groups are ways for residents to share common interests, to organize themselves for events, and to keep in touch with friends.

5-4.7.1 Instruction The Groups section of the Search directory is great for finding other people who share your interests! You may be a member of up to 25 groups at any given time. To find groups that might interest you, just search on the Groups page!

5-4.7.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Searching for Groups In order to perform a Group Search, you must enter a word or phrase in the Find box. Group results will list the name of the group as well as the number of current members. Try it now: Click on the Groups tab of the Search Directory. In the Find box type Global. How many groups did you find with Global in the name? Sort the groups by Members by clicking on the Members column header. Which group has the most members.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 279 of 438

Step 2: Viewing Group Information In the right half of the Groups page you will see the Group Information window. To learn about the group you can read the Group Charter and view the group’s Insignia. If available to non-members, you may also see a list of all members plus the date each member last entered Second Life. Try it now: Select a group from the results list and read its Group Charter.

5-4.7.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: Using your new skills, use the Search directory to learn what people, places and groups are using SL to help the environment. Try the following: • Locate a place that celebrates nature. • Find an event that teaches about an environmental issue or celebrates the Earth. • Search for a group devoted to the environment (and, if you’d like – join it!). From what you’ve found, does it seem that people in Second Life are interested in helping the planet? Do you think a virtual world is a good place to spread the word about environmental issues? Why or why not? Blog it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 5

GKCx - 280 of 438

Dedicated to our fathers.

GKCx by Jeremy Kemp, Stephen Kemp is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Noncommercial-Share Alike 3.0 United States License.

GKCx - 281 of 438

Global Kids' Second Life Curriculum LESSON PLANS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; LEVEL 6

Global Kids' Second Life Curriculum. Fall, 2007. ÂŠ2007.

GKCx - 282 of 438

TABLE OF CONTENTS

STANDARDS

Learning Standards addressed in this curriculum AVATAR: PROFILE

Module Overview 6-1.0 Introduction 6-1.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 6-1.0.2 Action Plan

1 2

2 2 2 3

2nd Life Information

6-1.1 Introduction 6-1.1.1 Instruction 6-1.1.2 Practice 6-1.1.3 Action Plan

4 4 4 5

Your Website 6-1.2 Introduction 6-1.2.1 Instruction 6-1.2.2 Practice 6-1.2.3 Action Plan

Your Interests

6 6 6 6 7

6-1.3 Introduction 6-1.3.1 Instruction 6-1.3.2 Practice 6-1.3.3 Action Plan

8 8 8 8

Your Favorite Picks

6-1.4 Introduction 6-1.4.1 Instruction 6-1.4.2 Practice 6-1.4.3 Action Plan

9 9 9 10

Advertising 6-1.5 Introduction 6-1.5.1 Instruction 6-1.5.2 Practice 6-1.5.3 Action Plan

Real Life Information 6-1.6 Introduction 6-1.6.1 Instruction 6-1.6.2 Practice 6-1.6.3 Action Plan

FINDING STUFF: INVENTORY â&#x20AC;&#x201C; PART 2

Module Overview 6-2.0 Introduction 6-2.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 6-2.0.2 Action Plan

11 11 11 11 13

14 14 14 14 15

16 16 16 17

GKCx - 283 of 438

Subfolders 6-2.1 Introduction 6-2.1.1 Instruction 6-2.1.2 Practice 6-2.1.3 Action Plan

Using Multiple Inventory Windows

19 19 19 19 20

6-2.2 Introduction 6-2.2.1 Instruction 6-2.2.2 Practice 6-2.2.3 Action Plan

21 21 21 22

Packing Stuff Away

6-2.3 Introduction 6-2.3.1 Instruction 6-2.3.2 Practice 6-2.3.3 Action Plan

23 23 23 24

Sorting Items 6-2.4 Introduction 6-2.4.1 Instruction 6-2.4.2 Practice 6-2.4.3 Action Plan

Sorting Items

25 25 25 25 26

6-2.5 Introduction 6-2.5.1 Instruction 6-2.5.2 Practice 6-2.5.3 Action Plan

27 27 27 28

MEDIA: SNAPSHOTS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; PART 2

Module Overview 6-3.0 Introduction 6-3.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 6-3.0.2 Action Plan

Previewing Snapshots 6-3.1 Introduction 6-3.1.1 Instruction 6-3.1.2 Practice 6-3.1.3 Action Plan

Snapshot sizing 6-3.2 Introduction 6-3.2.1 Instruction 6-3.2.2 Practice 6-3.2.3 Action Plan

Snapshot Quality 6-3.3 Introduction 6-3.3.1 Instruction 6-3.3.2 Practice 6-3.3.3 Action Plan

Snapshots of the Interface 6-3.4 Introduction 6-3.4.1 Instruction 6-3.4.2 Practice 6-3.4.3 Action Plan

29 29 29 30

32 32 32 32 33

34 34 34 34 35

36 36 36 36 37

38 38 38 38 38

GKCx - 284 of 438

Learning Standards addressed in this curriculum McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

GKCx - 285 of 438

Avatar: Profile Module Overview LEVEL: 6 MODULE: AVATAR: PROFILE – OVERVIEW

6-1.0 Introduction What do you want people to know about you? Are you a private person, or someone who tells every detail of their life? In Second Life, you have a Profile, much like online profiles on MySpace or Facebook. You can add information about yourself and share your favorite interests and places. What you say is up to you.

6-1.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing: Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing; uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Technology – Understands the relationships among science, technology, society, and the individual - Observes common courtesies and acceptable use policies while telecomputing o Working with Others – Displays effective interpersonal communication skills - Knows strategies to effectively communicate in a variety of settings (e.g., selects appropriate strategy for audience and situation) 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

GKCx - 286 of 438

By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Sharing real and Second Life information about yourself that you would like other people to know. o Sharing your favorite sites online and in Second Life with others. o Letting others know about items you are selling or events you are planning. You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Filling out your Profile with information, photos and landmarks you would like other people to see.

Location

Your profile

R-click on yourself > Profile

TERMS: Profile: Public information you choose to share about yourself. Transfer/Resell.

6-1.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, letâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s see if youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: Is every section of your profile already filled out? Have you added photos, landmarks, and appropriate information about yourself? If so, invite a few friends to view your profile. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: What do you think about online profiles? Do you have any other profiles like this online - perhaps My Space or Facebook? How does the profile in Second Life differ from the others? Which do you like more? Blog it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 287 of 438

Avatar: Profile 2nd Life Information LEVEL: 6 MODULE: AVATAR: PROFILE â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 1

6-1.1 Introduction How would you describe yourself? How would you like others to see you? When someone looks at your profile, they see all the information you choose to give them. What will you say about yourself? During this module, you will be completing your profile, one page (tab) at a time. By the last mission, you will have completely filled out your profile!

6-1.1.1 Instruction Your profile includes all the information you would like others to know about you. Anyone can search for your name and view your profile. If you are friends with someone or have their calling card, you also have a copy of their profile in your Inventory. The 2nd Life tab is usually the first place people will look to find out about you. It contains information about your second life. Letâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s fill that out first.

6-1.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Viewing your Profile To view your profile, R-click (Cmd-click) on yourself and choose Profile. TRY THIS NOW: R-click (Cmd-click) on yourself > Profile

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 288 of 438

Step 2: The 2nd Life tab The 2nd Life tab has all the information you would like people to know about your second life. It also shows your groups and even a snapshot. Step 3: Modifying your Snapshot You can add an image to your 2nd Life tab by dragging a snapshot or texture from your Inventory to the Photo area of the 2nd Life tab. You can change it any time! TRY THIS NOW: Find an image in your Inventory you would like for your 2nd Life tab. (If you donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t have one, take a moment to use your new Snapshot and Camera Control skills.) Inventory > Snapshots Drag that image from your Inventory onto the Photo area of the 2nd Life tab. It should appear right away. Step 4: Modifying your 2nd Life information A list of the groups you belong to will show up automatically, as will the date your avatar was created and your payment information. You can, though, write a bit about yourself. Just click inside the About box and begin typing. TRY THIS NOW: Click inside the About box and write a short paragraph sharing who you are in Second Life. Some people even write poems or song lyrics! Note: Many people will view your profile, not just friends. NEVER put personal, real-life information, such as phone numbers or email addresses in your profile! When you are done, click OK.

6-1.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Show a friend your new profile page and look at theirs. To see someoneâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s profile, R-click on them and choose Profile from the pie menu.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 289 of 438

Avatar: Profile Your Website LEVEL: 6 MODULE: AVATAR: PROFILE – MISSION 2

6-1.2 Introduction Do you have a favorite website you’d like to share with others? You can do that, from inside Second Life.

6-1.2.1 Instruction The Web tab allows you to view a favorite website without leaving Second Life.

6-1.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Viewing your Web tab Open your Profile and choose the Web tab. TRY THIS NOW: Profile > Web Step 2: The Web tab The Web tab can point to a blog or any other favorite website you have.

To set the website you would like others to see in your Profile, just type the URL into the field. Make sure to include http:// at the beginning of the URL. TRY THIS NOW: Choose a website you would like to share with others and enter the URL in the Web tab field. Then press Load to view it. Step 3: Viewing a URL There are three ways to view someone’s favorite web page.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 290 of 438

You can select the Load button and the web page will appear, right in the Web tab. You can also select the Open button. This will open the web page outside of Second Life in a web browser, such as Firefox or Safari. Finally, you can select Automatically load web profiles. The URL will automatically be seen in the Web tab. TRY THIS NOW: Select each of the ways to view a web page and decide which one you prefer. When you are finished, click OK.

6-1.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Does the URL you chose reflect your real life or your Second Life? Have you ever thought of making a website or blog from your avatarâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s point of view?! Share your favorite URL with another friend.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 291 of 438

Avatar: Profile Your Interests LEVEL: 6 MODULE: AVATAR: PROFILE – MISSION 3

6-1.3 Introduction Why are you in Second Life – to meet new friends … build … script? When you let people know what you like to do, you may meet others who share your interests!

6-1.3.1 Instruction The Interest tab allows others to quickly see your talents and interests in Second Life.

6-1.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Viewing your Interest tab Open your Profile and choose the Interest tab. TRY THIS NOW: Profile > Interest Step 2: The Interest tab In addition to checking your skills and interests, you can also list languages you speak. TRY THIS NOW: Check the skills and interests you have. List the languages you speak. Just think -- you might find someone with whom to practice your second language! When you are done, select OK.

6-1.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Invite a friend to view your Interest tab and view theirs. Did you find out anything new?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 292 of 438

Avatar: Profile Your Favorite Picks LEVEL: 6 MODULE: AVATAR: PROFILE â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 4

6-1.4 Introduction Have you ever wanted to share your list of favorite places and things to do? Your Picks tab does exactly thatâ&#x20AC;Ś and more!

6-1.4.1 Instruction The Profile Picks tab is a great way to remember and share your favorite experiences in Second Life. Think of it as a mini scrapbook filled with pages of interesting memories! Some people love to share their favorite places and things to do. Others list friends and remember special times. You can even share poems and thoughts. What you make of your Picks will reflect your own creativity and personality.

6-1.4.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Viewing your Picks The fourth tab in your Profile is Picks. TRY THIS NOW: Open your Profile to your Picks tab. Step 2: Adding a Pick A Pick can have an image, a description and a landmark. To make a new Pick, go to the place you would like to remember and select the New button at the top. When you are in exactly the right spot, select the Set Location button. You can type in a title just below the image window. This will also be the title of the Pick that you will see on the left side. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 293 of 438

You can also type in a description or caption underneath the title. Finally, you can drag a snapshot or image from your Inventory to the Image field to show what your Pick looks like! TRY THIS NOW: Go to one of your favorite places and choose New from the Picks tab to make a new Pick. Set the location and add a title, description and photo to show everyone! Step 3: Using a Pick Sometimes, when you read someone’s Pick, you want to visit it yourself. You can do that by choosing the Teleport button. You can also view it on the Map first, by choosing the Show on Map button. TRY THIS NOW: View someone else’s Profile, select one of their Picks, and choose the Teleport button to go there. Step 4: Deleting a Pick If you change your mind about a Pick, you can delete it using the Delete button near the top of the Pick window. TRY THIS NOW: Delete a Pick you no longer want. When you are done, select OK.

6-1.4.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Looking at someone’s Picks can lead you to places you may never have heard about! Great designers will also use their picks for landmarks to their stores and places that inspire them. Think of someone whose work you admire in Second Life. Search for them (Search > People) and view their Picks. Do you see an interesting place? Go there!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 294 of 438

Avatar: Profile Advertising LEVEL: 6 MODULE: AVATAR: PROFILE – MISSION 5

6-1.5 Introduction Do you have something to sell or an event to tell others about? You can use your Profile to place a Classified advertisement that will show up in Search.

6-1.5.1 Instruction The Search button allows residents of Second Life to search for many things – including advertisements submitted by other residents. The Classified tab in your Profile is where you actually write and submit an advertisement that will show up in Search.

6-1.5.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Viewing the Classified tab The Classified tab shows any advertisements you currently have running in Search. It also allows you to place an ad. TRY THIS NOW: Open your Profile to the Classified tab. Step 2: Placing a Classified advertisement To place a Classified advertisement, choose the New button.

TRY THIS NOW: Select the New button to begin placing a Classified ad. (Don’t worry, you won’t actually place the ad!)

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 295 of 438

Placing an ad is much like adding a Pick to your Picks tab. You can choose a title, description and photo to illustrate your Classified. TRY THIS NOW: Make up an event or item you would like to sell. Add a photo, title and description that fit your ad.

You will also need to select in which part of the Classifieds you want your ad to appear using the drop down menu.

Choosing a category will help others find your ad! After you choose your Classified category, select the Publish button. Tip: Make sure you check the Auto-renew each week option if you want your ad to be ongoing.

TRY THIS NOW: Choose a Classified category for your ad and select the Publish button.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 296 of 438

Step 3: Paying for your Classified ad Just like a real life newspaper, you must pay to have your ad published. Unless you check the Auto-renew each week option, your ad will run for one week. You can choose how much you would like to pay for your ad. But, when people search for keywords in your Classified ad, they will see the most expensive ads first. TRY THIS NOW: Type in a price for your ad. Then, select Cancel.

6-1.5.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Take a moment to look in the Classified section of Search. You can see how much people paid to place their ads. If you were selling shoes, how much would you have to spend to have your ad listed on the first page?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 297 of 438

Avatar: Profile Real Life Information LEVEL: 6 MODULE: AVATAR: PROFILE – MISSION 6

6-1.6 Introduction Do you have a MySpace, Facebook or other online profile? If so, you probably think very carefully about what real life details you want to share with anyone who might view your information.

6-1.6.1 Instruction The 1st Life tab of your Profile is where you can put any information you would like people to know about your real life. You can include both a photo and a short description. You can also use the My Notes tab to remember details about another person, or even yourself! Only you can see notes you write in the My Notes section.

6-1.6.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: The 1st Life tab You can write a short description about your real life in the 1st Life description window. If you don’t want anyone to know anything about your real life, you can leave it blank! You can also put a photo of yourself, your pet, or anything else you would like everyone to see. TRY THIS NOW: Fill out your 1st Life tab with a photo and description. Select OK. Note: Many people will view your profile, not just friends. NEVER put personal real life contact information, such as phone numbers or email addresses in your profile!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 298 of 438

Step 2: The My Notes tab You can use the My Notes tab to remember details you don’t want to forget about someone else. Even when you are looking at someone else’s Profile, only you will see what you write in their My Notes. Try this now: Open up a friend’s Profile to the My Notes tab and enter a few details about that person you would like to remember. Select OK. Tip: Some people use their own My Notes tab as a to-do list for themselves!

6-1.6.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: Is every section of your profile filled out? Have you added photos, landmarks, and appropriate information about yourself? If so, invite a few friends to view your profile. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: What do you think about online profiles? Do you have any other profiles like this online - perhaps My Space or Facebook? How does the profile in Second Life differ from these others? Which do you like more? Blog it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 299 of 438

Finding Stuff: Inventory – Part 2 Module Overview LEVEL: 6 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: INVENTORY II – OVERVIEW

6-2.0 Introduction What does your inventory look like – clean and well organized, or more like an overstuffed closet? Knowing how to organize and quickly find all your items is a skill well worth learning! By practicing the skills in this module just a few minutes a day, you will soon have a inventory that’s fun and easy to browse.

6-2.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing - Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Life Work – Makes effective use of basic tools - Uses work space effectively (e.g., organizes materials, information, computer records) 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

GKCx - 300 of 438

o Sorting folders and items by date and name o Filtering Inventory search results by the type of item You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Organizing items into subfolders o Dragging items between Inventory windows to organize your inventory o Packing and unpacking boxes of items for storage o Changing the order of how items and folders appear in your Inventory o Finding items by using filters Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o Levels 1-5 MATERIALS: Item

Location

Your own inventory items

Inventory > My Inventory

TERMS: Filter: A way to refine your searches for items which contain a certain word or phrase.

6-2.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, letâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s see if youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: If you can organize your Inventory, you can find items that might be helpful to someone just starting out in Second Life. Use your Inventory organization and searching skills to create a Welcome folder of items/clothing you would give to someone new to SL. It can contain notecards, landmarks, favorite clothing/body parts... everything someone would need to adapt themselves to this new world. Make sure you check the permissions on each item you include. Everything in your folder should at least have copy and resell/give away permissions. Name the folder with a descriptive name so you

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 301 of 438

can find it in your organized Inventory! SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Find someone new to Second Life and ask them if they would like a copy of your Welcome folder. You can just open up your Inventory and drag it on them! How were you welcomed into Second Life? How would you welcome someone new to a group project you are working on in Second Life? Blog it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 302 of 438

Finding Stuff: Inventory – Part 2 Subfolders LEVEL: 6 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: INVENTORY II – MISSION 1

6-2.1 Introduction Have you ever looked and looked for something in your computer directory or file system? It’s so much easier when you’ve sorted everything into folders. You can do the same thing in your Second Life Inventory.

6-2.1.1 Instruction A subfolder is simply a folder you put inside another folder. Using subfolders allows you to put everything away and find it again easily. You can even create subfolders within subfolders!

6-2.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Creating a subfolder You can create an Inventory subfolder two ways: From the Inventory main menu select: Inventory > Create > New Folder By default, it will be named New Folder.

From within a main folder category (such as Clothing) select: Inventory > Clothing > New Folder

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 303 of 438

TRY THIS NOW: Create a New Folder using each of these ways. The New Folder will show up alphabetically in either the Inventory or the main folder you chose. Step 2: Renaming a subfolder The key to organizing and finding items is to use descriptive titles, giving it a name that reflects what is in it or how you will be using it To rename a New Folder, R-click (Cmd-click) on it, choose Rename and type in a new name. TRY THIS NOW: Create a New Folder in the Clothing section of your Inventory. Rename it Favorite Shirts. Step 3: Putting items in a folder You can simply click and drag items in your Inventory to your new folder. TRY THIS NOW: Find some of your favorite shirts and drag them to your new Favorite Shirts folder.

6-2.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: If you take just a few minutes to organize a bit every time you are in Second Life, you will soon have a sleek Inventory that’s fun and quick to use! What’s another folder you could create right now – vehicles, gadgets, buildings? Feel free to make subfolders within subfolders. Organize it now!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 304 of 438

Finding Stuff: Inventory – Part 2 Using Multiple Inventory Windows LEVEL: 6 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: INVENTORY II – MISSION 2

6-2.2 Introduction Subfolders are great! Did you know you can open more than one Inventory window at a time to help you organize and drag items between them?

6-2.2.1 Instruction You can open two or more Inventory windows and drag items between them. It really helps when you have a long list of items to organize. You can also drag around more than one item at a time.

6-2.2.2 Practice Step 1: Opening multiple Inventory windows Choosing Inventory > File > New Window will open up another Inventory window. TRY THIS NOW: Open a total of two Inventory windows. Step 2: Dragging items between Inventory windows Having two Inventory windows open is a great help when you are organizing your Inventory. Just select an item in one window and drag it to the spot you want it to go in the second Inventory window. Because the Inventory windows are the same, the change will show up in both of them. TRY THIS NOW: Create a new folder in your Objects folder and rename it Objects I made. Open another Inventory Window. Make sure one window shows the new folder named Objects I made.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 305 of 438

Look in the other Inventory window for all the vehicles you may have. Drag each one over to the Objects I made folder. Tip: To drag a list of items, hold down Shift as you select each item. If items are not listed together, hold down Ctrl as you select each item. Then, just drag them to the folder youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve chosen in the new window!

6-2.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Using multiple windows makes organizing fast. Choose another group of items to organize. What about plants or snapshots?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 306 of 438

Finding Stuff: Inventory – Part 2 Packing Stuff Away LEVEL: 6 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: INVENTORY II – MISSION 3

6-2.3 Introduction Do you pack away seldom used items in your attic or basement? It makes things you frequently use easier to find. You can do the same in your Inventory.

6-2.3.1 Instruction Large inventories take a long time to load when you log into Second Life. They also are more difficult to search through. You can keep your Inventory small by throwing away old items or by storing them in boxes.

6-2.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Packing a box of items You may have items you don’t want to throw away but don’t really use. You can put many items in one object and then take it back into your Inventory. Whenever you want those items, you can rez the box, open it and use the items! TRY THIS NOW: Create a cube and texture it however you like. This will be your packing box. Look in your Inventory for a number of related items you would like to store. We’ll rename this box Old Clothes. Open the Edit window for the Old Clothes box and click on the Content tab. Now drag all the old clothes you don’t wear anymore into the Content tab of the Old Clothes box. Note: You cannot drag folders, only items within folders. Take the Old Clothes box into your Inventory. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 307 of 438

Step 2: Opening a box of items When you want to see those items again, you can open the box and put the items in your Inventory for use.

TRY THIS NOW: Drag the Old Clothes box onto the ground from your Inventory. R-click to select Open from the pie menu. An Object Contents Window will show all the items in that box.

Select Copy to Inventory to copy items back into your Inventory. Step 3: Emptying the trash As you find items you no longer want, make sure to throw them away and Empty Trash. You can empty the trash by selecting the trash icon in the Inventory or by selecting Empty Trash from the File drop down menu. TRY THIS NOW: Empty your trash. You’ll be amazed how much stuff ends up in there. It can really add to the size of your Inventory and cause it to load more slowly.

6-2.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: It’s very easy to end up with duplicate items. Take a few minutes to look through your Inventory and throw them away. Don’t forget to look through the Landmarks section!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 308 of 438

Finding Stuff: Inventory – Part 2 Sorting Items LEVEL: 6 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: INVENTORY II – MISSION 4

6-2.4 Introduction How do you search for something when you can’t remember its name? Fortunately, there are some tricks to searching for those hard-to-find items.

6-2.4.1 Instruction Did you know that you can search through your Inventory alphabetically or by the date you received an item? You can also search for items you received during your most recent time in Second Life. Let’s learn how.

6-2.4.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Searching by date By default, your Inventory is set to show your most recent items first. Items within folders or subfolders will also be listed by date.

TRY THIS NOW: Select your Sort options to match those in the photo. Inventory > Sort > By Date Open up your Objects folder and check to see if an item you know you got recently is at the top. Step 2: Searching by name You can also search for something alphabetically. Numbers and special characters will be listed before letters.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 309 of 438

TRY THIS NOW: Select your Sort options to match those in the photo. Inventory > Sort > By Name Has the item you looked for in step 1 moved? Which way is more useful for you? Step 3: Rearranging folders You can also rearrange folders independently of sorting by name or date. Selecting System Folders To Top will put all the original folders before any others you create. Note: System Folders have the small icons on their folders. Any subfolders will still be in the main System Folders. Selecting Folders Always By Name will order your main folders in alphabetical order. Note: You can even check both folder options! TRY THIS NOW: Select each of the folder sort options and see how those choices reorder your Inventory. Which choice makes sense for how you like to organize your Inventory? Step 3: Searching Recent Items Ever get a new item and just can’t remember its name? Selecting the Recent Items tab allows you to see what you got most recently. Tip: It’s also a quick way to see what’s in your Trash. All the sorting options (name, date, folders) can also be set from the Recent Items tab. TRY THIS NOW: Select the Recent Items tab in your Inventory and view what’s there.

6-2.4.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Putting something away right after you get it is a great way to stay on top of organizing your Inventory. Is there anything you have in your Recent Items tab that needs to be put away? You can open up multiple Inventory windows and put those new items away right now!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 310 of 438

Finding Stuff: Inventory – Part 2 Sorting Items LEVEL: 6 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: INVENTORY II – MISSION 5

6-2.5 Introduction Still can’t find that elusive item? You can use Filters to select just the kinds of items to look through.

6-2.5.1 Instruction Filters will allow you to refine your searches for items which contain a certain word or phrase. Using Filters will help you find items that have a very common key word, such as a color.

6-2.5.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Finding the Filters TRY THIS NOW: Open the Filters edit window. Inventory > File > Show Filters Step 2: Using Filters Filters allow you to filter out types of items you know you don’t want to see when searching. By default, all the filters will be checked. TRY THIS NOW: Select the None button and then select the Clothing checkbox. Now, type Blue in the search field. All of your blue clothing should show up! Now select the All button to recheck all of the categories. Step 3: Filtering by Hours and Days Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 311 of 438

You can also specify how many hours or days you want your search to show. Setting Days Ago to 1.000 will show all the items you have received in the last day. TRY THIS NOW: Change the Days Ago to 3.000 days. Select only the Objects filter. What shows up? Tip: Filters only last until you close the Filters edit window.

6-2.5.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: Now that you can organize your Inventory, you can find items that might be helpful to someone just starting out in Second Life. Use your Inventory organization and searching skills to create a Welcome folder of items/clothing you would give to someone new to Second Life. It can contain notecards, landmarks, favorite clothing/body parts... everything someone would need to adapt to this new world. Make sure you check the permissions on each item you include. Everything in your folder should at least have copy and resell/give away permissions. Name the folder with a descriptive name so you can find it in your organized Inventory! SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Find someone new to Second Life and ask them if they would like a copy of your Welcome folder. You can just open up your Inventory and drag it on them! How were you welcomed into Second Life? How would you welcome someone new to a group project you are working on in Second Life? Blog it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 312 of 438

Media: Snapshots – Part 2 Module Overview LEVEL: 5 MODULE: MEDIA: SNAPSHOTS II – OVERVIEW

6-3.0 Introduction You know how to take wonderful snapshots in Second Life. But, do you know how you are going to use them? If you plan to re-use your images in slideshows, PowerPoints, movies or in a website, you need to consider the size and quality of your shots. Fortunately, the Snapshot Preview window lets you do that, and more!

6-3.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing- Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Technology - Knows the characteristics and uses of computer hardware and operating systems - Knows features and uses of current and emerging technology related to computing o Visual Arts – Understands and applies media, techniques, and processes related to the visual arts - Applies media, techniques, and processes with sufficient skill, confidence, and sensitivity that one’s intentions are carried out in artworks o Geography – Understands that culture and experience influence people's perceptions of places and regions - Understands why places and regions are important to individual human identity and as symbols for unifying or fragmenting society 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

o Learning and Innovation Skills – Creativity and Innovation o Learning and Innovation Skills – Communication and Collaboration

o Information, Media and Technology Skills – ICT (Information, Communications and Technology) Literacy o Life and Career Skills – Social & Cross-Cultural Skills

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 313 of 438

POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Previewing snapshots before they are taken o Taking a series of snapshots quickly o Selecting the finished size and image quality of a snapshot o Showing the Second Life controls in a snapshot You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Take a series of snapshots of a friend dancing o Sizing a snapshot to fit a common media format o Selecting an image file size and quality for a web page o Taking a photo that can show someone the Second Life controls Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o Levels 1-5 MATERIALS: Item 10 $L for each image you want to upload

Location Your account balance

TERMS: Interface: The buttons and commands that allow you to control your Second Life experience. Aspect Ratio: The width-to-height ratio of a film or television image.

6-3.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, letâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s see if youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: Images are powerful. Now that you know how to make your snapshots look their best both in and out of Second Life, how could you use those skills? Could you make a PowerPoint or slideshow that would convince Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 314 of 438

your school to consider using it in their teaching? What about taking snapshots and putting them in a small movie or on a webpage? First, decide if you are going to make a slideshow, movie or web page. Take at least five snapshots showing five ways Second Life helps teens learn. Save them to your hard drive with settings appropriate to how you will deliver your information. Now, share your images and thoughts with two or three other people. If you can, actually make the slideshow, movie or web page. If you have a way to put your presentation on the web for others to see, do it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 315 of 438

Media: Snapshots - Part 2 Previewing Snapshots LEVEL: 6 MODULE: MEDIA: SNAPSHOTS II â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 1

6-3.1 Introduction Have you ever wanted to move beyond candid photos and be a little more deliberate, setting up the scene like a photo shoot? What about taking a quick series of shots of friends in action?

6-3.1.1 Instruction The Snapshot Preview window allows you to preview your snapshots before you commit to taking them. You can preview images using your full screen and set things up to take a number of images quickly.

6-3.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Auto Snapshot By default, the Auto Snapshot feature is selected in the Snapshot Preview window. This means you take a photo anytime you select the Snapshot button. Deselecting the Auto Snapshot feature, allows you to just open the Snapshot Preview window when you want to take a shot. TRY THIS NOW: Select the Snapshot button. When the Snapshot Preview window opens, deselect Auto Snapshot. Discard the photo that was taken automatically and close the window. Now, when you select Snapshot, you can first set up your finished shot! Step 2: Taking multiple images Have you ever seen professional photographers take a series of shots? You can do the same thing using the Keep open after saving feature. This allows you to take photos more quickly.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 316 of 438

TRY THIS NOW: Use Snapshot to open the Snapshot Preview window. Select Keep open after saving. Also make sure Save to Disk is selected. Now, select New Snapshot and then Save to take a few images quickly and view them on your computer. They will be numbered in sequence. Step 3: Previewing a snapshot using your full screen What if you want to preview an image and canâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t quite see that tiny preview screen? You can select the Freeze frame option to see a larger image. TRY THIS NOW: Select the Freeze frame option and then New Snapshot. Notice how Second Life seems to freeze? Thatâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s actually your snapshot! Choose Save to save your image. When you take more than one image, the old image will seem to fall away.

6-3.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Try taking a few more snapshots using these features. Which ones do you prefer? Set up your Snapshot Preview window with the preferences you like the most.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 317 of 438

Media: Snapshots - Part 2 Snapshot sizing LEVEL: 6 MODULE: MEDIA: SNAPSHOTS II – MISSION 2

6-3.2 Introduction What will you do with all the snapshots you are taking? Will you make a movie, a slideshow, a screenshot or put them on a website?

6-3.2.1 Instruction If you are going to use your images outside of Second Life, you might need to size them to fit your project for the best results. Many movies are created with a specific size, or aspect ratio in mind. Even screenshots are usually sized for your specific computer set-up. The Snapshot Preview window allows you to set the finished size of your image. It even includes common movie and screenshot sizes as choices.

6-3.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Choose an image size Let’s say you are going to make a movie with a 640 x 480 aspect ratio. From the Snapshot Preview window, choose 640 x 480 from the image dropdown menu. Now, when you take a snapshot, the finished shot will be automatically sized to 640 x 480! TRY THIS NOW: What if you want to make a custom screensaver for your computer? Find out what your computers screen resolution is. Now, choose the size image you need. If none of the choices meet your need, you can choose a specific width and height using the arrows. Find a great image, take a snapshot, save to disk and make a new screensaver! Now, when people look over your shoulder, they’ll be sure to ask you about Second Life! Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 318 of 438

6-3.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: How else can you use snapshots outside of Second Life? Do you know what screen resolution you would need?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 319 of 438

Media: Snapshots - Part 2 Snapshot Quality LEVEL: 6 MODULE: MEDIA: SNAPSHOTS II – MISSION 3

6-3.3 Introduction Have you ever thought of putting one of your snapshots on a web page?

6-3.3.1 Instruction Different snapshot uses need different levels of Image quality. Of course, you never want your snapshots to look out of focus! But, sometimes, you need to consider the file size of an image – especially if you plan to put it on the web.

6-3.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Selecting the level of image quality Web pages load more quickly when their images have a smaller file size. However, if the file sizes are too small, the image will look bad on your webpage. The key is to make your File size as small as possible while keeping the Image Quality as high as possible. TRY THIS NOW: Take three snapshots and compare the differences in File Size and Image Quality. You can change the Image Quality by moving the slider. Open the Snapshot Preview window and choose the Send a Postcard option. Take three photos with the following Image Quality values and email each one to yourself: • 80 • 60 • 40 Open up each email and compare the images. Could you use the lower settings in a web page?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 320 of 438

6-3.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: How would other Image Quality settings affect the file size? Try out other settings!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 321 of 438

Media: Snapshots – Part 2 Snapshots of the Interface LEVEL: 6 MODULE: MEDIA: SNAPSHOTS II – MISSION 4

6-3.4 Introduction Have you ever tried to explain a Second Life feature to someone else? Sometimes a photo would really help.

6-3.4.1 Instruction By default, the Interface, or Second Life control panel, does not show when you take a Snapshot. You can show these controls, and any HUDs (Heads Up Displays) you have on your screen by selecting options from the Snapshot Preview window.

6-3.4.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Showing the Interface and HUD objects

Selecting Show interface in snapshot and Show HUD objects in snapshot options will allow you to take snapshots that show other people what you are doing onscreen. TRY THIS NOW: Open the Snapshot Preview window and select both these options. Take a snapshot and Save to Disk. Take another snapshot with these options deselected. Compare the difference.

6-3.4.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: Images are powerful. Now that you know how to make your snapshots look their best both in and out of Second Life, how could you use those skills? Could you make a PowerPoint or slideshow that would convince your school to consider using it in their teaching? What about taking snapshots and putting them in a small movie or on a webpage?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 322 of 438

First, decide if you are going to make a slideshow, movie or web page. Take at least 5 snapshots showing 5 ways Second Life helps teens learn. Save them to your hard drive with settings appropriate to how you will deliver your information. Now, share your images and thoughts with two or three other people. If you can, actually make the slideshow, movie or web page. If you have a way to put your presentation on the web for others to see, do it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 6

GKCx - 323 of 438

Global Kids' Second Life Curriculum LESSON PLANS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; LEVEL 7

Global Kids' Second Life Curriculum. Fall, 2007. ÂŠ2007.

GKCx - 324 of 438

TABLE OF CONTENTS

STANDARDS

Learning Standards addressed in this curriculum AVATAR: GESTURES

Module Overview 7-1.0 Introduction 7-1.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 7-1.0.2 Action Plan

Using Gestures 7-1.1 Introduction 7-1.1.1 Instruction 7-1.1.2 Practice 7-1.1.3 Action Plan

Modifying An Existing Gesture 7-1.2 Introduction 7-1.2.1 Instruction 7-1.2.2 Practice 7-1.2.3 Action Plan

1 2

2 2 2 3

5 5 5 5 7

8 8 8 8 9

Making A New Gesture

7-1.3 Introduction 7-1.3.1 Instruction 7-1.3.2 Practice 7-1.3.3 Action Plan

10 10 10 12

FINDING STUFF: HELP AND OTHER RESOURCES

Module Overview 7-2.0 Introduction 7-2.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 7-2.0.2 Action Plan

Inworld Help 7-2.1 Introduction 7-2.1.1 Instruction 7-2.1.2 Practice 7-2.1.3 Action Plan

Online Support 7-2.2 Introduction 7-2.2.1 Instruction 7-2.2.2 Practice 7-2.2.3 Action Plan

Forums 7-2.3 Introduction 7-2.3.1 Instruction 7-2.3.2 Practice

13 13 13 14

16 16 16 16 18

19 19 19 19 21

22 22 22 22

GKCx - 325 of 438

7-2.3.3 Action Plan

Additional Resources 7-2.4 Introduction 7-2.4.1 Instruction 7-2.4.2 Practice 7-2.4.3 Action Plan

Second Life Grid 7-2.5 Introduction 7-2.5.1 Instruction 7-2.5.2 Practice 7-2.5.3 Action Plan

24 24 24 24 25

26 26 26 26 28

FINDING STUFF: MONEY

Module Overview

7-3.0 Introduction 7-3.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 7-3.0.2 Action Plan

Getting Money 7-3.1 Introduction 7-3.1.1 Instruction 7-3.1.2 Practice 7-3.1.3 Action Plan

Selling Items 7-3.2 Introduction 7-3.2.1 Instruction 7-3.2.2 Practice 7-3.2.3 Action Plan

Buying Items 7-3.3 Introduction 7-3.3.1 Instruction 7-3.3.2 Practice 7-3.3.3 Action Plan

29 29 30

31 31 31 31 32

33 33 33 33 34

35 35 35 35 36

GKCx - 326 of 438

Learning Standards addressed in this curriculum McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

GKCx - 327 of 438

Avatar: Gestures Module Overview LEVEL: 7 MODULE: AVATAR: GESTURES – OVERVIEW

7-1.0 Introduction Have you ever realized how much you say using “body language”? Second Life allows avatars the ability to use body language as well as chat to communicate. The easiest way to use movement to express your thoughts and emotions is to use Gestures. Gestures are animations that can be used and even attached to words and keystrokes to animate your avatar. You will learn how to use and modify pre-made gestures in this module.

7-1.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing: Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing; uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice (e.g., stream of consciousness, multiple viewpoints) o Technology – Understands the relationships among science, technology, society, and the individual - Observes common courtesies and acceptable use policies while telecomputing o Working with Others – Displays effective interpersonal communication skills - Knows strategies to effectively communicate in a variety of settings (e.g., selects appropriate strategy for audience and situation) 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

GKCx - 328 of 438

(What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Finding gestures in your Inventory o Using simple gestures in your Inventory o Previewing and activating a gesture o Quickly choosing a gesture using the Gesture button o Modifying a chat trigger for a gesture o Assigning a shortcut key to a gesture o Creating new gestures from animations, sounds, chat and timing You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Using simple gestures to communicate o Using the Gesture button to communicate o Modifying a gesture to reflect your unique personality o Using your new gestures in a rap or poem that tells about a global issue you’re concerned about

Location

Gestures Sounds

Inventory> Library> Gestures Inventory> Library> Sounds

7-1.0.2 Action Plan

TERMS: Gesture: An action performed to show feelings or intentions. In Second Life, gestures can combine movements, sounds and chat. Chat Trigger: A word you type while chatting that starts a gesture. Shortcut Key: A combination of keyboard keys that starts a gesture.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 329 of 438

TAKE ACTION: Using all your gesture-creating skills, create some gestures that can be put together to create a rap or poem that talks about a global issue that concerns you. Experiment with chat and timing to get each line just right. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Find a few people and perform your rap or poem for them.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 330 of 438

Avatar: Gestures Using Gestures LEVEL: 7 MODULE: AVATAR: GESTURES – MISSION 1

7-1.1 Introduction Your avatar was “born” with more than an ability to just stand there! You’ve already learned how to walk and talk. Now it’s time to learn how to really express yourself! What makes “you” you? The way your dress or speak? What about your body language? That’s what gestures are all about.

7-1.1.1 Instruction Gestures can be as simple as waving a hand or complex, with words, sounds, movements and timing. You can decide which gestures reflect you, and then activate them. You can even use them quickly, using the Gesture button.

7-1.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Gestures in your Inventory You already have some gestures in the Library section of your Inventory. Check them out here: Inventory > All Items Tab > Library > Gestures You can see several folders of default gestures: • Common • Female • Male • Other • Speech You can use all of them.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 331 of 438

TRY THIS NOW: Find your Gestures in your Library and open each folder to see what’s there. Which gestures look interesting to you?

Step 2: Previewing Gestures Your first step is to “try on” some gestures to see if you even like them. Let’s look at the /muscle gesture. You can find it here: Inventory > Library > Gestures > Common Gestures > /muscle Now, double-click on /muscle to open the Gesture Edit window (See next image). We will be using this window quite a bit for the rest of this module. At the bottom of the Gesture Edit window you will see a Preview button. Click Preview and watch your avatar perform that gesture!

Step 3: Activating Gestures Once you find a gesture you like, you can activate it. To activate a gesture, just click the Active box at the bottom of the Gesture Edit window. Activating a gesture will allow you to use it quickly by typing its Trigger in the chat bar. A Trigger is a shortcut, such as /muscle or /bow.

TRY THIS NOW: Open the /muscle gesture in the Gesture Edit window. Check the box to activate it. Save and close. Type /muscle in your chat bar. Did you make a muscle?

Step 4: Using the Gesture Menu button You can also gesture quickly by using the Gesture Menu button. Click on it and a list of your activated gestures will pop up.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 332 of 438

Clicking on a gesture in the Gesture Button window starts that gesture. TRY THIS NOW: Since you just activated /muscle in the Gesture Edit window, you should see it listed in your Gesture Button window. Click on /muscle from the Gesture Button window. Nice!

Step 5: Try a few yourself! Take a few minutes and preview and activate some gestures from each of the gesture folders. They’re going to come in very handy in the next few missions.

7-1.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Find another person. Using your default rock/paper/scissors gestures, located in the Common Gestures folder, challenge them to two-out-of-three. If you’re unfamiliar with the game, the rules usually go something like this: • On the count of three, each person makes the sign for either “rock”, “paper” or “scissors” • A “rock” gesture wins over “scissors” (Think of a rock crushing a pair of scissors) • A “paper” gesture wins over “rock” (Think of a piece of paper covering a rock) • A “scissors” gesture wins over “paper” (Think of a pair of scissors cutting paper)

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 333 of 438

Avatar: Gestures Modifying An Existing Gesture LEVEL: 7 MODULE: AVATAR: GESTURES – MISSION 2

7-1.2 Introduction There’s more than one way to use gestures. In fact, there are two or three! You can also modify a gesture so it will happen while you are chatting. In this mission, we’ll explore modifying gestures.

7-1.2.1 Instruction Typing a gesture trigger or even clicking on the Gesture button still limits your ability to quickly express yourself. Using the Gesture Edit window, you can modify a gesture to be used in several ways. First, you’ll learn how to change a Chat Trigger to start a gesture using regular typing chat. Next, you’ll see how to modify the chat that appears when you use that new trigger. Finally, you’ll learn how to program Shortcut Keys for your favorite gestures.

7-1.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Assigning a Chat Trigger You know how to get to a favorite gesture quickly now. But what if you want to use a different chat trigger? What if you want to actually say a word at the same time that you’re chatting to trigger a gesture? It can be done.

TRY THIS NOW: Go into your Inventory and double-click on the /muscle gesture to open the Gesture Edit window. Right now, the “Trigger:” is “/muscle”. In that same Trigger box, change “/muscle” to “muscles”. Then click the Save button at the bottom of the Gesture Edit window.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 334 of 438

Now, when you type the sentence: “My muscles are amazing!”, your avatar will do the “muscles” gesture at the same time. Try it now! Step 2: Replacing chat text Did you notice that the word “muscles” didn’t actually appear in the sentence you typed? It probably looked like this: “My are amazing!” You need to specify what will appear in chat when you type the Trigger. Next to the Trigger box is the “Replace with:” box. In this box, type the word(s) you would like to see when you type the Trigger: muscles. TRY THIS NOW: Type the words: rippling muscles in the Replace with: box. Make sure to Save. Now, in the chat window, when you type: “I have muscles today!” – You should see: “I have rippling muscles today!” … And your avatar should prove it!

Step 3: Assigning a Shortcut Key You can also choose a keyboard shortcut using a combination of Shift, Control and Function keys. TRY THIS NOW: From your Inventory, double-click on our faithful muscles gesture. In the Gesture Edit window, click on the Shortcut Key drop down menu and choose Shift and F2, then Save. Now type Shift/F2 using your keyboard. Did you avatar flex some muscles?

7-1.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Customizing gestures in this way adds loads of individuality to your avatar. If you want to, modify a few more gestures to trigger when you are typing chat.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 335 of 438

Avatar: Gestures Making A New Gesture LEVEL: 7 MODULE: AVATAR: GESTURES – MISSION 3

7-1.3 Introduction Why are you in Second Life – to meet new friends … build … script? When you let people know what you like to do, you may meet others who share your interests!

7-1.3.1 Instruction The Interest tab allows others to quickly see your talents and interests in Second Life.

7-1.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Creating a New Gesture To create a brand new gesture, open your Inventory window and choose Create > New Gesture from the top menu choices. Now navigate to your Gestures folder and R- click (Cmd-click) on New Gesture. Rename it as: rsg! (“rsg!” stands for “Ready, Set, Go!” Can you guess what this gesture is going to look like?) Double click on rsg! to open the Gesture Edit window. Step 2: Exploring the Gesture Edit window The center part of the Gesture Edit window contains everything you’ll need to put together your custom gesture. The left window contains Animation, Sound, Chat and Wait choices. The right side shows what order those choices are performed. The buttons in the middle allow you to edit and reorder your choices. A new gesture comes with an example Animation, Wait and Chat. Use the Preview button to see what the gesture already looks like. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 336 of 438

Step 3: Reordering a Gesture Using the same gesture, click on the Start Animation: Wave in the right window. Using the Move Down button, click until the wave animation is at the bottom. Preview the gesture again. What happened? Step 4: Adding a feature Now you’ll actually add something to your gesture. Click on Chat in the left window and then the Add button. A fill-in box will appear on the right side, allowing you to enter text. Enter: Nice shirt! Your latest additions will be at the bottom of your list. Try moving your new chat line up and down and previewing to see what happens. Choosing Animation or Sound will bring up windows that show all the animations and sounds in your Inventory. We will practice adding those features in just a minute. Step 5: Deleting a feature You can also delete gesture features if you make a mistake or change your mind. Click on each item in the right window and then choose the Delete button to delete. When the right window is blank, you’re ready for the next step. Step 6: Putting it all together! You now have a blank slate to create your rsg!. Using the following list, add and reorder features until the right window looks like this:

Start Animation: BigSmile ---Wait: 0.2 seconds Start Animation: RPS count Chat: Ready… Chat: Set… ---Wait: 0.2 seconds ---Wait: until animations are done Chat: GO! Start Animation: Jump For Joy Start Animation: BigSmile Sound: Clap 1 Start Animation: Clap

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 337 of 438

Now Save and Preview your new gesture! Make sure you also Activate it. You did it! You created an amazing custom gesture! Great job!

7-1.3.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: You know all about activating, accessing, modifying and creating gestures. Now itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s your turn to really express yourself! Using all your gesture-creating skills, create some gestures that can be put together to create a rap or poem that talks about a global issue that concerns you. Experiment with chat and timing to get each line just right. SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Find a few people and perform your rap or poem for them.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 338 of 438

Finding Stuff: Help and Other Resources Module Overview LEVEL: 6 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: HELP AND OTHER RESOURCES – OVERVIEW

7-2.0 Introduction Second Life provides its residents with help and support in a number of ways both inworld and online. In this module, you will be exploring all the options.

7-2.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing - Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice o Language Arts – Listening and Speaking – Uses listening and speaking strategies for different purposes - Adjusts message wording and delivery to particular audiences and for particular purposes o Technology – Understands the relationships among science, technology, society, and the individual - Observes common courtesies and acceptable use policies while telecomputing o Working with Others – Displays effective interpersonal communication skills - Knows strategies to effectively communicate in a variety of settings o Life Work – Uses various information sources, including those of a technical nature, to accomplish specific tasks 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 339 of 438

POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Getting to Orientation Island and Help Island o Using all the support features on the Second Life website o Using forums o Knowing options in the Help menu o Knowing resources specifically helpful for educators and non-profit organizations You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Organizing items into subfolders o Getting help from residents on the Help Island o Getting help from a group o Accessing the Knowledge Base and Solution Finder o Submitting a ticket o Exploring the wiki o Becoming familiar with the Second Life Grid site o Searching forums for answers o Contributing questions and answers to the forums o Exploring the remainder options in the Second Life Help menu Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o Levels 1-6

TERMS: Forum: A website where ideas and views on a particular issue can be exchanged.

7-2.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, letâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s see if youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 340 of 438

TAKE ACTION: Explore all the help options available to you in Second Life and on the Second Life website. If you were helping someone very new to Second Life, which help resource would you suggest they use first? Blog about three different help options you have used and your experiences with each of them.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 341 of 438

Finding Stuff: Help and Other Resources Inworld Help LEVEL: 7 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: HELP AND OTHER RESOURCES – MISSION 1

7-2.1 Introduction Orientation Island and Help Island are two main destinations for residents to get help inworld. These are the locations where new residents first arrive before moving on to the mainland and also where they can return at any point for help.

7-2.1.1 Instruction Although you can’t return to the original Orientation Island and Help Island once you leave, you can go to a public version of both of them at any time. On these islands, you will find helpful tutorials as well as specially trained residents (Volunteers and Mentors) who will be happy to answer any of your questions. If you are a member of a group, you can also ask more experienced members for tips and solutions to problems.

7-2.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Orientation Island Public You can go to Orientation Island Public for a quick course on how to chat, move, use objects and change your appearance in Second Life. From the upper menu bar choose: Help > In-world Help > Orientation Island Public. This will open the Maps window showing Orientation Island in the search box. If you don’t see it, type it in the search box.

Click on the blue Search button to locate Orientation Island on the map. Then click the blue Teleport button to get there. TRY THIS NOW: Visit Orientation Island. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 342 of 438

Step 2: Help Island Public You will find many helpful residents on Help Island Public who will be happy to answer your questions or point you in the right direction for support. You can also view demos, practice tutorials and pick up notecards. From the upper menu bar choose: Help > In-world Help > Help Island Public.

This will open the Maps window showing Help Island in the search box. If you donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t see it, type it in the search box. Click on the blue Search button to locate Help Island on the map. Then click the blue Teleport button to get there. TRY THIS NOW: Explore Help Island.

Step 3: Another way to get to the public islands Your inventory Library comes with landmarks to both these locations.

Click the Inventory button at the bottom of the screen. Type Help Island or Orientation Island in the inventory search field. Double-click the landmark.

A Landmark window is displayed. Click Teleport.

Step 4: Asking group members for help Many people belong to groups full of others who have been in Second Life for quite a while. You can often find the exact information you need just by asking! TRY THIS NOW: Choose one of your groups from the Communication window and send an IM. You can ask where people recommend learning a certain skill, such as building or using particles. You may get some very helpful answers! Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 343 of 438

7-2.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Think of one thing you need help with in Second Life. Go to the Orientation Island or Help Island to look for answers.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 344 of 438

Finding Stuff: Help and Other Resources Online Support LEVEL: 7 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: HELP AND OTHER RESOURCES â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 2

7-2.2 Introduction If you arenâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t able to find answers inworld, the Second Life website is the best place to look.

7-2.2.1 Instruction There are many support options available on the Second Life website (www.secondlife.com). You can get answers to problems as well as find tutorials to build your Second Life skills.

7-2.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Support page The support page on the Second Life website contains detailed info on all support options, including a direct link to the Second Life Knowledge Base and Solution Finder. To get to this page when you are logged into Second Life, select Help > Second Life Help. When asked if you want to go to the Second Life website, click Go to open the support page in a new browser window. If you are not logged into Second Life, open a new web browser window and type www.secondlife.com in the address bar to load the Second Life website. Click on the link named Support to go to the support page. TRY THIS NOW: Access the support page on the Second Life website using your web browser. Step 2: Knowledge Base and Solution Finder This section of the Second Life website contains an extensive and frequently updated set of articles about Second Life. The articles provide general information about using Second Life as Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 345 of 438

well as specific information you can use when encountering problems. Information is in the form of short articles, video tutorials and links to other websites containing helpful information. To access the Knowledge Base and Solution Finder, you need to login at the bottom of the support page using your avatar name and password. Once you are logged in, you can choose from a number of topics or search using keywords. TRY THIS NOW: Login to the Knowledge Base and Solution Finder. Once you are logged in, select a topic you are interested in and view the results. Step 3: Submit a ticket If you cannot find an answer to your question or problem, you can also submit a ticket to the Second Life support staff. If you have a premium account you may submit a ticket, by answering a series of questions designed to help support staff understand and answer your question. When you complete your ticket request, you will be given a ticket number and a link to check your ticket status. You will receive an email answer to your question or problem usually within 24 hours. Basic account holders and guests should only use the "Special Questions - Basic Account or Guest Login" option in the Ticket Type drop-down menu. TRY THIS NOW: If you actually have a problem, submit a ticket. Otherwise, imagine you do and fill out the form without actually submitting it. Step 4: Second Life Wiki The Second Life Wiki is another resource for help. You can get to it by clicking on the link in the support page or by typing: http://wiki.secondlife.com/wiki/Main_Page in the address bar of a web browser. The wiki contains many helpful tutorials in written and video formats: http://wiki.secondlife.com/wiki/Category:Tutorials TRY THIS NOW: Go to the wiki and select an interesting topic to read. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 346 of 438

7-2.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Have you learned something new? Take a few minutes to practice your new skill.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 347 of 438

Finding Stuff: Help and Other Resources Forums LEVEL: 7 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: HELP AND OTHER RESOURCES – MISSION 3

7-2.3 Introduction One nice thing about Second Life is the ability to ask everyone a question and benefit from everyone’s knowledge. Forums are a way for residents to communicate with each other, ask questions and offer advice.

7-2.3.1 Instruction To find answers to your questions, you need to know how to effectively search the Second Life forum for the information you need and how to post questions for people to answer.

7-2.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Searching the Forums The Forums are located in the Second Life website under the Community page. www.secondlife.com > Community > Forums To view the Forums, you need to log into the site using your Second Life avatar name and password. The Forums are divided into specific subjects such as: • • •

Scripting Building Machinima

Each forum contains threaded discussions on many different topics. TRY THIS NOW: Choose a forum and view a question that interests you. Did you learn something new? If you look carefully, you will find that many residents offer free scripts and files that are very useful.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 348 of 438

Step 2: Making a forum post Before you post a question to one of the forums, it’s helpful to read the forum guidelines located at the top of the main Forums page.

When you are ready to post a question, select the New Thread button. Fill out the form provided with a descriptive title and a clearly worded question. TRY THIS NOW: Post a question to one of the forums. Step 3: Answering a forum post The strength of the forums is the collective knowledge of everyone who answers. Many people not only share knowledge, but helpful resources for everyone’s benefit. The forums are a treasure trove of files, scripts and tips. To answer a post, select the Post Reply button and fill out the provided form. Try this now: As you read through the forums, do you see a question you can answer? Share your knowledge by posting a reply!

7-2.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: The key to becoming more skilled is not only to have the knowledge, but also to practice using it. Take a few minutes to try out something new you’ve learned in the forums.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 349 of 438

Finding Stuff: Help and Other Resources Additional Resources LEVEL: 7 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: HELP AND OTHER RESOURCES â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 4

7-2.4 Introduction Being familiar with all the features of the Help menu will save you frustration in the midst of sticky situations.

7-2.4.1 Instruction The Help menu contains many powerful and unique features. You can find specific scripting information to help you as you craft a new script. You can also report someone who is abusing others.

7-2.4.2 Practice Step 1: Scripting guide The Linden Scripting Language guide is a website that explains each scripting term and how to use it. To access the guide, choose: Help > Scripting Guide. Clicking on the option Ok will open the guide in your web browser.

TRY THIS NOW: Open up the Scripting Guide and read the Introduction. Step 2: Scripting portal The Linden Scripting Language portal is a community wiki that has a variety of scripting resources. In addition to specific scripting information, you can find tutorials and even scripting teachers! To access the portal, choose: Help > Scripting Portal. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 350 of 438

Clicking on the option Go to page will take you to the Scripting portal on the Second Life wiki. TRY THIS NOW: Visit the Scripting Portal and look at one of the tutorials. Step 4: Report Abuse Second Life residents agree to certain Community Standards that include treating others respectfully. Residents that abuse these standards, by either harassing other residents or displaying offensive objects may be reported and stopped. To report abuse, choose: Help menu > Report Abuse. You will be asked to fill out a form naming the resident involved and specific details about the incident. Itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s important to give as much information as possible so that the report can be investigated. TRY THIS NOW: Open Report Abuse and familiarize yourself with the form. If you were trying to report an abusive resident, would you know what to do? Tip: The Community Standards can be viewed here: https://secure-web9.secondlife.com/corporate/cs.php

7-2.4.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: If you were helping someone very new to Second Life, which help resource would you suggest they use first? Blog about three different help options you have used and your experiences with each of them.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 351 of 438

Finding Stuff: Help and Other Resources Second Life Grid LEVEL: 7 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: HELP AND OTHER RESOURCES – MISSION 5

7-2.5 Introduction Are you a student, educator or other professional working on “serious” projects in Second Life? There is a section of the Second Life website just for you.

7-2.5.1 Instruction Second Life Grid website offers information for educators, non-profits and businesses wanting to use Second Life as a platform to develop useful and innovative methods to teach, learn and communicate.

7-2.5.2 Practice Step 1: The Second Life Grid You may access the Second Life Grid from the first page of the regular Second Life website (www.secondlife.com) or directly from http://secondlifegrid.net/ Specific educational and non-profit information can be found by selecting the Education & Nonprofit link from the main Second Life page, or by entering http://secondlifegrid.net/programs/education+ TRY THIS NOW: Go to the Education & Nonprofit page on Second Life Grid and read the introduction in the center of the page. Step 2: Using the Second Life Grid to connect with others Just like the regular Second Life website, the Grid offers many opportunities to connect, ask questions and share helpful information. There are wiki pages and listservs you can read and contribute to. TRY THIS NOW: Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 352 of 438

Select the link: Join our Education Mailing List (SLED). Read the information provided and, if you choose, subscribe to this robust, very active community of educators. If you wish, investigate the link: Additional Education-Related Mailing Lists for other listservs that might meet your needs. Tip: These listservs are very active and can fill up your email inbox quickly. Their information, however, is extremely helpful. Some people find it useful to use an email filter to group their SLED messages together. Note: If you ever choose to unsubscribe from the listserv, you will need to use the same email you choose to subscribe. Donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t forget it! Step 3: The Second Life Education Wiki Choosing the link: Second Life Education Wiki will take you to a wiki specifically for educators using Second Life. This amazing resource is maintained by educators worldwide and offers a wealth of information for both higher education and teen educators and non-profits. Hosted outside of the official Second Life, the URL is: http://www.simteach.com/wiki/index.php?title=Second_Life_Education_Wiki TRY THIS NOW: Go to the SimTeach wiki and look through the first page. Do you see a link that might answer a question you have? Step 4: Keeping track of new information Second Life, as a platform, continues to improve and evolve. Groups of educators continue to increase their understanding of how best to use this amazing new way to teach and learn. Keeping track of that information can seem overwhelming at times. TRY THIS NOW: Decide on and implement a strategy to keep track of these rich resources. You can join a listserv, make the Second Life Grid the opening page on your favorite web browser or set a weekly alarm on your calendar to view new updates. Choose a strategy that will work for you! What is missing from the SimTeach wiki that you wish were available? What is a question you could ask a listserv? What would you want others to know about your involvement with Second Life and how could you use these tools to spread the word?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 353 of 438

7-2.5.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: Explore all of the help options available to you in Second Life and on the Second Life website. If you were helping someone very new to Second Life, which help resource would you suggest they use first? Blog about three different help options you used and your experiences with each of them.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 354 of 438

Finding Stuff: Money Module Overview LEVEL: 5 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: MONEY

7-3.0 Introduction One of the first things new Second Life residents ask is “Where can I get money?” You may buy Lindens, the Second Life currency, through LindeX, a real life currency exchange. You can also use your new skills to make and sell your own creations! Finally, you can use those Lindens to buy other wonderful items you just can’t live without.

7-3.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing - Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice o Economics – Understands the concept of prices and the interaction of supply and demand in a market economy o Technology – Understands the relationships among science, technology, society, and the individual - Observes common courtesies and acceptable use policies while telecomputing o Life Work – Manages money effectively - Prepares and follows a budget 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

o Learning and Innovation Skills – Communication and Collaboration o Information, Media and Technology Skills – ICT (Information, Communications and Technology) Literacy POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Buying Lindens from the LindeX currency exchange Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 355 of 438

o Selling objects o Giving someone money o Buying an item o Viewing your transaction history You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Purchasing Lindens for use inworld o Selling an object you have created o Selling a box full of items for $L0 o Giving a friend Lindens o Buying an item from a friend o Unpacking a box of items you’ve purchased o Viewing a record of your recent purchases Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o Levels 1-6 MATERIALS: Item

Location

An object you have created

Your Inventory

TERMS: LindeX: The official Linden currency exchange that converts real currency to Lindens and vice versa.

7-3.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, let’s see if you’ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: What is your philosophy of getting and using money in Second Life? If someone asked you for money in Second Life would you give it to him or her? Under what conditions would you do so? In the real world if someone asked you for money would you give it to him or her? Under what conditions would you do so?? Blog about it! THIS IS NOT AN ACTION, THOUGH – JUST A SET OF QUESTIONS. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 356 of 438

Finding Stuff: Money Getting Money LEVEL: 7 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: MONEY â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 1

7-3.1 Introduction Itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s fun to make and trade objects with friends in Second Life. Sooner or later, however, most people want money, known as Lindens. Lindens are used inworld to buy objects, land, and passes to events.

7-3.1.1 Instruction One way to get Lindens is by buying them. You can purchase them both inworld and from www.secondlife.com using the payment information you provided when you created your Second Life account. You can also get Lindens by getting a job or taking advantage of special opportunities just for new folks.

7-3.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Purchasing Lindens inworld You may purchase Lindens by choosing the blue LindeX button at the top right of your screen next to your account amount. You will be asked to select the amount you wish to purchase and then confirm your request. The additional Linden amount will be shown in your account almost right away. TRY THIS NOW: Purchase a small amount of Lindens. Make sure to look at your account balance to see the difference.

Note: The Linden exchange rate usually runs around L$270 to the U.S. dollar. This rate can vary from day to day.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 357 of 438

Step 2: Purchasing Lindens from the Second Life website You do not need to be logged into Second Life to purchase Lindens. You can purchase them directly from the website. They will be deposited into your account and be available the next time you log into Second Life. TRY THIS NOW: Go to the following URL and log into your Second Life account. https://secure-web3.secondlife.com/currency/buy.php Select either the amount of Lindens you want to buy or the amount of real money ($US) you want to trade for Lindens. Choose the Buy button to complete your purchase. Step 3: Jobs Sometimes, successful business owners will advertise in the Classifieds for employees! Just like in real life, these jobs can range from highly paid responsible positions to very low paying unskilled positions. Before you take any job, ask yourself: • How much this position is paying when converted back in to $US money • How many hours a week it requires • If it is fun • If it is ethical • If you will enjoy the job TRY THIS NOW: Use Search > Classifieds to search for advertised jobs. Do you see anything you really want to do? Contact the person and apply for the job! Step 4: Opportunities for new residents Often, businesses will offer small amounts of money to new residents as a way to introduce you to their store. Many times, this free money is available to be picked from a Money Tree located at the business. TRY THIS NOW: Use Search > Places > Money Tree for a list. Teleport to a Money Tree location and look for a tree with dollar bills and fruit hanging from it. If you are very new to Second Life, you can touch the bills and fruit and watch as the Lindens are added to your account!

7-3.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Money Trees are a fun way to gather a few Lindens. If you are new, try finding a few more!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 358 of 438

Finding Stuff: Money Selling Items LEVEL: 7 MODULE: FINDING STUFF – MISSION 2

7-3.2 Introduction Are you interested in creating something other people would pay money to own or use? You can sell any item you create and have the money deposited directly into your account!

7-3.2.1 Instruction Throughout Second Life, you can see sophisticated storefronts selling just about anything you can imagine. You don’t need a large store to sell your own items, however. You can just put them out and set them for sale.

7-3.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Find an object to sell To sell an object, you must make sure it, and all the scripts and textures you used to make it, have Resell/Give Away permissions (also known as Transfer permissions). You can check permissions by R-clicking an object in your Inventory and choosing Permissions. If you created the object, you can change the permissions by checking and unchecking the permissions boxes in the Inventory Properties window. You can also check permissions by rezzing the object and looking in the Edit window General tab. o Modify – allows the next owner to change the item. o Copy – allows the next owner to copy the item. o Resell/Give away – allows the next owner to sell or give away the item.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 359 of 438

TRY THIS NOW: Find an object you made and might want to sell. Check the permissions to make sure it can be transferred. Step 2: Setting an object for sale To sell an object, select the For Sale checkbox in the General tab of the Edit window. You must choose to sell the original or a copy. Unless you want to sell a one-of-a-kind item, choose Copy. Then enter a selling price! TRY THIS NOW: Rez the object you’ve decided to sell, open the Edit window and set it for sale. Make sure you choose the Copy option and enter a selling price. Step 3: Setting boxes of items for sale Some types of items, such as clothing items, body parts, textures or scripts, can’t really be rezzed for others to buy. To sell these items, first create a prim, such as a box, that will be a container to hold all the items you want to sell. In the Contents tab of that box, drag all the items you wish to sell from your Inventory.

In the General tab, rename the box, set it for sale and choose the Contents option. This will send a folder of all the included items to the buyer’s inventory.

7-3.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Create a box, fill it with a few transferable items you think a new person would like, and set the selling price at $L0. (Make sure you choose to sell the Contents.)

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 360 of 438

Finding Stuff: Money Buying Items LEVEL: 7 MODULE: FINDING STUFF: MONEY – MISSION 3

7-3.3 Introduction Now that you have some money, what will you buy – clothes, gadgets, buildings?

7-3.3.1 Instruction You can use your Lindens to buy goods and services within Second Life.

7-3.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Buying an item You can buy an item set for sale by R-clicking (Ctrl-click) on it and choosing Buy from the pie menu. You will then be asked to confirm your decision. The money will be deducted from your account and the item transferred to your Inventory. TRY THIS NOW: Find a free or low cost item for sale. Perhaps you and a friend can sell each other an item! Buy it, find it in your Inventory and rez it on the ground. Note: If you try to buy something and don’t have enough Lindens, you will receive a message asking if you would like to purchase more Lindens. If you say yes, you can buy Lindens as explained in Mission 1 of this module. Step 2: Opening a box of items Some boxes need to be unpacked before you can use the items in them. TRY THIS NOW: Find and buy a box containing many items. There are many places in Second Life that offer boxes of free items you can buy for $L0 or $L1.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 361 of 438

After you buy the box, find it in your Inventory and drag it onto the ground. R-click (Ctrl-click) and choose Open from the pie menu. You will be able to view all the items in the box and choose to Copy to Inventory. When you are finished, delete or take the original box. Step 3: Paying a person directly If someone you know has an item you would like to buy, you can pay them directly and have them give you the item. If they are close to you, R-click (Ctrl-click) on them and choose Pay from the pie menu. You can then type in the amount you wish to pay them. If they are near you you, look at the Second Life tab of their Profile and select the Pay button.

Note: Only pay people you trust! If someone doesnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t give you the item they promised, you wonâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t be able to get your money back. Step 4: Viewing your recent transactions You can see a record of recent changes in your account. Your Transaction History shows purchases, inventory transfers and Lindens paid to your account. TRY THIS NOW: View your Transaction History from the past two days. Select World > Account History from the top menu. A record of your account will open up in a browser window. Choose a two-day range of transactions to view. Do you notice even free inventory transfers are shown?

7-3.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: What is your philosophy of getting and using money in Second Life? If someone asked you for money in Second Life would you give it to him or her? Under what conditions would you do so? In the real world if someone asked you for money would you give it to him or her? Under what conditions would you do so?? Blog about it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 7

GKCx - 362 of 438

Dedicated to our fathers.

GKCx by Jeremy Kemp, Stephen Kemp is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Noncommercial-Share Alike 3.0 United States License.

GKCx - 363 of 438

Global Kids' Second Life Curriculum LESSON PLANS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; LEVEL 8

Global Kids' Second Life Curriculum. Fall, 2007. ÂŠ2007.

GKCx - 364 of 438

TABLE OF CONTENTS

STANDARDS

Learning Standards addressed in this curriculum AVATAR: ANIMATIONS

Module Overview 8-1.0 Introduction 8-1.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 8-1.0.2 Action Plan

Using Animations 8-1.1 Introduction 8-1.1.1 Instruction 8-1.1.2 Practice 8-1.1.3 Action Plan

Stopping Animations 8-1.2 Introduction 8-1.2.1 Instruction 8-1.2.2 Practice 8-1.2.3 Action Plan

COMMUNICATION: CREATING A GROUP

Module Overview 8-2.0 Introduction 8-2.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 8-2.0.2 Action Plan

Introduction to Group Creation 8-2.1 Introduction 8-2.1.1 Instruction 8-2.1.2 Practice 8-2.1.3 Action Plan

Creating Group Roles 8-2.2 Introduction 8-2.2.1 Instruction 8-2.2.2 Practice 8-2.2.3 Action Plan

Inviting Group Members 8-2.3 Introduction 8-2.3.1 Instruction 8-2.3.2 Practice 8-2.3.3 Action Plan

Group Proposals 8-2.4 Introduction 8-2.4.1 Instruction 8-2.4.2 Practice

1 2

2 2 2 3

4 4 4 4 5

6 6 6 6 8

9 9 9 11

12 12 12 12 14

15 15 15 15 16

17 17 17 17 19

20 20 20 20

GKCx - 365 of 438

8-2.4.3 Action Plan

Land and L$

8-2.5 Introduction 8-2.5.1 Instruction 8-2.5.2 Practice 8-2.5.3 Action Plan

23 23 23 25

LAND: ABOUT LAND

Module Overview 8-3.0 Introduction 8-3.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 8-3.0.2 Action Plan

About Your Land 8-3.1 Introduction 8-3.1.1 Instruction 8-3.1.2 Practice 8-3.1.3 Action Plan

Land Objects 8-3.2 Introduction 8-3.2.1 Instruction 8-3.2.2 Practice 8-3.2.3 Action Plan

Managing Media 8-3.3 Introduction 8-3.3.1 Instruction 8-3.3.2 Practice 8-3.3.3 Action Plan

26 26 26 28

29 29 29 29 30

31 31 31 31 32

33 33 33 33 34

GKCx - 366 of 438

Learning Standards addressed in this curriculum McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

GKCx - 367 of 438

Avatar: Animations Module Overview LEVEL: 8 MODULE: AVATAR: ANIMATIONS – OVERVIEW

8-1.0 Introduction Have you noticed avatars using complicated actions? Chances are, they are using animations, instructions that tell an avatar to perform a set of motions. Knowing how to easily use animations will allow you to express yourself in a variety of social situations. Note: Animations are different from gestures. While animations involve independent movements, gestures have movements that can be put in a sequence, combined with sounds and chat, and activated using a keystroke or chat trigger.

8-1.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Technology - Knows the characteristics and uses of computer hardware and operating systems - Knows features and uses of current and emerging technology related to computing o Technology – Understands the relationships among science, technology, society, and the individual - Observes common courtesies and acceptable use policies while telecomputing o Working with Others – Displays effective interpersonal communication skills - Knows strategies to effectively communicate in a variety of settings 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

o Learning and Innovation Skills – Creativity and Innovation o Information, Media and Technology Skills – ICT (Information, Communications and Technology) Literacy POWER-UP: (What you will learn)

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 368 of 438

By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Using animations owned by yourself and others o Playing animations so you, or everyone, can see them in action o Stopping an animation that gets “stuck” You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Wearing an object that includes an animation o Dancing! o Making a scripted object that will stop all animations when touched Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules:

TERMS: Animation: Instructions that tell an avatar to perform a set of motions.

o Levels 1-7 MATERIALS: Item

Location

Torch

Library > Objects

8-1.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, let’s see if you’ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: Go test three dances, so only you can see them, then pick one to use and dance in public.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 369 of 438

Avatar: Animations Using Animations LEVEL: 8 MODULE: AVATAR: ANIMATIONS – MISSION 1

8-1.1 Introduction Have you seen avatars dance, eat or sip a cup of coffee? These movements are animations, a powerful way to express yourself through body language and movement.

8-1.1.1 Instruction Although your Inventory doesn’t come with animations, it does come with scripted objects that use animations when the object is worn or attached to you. In addition, you can find free animations many places in Second Life. You can use animations that you own, or that are put into objects owned by others.

8-1.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Objects with animations Animations can be put into objects and activated when the object is attached to your avatar. A cup of coffee that “makes” you drink, or the Library popgun that “makes” you perform a shooting motion are two examples. TRY THIS NOW: Find the Torch in your Library. Inventory > Library > Objects > Torch R-click (Cmd-click) on it and choose Wear. The animation built into the torch makes you hold it up high. Detach the torch by R-clicking on it and choosing Detach from the pie menu.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 370 of 438

Step 2: Using an animation Animations that you collect, buy or are given are stored in the Animations folder of your My Inventory. Double-clicking on an animation will open the Animation window. To have your avatar perform the animation so that only you can see, select the Play Locally button. This can be a good option when you receive a new animation and you want to look at it privately. To have everyone see, select the Play in World button. TRY THIS NOW: Search your Inventory to see if you have some animations. If you do not, ask a friend for some. Many animations, such as dances, are freely shared throughout Second Life. Double-click on an animation and choose Play in World. When you are done, select the Stop button from the Animation window. Step 3: Using animations that belong to others You may find yourself at a place, such as a dance, where many avatars are doing the same animation at the same time. Usually, there is a scripted object, such as a dance ball, that is controlling everyoneâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s movements. To participate in a group animation, you must first give the scripted object permission to animate your avatar by selecting a button that says you agree. You will also see a message telling you how to stop the animation. TRY THIS NOW: Use your search skills to find a dance club or ask a friend where a dance ball is located. Go there, touch the dance ball and follow the directions to begin dancing. Make sure you understand how to stop when you are finished!

8-1.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: If you donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t yet have many dance animations, ask a few friends if they have some they can give you. Try them out and decide which ones you want to use the next time you find yourself at a dance!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 371 of 438

Avatar: Animations Stopping Animations LEVEL: 8 MODULE: AVATAR: ANIMATIONS – MISSION 2

8-1.2 Introduction Have you ever tried to stop an animation, only to find you keep on doing it? Once in a while an animation can become stuck. Fortunately, there are a few tricks to make it stop.

8-1.2.1 Instruction When your avatar gets stuck in a never-ending animation, there are a few tricks you can try to stop. You can even use a script that will stop all animations.

8-1.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Stopping animations from attached objects What if you detached the torch from the last mission, and your hand continued to look like it was holding it? You would be stuck in an animation. Sometimes, this can happen because you accidentally choose Drop instead of Detach from the pie menu. You can force that animation to stop by reattaching and detaching that object. Step 2: Stopping an animation from the Tools menu If you cannot stop an animation, such as a dance, that was never “attached”, you can use a command from the Tools menu: Tools > Stop all animation TRY THIS NOW: Begin a dance or other animation and choose Stop all animation to stop it. Step 3: Stopping an animation using a script Once in a while, you may find that an animation is stuck. You can always quit Second Life and relog to stop it. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 372 of 438

However, you can also stop all animations your avatar is performing by touching an object that has a Stop All Animations script in it. These objects are very common in Second Life. If you do not have your own, you can easily make one using the script below. TRY THIS NOW: To make your very own Stop All Animations object, rez a prim and open the Edit window to the Content tab. Select the New Script button, copy and paste the following script into the script window. //Coded by Strife Onizuka //Public Domain default { state_entry() { llSetText("Stop All Running Animations",<1,1,1>,1); } touch_start(integer total_number) { llRequestPermissions(llDetectedKey(0), PERMISSION_TRIGGER_ANIMATION); } run_time_permissions(integer a) { if (a & PERMISSION_TRIGGER_ANIMATION) { list a=llGetAnimationList(llGetPermissionsKey()); integer b; key c; for (b;b<llGetListLength(a);b++) //sometimes it gives you a null key, it's a bug. if (c = llList2Key(a,b)) llStopAnimation((string)c); } } } Note: Special thanks to Strife Onizuka for sharing this on the Second Life Scripting Library! Save and make sure the running box is checked. Name your object Stop All Animations and take into your Inventory. Now, if you ever get stuck in an animation, just drag it out of your Inventory and touch it! All animations your avatar is performing should stop.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 373 of 438

8-1.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Go test three dances, so only you can see them, then pick one to use and dance in public.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 374 of 438

Communication: Creating a Group Module Overview LEVEL: 8 MODULE: CREATING A GROUP – OVERVIEW

8-2.0 Introduction Many people will compare Second Life with other games, like World of Warcraft or the Sims. But Second Life is more than “like a game.” It is also like a social networking website, such as Facebook or MySpace. You can always connect with others by joining existing groups. But what if you wanted to start your own network, with its own goals, purpose, and members?

8-2.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Listening and Speaking – Uses listening and speaking strategies for different purposes - Adjusts message wording and delivery to particular audiences and for particular purposes o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing - Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice Technology – Understands the nature and uses of different forms of technology o Behavioral Studies – Understands various meanings of social group, general implications of group membership, and different ways that groups function o Working with Others – Contributes to the overall effort of a group - Works cooperatively within a group to complete tasks, achieve goals, and solve problems 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

o Learning and Innovation Skills – Communication and Collaboration o Information, Media and Technology Skills – ICT Literacy o Life and Career Skills – Social & Cross-Cultural Skills o Life and Career Skills – Leadership & Responsibility

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 375 of 438

POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Creating and customizing a new group o Customizing default group roles o Creating new group roles o Inviting new members to a group o Assigning roles to new group members o Creating and voting on group proposals o Viewing group land credits and donating land to a group o Viewing group L$, credits and debits You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Creating a new group and customizing the charter and insignia o Customizing group roles and creating new roles o Inviting new members and assigning their roles o Creating and voting on group proposals o Viewing group land credits and contributing land Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o Levels 1-7

TERMS: Quorum: The minimum number of members of a group necessary to conduct the business of that group.

MATERIALS: Items

Location

At least L$100

May be purchased through LindeX at Secondlife.com/currency

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 376 of 438

8-2.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, letâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s see if youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: Identify a global or social issue that you would like to learn more about. Create a new group to discuss and explore this issue with other residents. o Customize the group to clearly indicate the purpose of your group, including an insignia and group charter. o Be sure to customize the group roles and set the abilities you would like the other group members to have. o Invite at least one other person to join your group, and create a proposal polling your group members about whether they think the group should own land or not.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 377 of 438

Communication: Creating a Group Introduction to Group Creation LEVEL: 8 MODULE: CREATING A GROUP – MISSION 1

8-2.1 Introduction Have you ever wanted to start a group? When you decide to take on the role of a group founder, you will be able to customize the goals, membership requirements, and management of a Second Life group.

8-2.1.1 Instruction All Second Life groups are created by residents. You can start your own group and set the basic requirements for membership for only L$100.

8-2.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: The Create a Group Window To begin creating a group, select the Communicate button to open the Communicate window. On the right side, click on the Create button to open the Group Information window. You can find the same information from Edit > Groups. TRY IT NOW: Open the Group Information window for a new group using the Create button. Step 2: Enter Basic Group Information Before you create a group you must decide on a Group Name. You can do that on the General tab. TRY IT NOW: Enter the name of your new group in the box that is labeled “Type your new group name here.” Leave this window open for the next step. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 378 of 438

Note: You cannot change your group name at a later date, so type carefully! Step 3: Group Charter and Insignia As the Group Founder you may write the Group Charter and select your Insignia. Your Charter can explain the purpose and goals of your group, and any membership requirements. The Insignia can be any texture or snapshot you have in your Inventory, and will visually represent your group. TRY IT NOW: Take a few minutes to type in your Group Charter. Leave this window open for the next step. Step 4: Group Preferences Do you want others to know about your group? Do you want to let anyone join? Group Preferences let you create the settings for your group privacy and joining options. You can choose to make the group open enrollment or invite only. You can also set an enrollment fee for people to pay when they join. TRY IT NOW: Decide if you want your group to be public or invite only. If youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;d like it to be public, check the Show in Group List box, and the Open Enrollment box. If youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;d like to charge a fee for joining, then click the Enrollment Fee box and set a price in L$. Step 5: Create the Group When you have entered your Charter & Group Name, and have set your preferences for enrollment, you are ready to create the group! Remember, it will cost L$100 to create your group.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 379 of 438

TRY IT NOW: Click the OK button to create your group. A confirmation box will appear asking if you are sure you want to pay L$100 to create your group. Click Yes if you are sure.

8-2.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Now that you are the proud founder of a group, perfect your group charter and select an image to be your insignia.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 380 of 438

Communication: Creating a Group Creating Group Roles LEVEL: 8 MODULE: CREATING A GROUP â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 2

8-2.2 Introduction Have you ever been an officer or had special responsibilities in a real life group? As a group founder, you can choose what roles other group members will have.

8-2.2.1 Instruction As founder you have ultimate control of all group features. Your greatest power is deciding which other members will also have control. Where group land is involved, or group funds, you will want to be careful about who has control.

8-2.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Viewing default group roles Open the Group Information window for the group you created, and click on the Members & Roles tab. This section is broken into three pages: Members, Roles and Abilities. All groups start with three basic Roles: Owners, Officers and Everyone. Each role has Abilities. All members will belong to Everyone by default when they join. Also, the Founder will automatically be an Owner. You, or another officer of the group, must assign all other group roles. TRY IT NOW: View the abilities that are checked for each of the default roles. You can see them at the bottom right of the Roles tab window. What responsibilities are in the Everyone role? Step 2: Creating a new role You can customize the existing roles by checking or unchecking different abilities.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 381 of 438

You can also create new, custom roles for your group. Let’s create a role that is specifically for group members in charge of recruitment. Try it now: Select the Create New Role button. Leave this window open for the next step. Step 3: Customizing a role There are four important pieces to customizing a new or existing role. o Role Name – Short meaningful name. o Role Title – What is seen above your avatar’s head when in this role. o Role Description – Short summary of the role’s purpose and abilities. o Allowed Abilities – Check all abilities that this role should have. TRY IT NOW: Create a role for Group Recruiters – members of your group that you trust to invite more members. Be sure to check the appropriate abilities and hit Apply when finished.

8-2.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Based on the purpose or mission of your group (from your Group Charter) think of at least one more role that you would like to create OR customize the Officer role to better fit the needs of your group. Remember to customize the Group Title and Allowed Abilities.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 382 of 438

Communication: Creating a Group Inviting Group Members LEVEL: 8 MODULE: CREATING A GROUP â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 3

8-2.3 Introduction How will others learn about your new group? Learn now how to tell people about your group and invite them to join!

8-2.3.1 Instruction If you chose Open Enrollment for your group, it can be seen by everyone in Search > Groups. You can also directly invite your contacts to join your group, and assign them specific roles.

8-2.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Allowing Open Enrollment If you want anyone to be able to join your group, you can check the Open Enrollment option in the General tab of the Group Information window. You can also choose either free enrollment or set a membership fee. If you want others to easily search for and find your group, check the Show In Group List option. TRY IT NOW: Choose the Open Enrollment and Show in Group Lst options for your group. Use Search > Groups to search for your group. As long as Open Enrollment is checked, others will see an active Join button to select, along with the membership fee you have selected. Tip: You can change the enrollment options at any time.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 383 of 438

Step 1: View Member List All current group members are listed in the Members tab of Members & Roles. TRY IT NOW: Within the Group Information window, under Members & Roles, switch to the Members tab and view all current group members. It is most likely that you are the only one! Step 2: Invite a new person The Invite New Person button is located below the current Member list. This will open up a Group Invitation window so that you may invite other residents to your group. TRY IT NOW: Click the Invite New Person button to view the Group Invitation window. Leave this open for the next step. Step 3: Using the Person Chooser You are able to invite one resident at a time, or select multiple residents in one invite using the Person Chooser. The Person Chooser allows you to select residents from your calling card list, or to search the list of all residents by typing in a resident name. TRY IT NOW: Click on the Person Chooser button. In the Choose Resident window, search for the name of a resident you know in Second Life. Use the Select button to add them to your invite list. You may also select your friends name from your Calling Card folder, if you have exchanged friendship with this person already. Step 4: Selecting a role for new members Once you have the name of your new member(s) selected, you may decide which role they should join within the group. TRY IT NOW: Use the Role drop down box to select a role for the new member. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 384 of 438

Click the Send Invitations button after youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ve decided on a role.

8-2.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Invite more of your friends or contacts to your new group!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 385 of 438

Communication: Creating a Group Group Proposals LEVEL: 8

MODULE: CREATING A GROUP â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 4

8-2.4 Introduction Have you ever been part of a group, and not been able to make any of the decisions? Itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s not much fun and can be frustrating. Group members in Second Life can work together to create and vote on issues important to them.

8-2.4.1 Instruction Group Proposals allow group members to vote on important decisions (proposals). The ability to create a proposal is an ability you can choose to give to some or all of the members of your group!

8-2.4.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Create a Group Proposal In the Proposal window you can view existing proposals, vote on active proposals, or create a new proposal. The Create Proposal button is in the Proposal window of the Group Information window. TRY IT NOW: Click the Create Proposal button to open the New Proposal window. Step 2: Proposal Details There are several options for Group Proposals. First you must describe what you are proposing! Next, you must decide if you want the vote to pass/fail based on: o Simple Majority (51% or more need to vote for it for it to pass) Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 386 of 438

o 2/3 Majority (66.6% or more need to vote for it for it to pass) o Unanimous (if one person votes against it, then it will not pass) Last, you must decide on a Quorum, the minimum number of votes required for a vote to be valid. For example, if you decide you need a simple majority, and 60 of 70 people voting support the proposal, it will not pass if your quorum was 71 or greater, as fewer than 71 people submitted votes. You can also decide the vote Duration, which determines how long members can take before submitting their vote TRY IT NOW: Create a proposal to send to your group regarding enrollment options. Be sure to check over the description, pass/fail options, quorum and duration. When you have entered this information, click the Submit Proposal button. Step 3: View open group proposals The Proposal window will list any active proposals, when the voting ends for that proposal, and whether you have voted yet or not. To view a proposal, select the proposal and click the View Proposal button. TRY IT NOW: Use the View Proposal button to view the details of your proposal. Step 4: Vote on a proposal To vote on a proposal, you must have the proposal details open. You may choose to vote Yes, No or to Abstain (not place a vote at all). TRY IT NOW: View the proposal you sent and place your vote.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 387 of 438

8-2.4.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Create a proposal to poll your new group members about the mission of your group. Are they happy with the groupâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s goals, or do they want a meeting to rethink its purpose.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 388 of 438

Communication: Creating a Group Land and L$ LEVEL: 8 MODULE: CREATING A GROUP – MISSION 5

8-2.5 Introduction Objects and land are owned by one individual avatar. But groups allow you to own and manage land and items as a community.

8-2.5.1 Instruction It is important to understand how group land ownership is managed and maintained. As the Group Founder it will be your responsibility to be sure that your group, if it owns land, has the land tier to maintain it. If, as a group, you decide to sell items, you can manage the details of your group’s revenue.

8-2.5.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Viewing Land Credits In order for a group to own communal land, members of that group must donate land credits from their own personal Land Tier. Note: Land Tier is the amount of land a resident is allowed to own – whether or not they actually own it. Only residents who have premium (paying) Second Life accounts may own land. The amount of land a person may own depends on the amount of money they are paying for their land use fee Land tier details can be found at: http://secondlife.com/whatis/landpricing.php Not all members must donate land tier as long as there is enough Contribution to cover the amount of land the group is using (the group’s Land in Use). The contribution can come from one resident, or from many. For example, if your Second Life membership level has 512 sq. m. of land tier, you may contribute all or some of this to the group so that the group may own land.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 389 of 438

TRY IT NOW: If you have any free land tier (not being used as personal land) add that contribution to the group, and click the Apply button. Step 2: Group Land Bonus You may notice that there is a slightly higher value now in the available land. This is due to a 10% bonus when land is donated to a group. For example: if you donate 512 sq. m. of land to the group, you will be able to buy 536 sq. m. of group land! TRY IT NOW: If you have a paying account, check your Total Contribution. Notice that it is 10% more than Your Contribution. Remember to watch this window, and make sure that the Total Land in Use value is less than or equal to the Total Contribution. Step 3: Viewing Group L$ If your group has any income, that money is distributed daily to any group members with the financial ability in their role. TRY IT NOW: View the Planning tab of the Group L$ section. Does your group have a Balance? If so, you can see the Group Credits and Debits, as well as your individual share. Step 4: Group L$ details and sales You can view the details of your groupâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s finances with the Details and Sales tabs. TRY IT NOW: View the Details tab. This shows total income from Object Sale, and any Debits the group may have. View the Sales tab. This tab outlines any purchases of Group Objects.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 390 of 438

8-2.5.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: Identify a global or social issue that you would like to learn more about. Create a new group to discuss and explore this issue with other residents. o Customize the group to clearly indicate the purpose of your group, including an insignia and group charter. o Be sure to customize the group roles and set the abilities you would like the other group members to have. o Invite at least one other person to join your group, and create a proposal polling your group members about whether they think the group should own land or not.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 391 of 438

Land: About Land Module Overview LEVEL: 8 MODULE: LAND: ABOUT LAND – OVERVIEW

8-3.0 Introduction What would you create if you had your own land? How large would your land parcel need to be to execute your idea? How would you decide who could have access to your land? Could people visit for free? Owning land is very different than just using land. You have the power to make decisions that will change the experience of everyone who visits. Learning what you can and cannot do is the first step to creating amazing environments for everyone who visits.

8-3.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing- Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice o Technology - Understands the relationships among science, technology, society, and the individual - Observes common courtesies and acceptable use policies while telecomputing o Geography – Place and Regions – Understands the concept of regions 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

o Learning and Innovation Skills – Creativity and Innovation

o Information, Media and Technology Skills – ICT (Information, Communications and Technology) Literacy o Life and Career Skills – Productivity and Accountability – Demonstrating diligence and a positive work ethic POWER-UP: (What you will learn)

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 392 of 438

By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Finding information about specific parcels of land o Finding out how many prims a parcel of land can hold o Returning objects on your land that donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t belong to you o Setting music and videos to play on your land o Choosing who can and cannot access your land o Setting an admission price for your land You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Using the About Land window to find the size and owner of a parcel of land o Viewing any rules or covenants that have been set for the land by the owner o Viewing how many prims a parcel of land supports o Returning other peoplesâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; objects o Setting a music and video URL to play on your land o Banning and granting access to individuals and groups o Selling temporary passes to your land Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o Levels 1-7 MATERIALS: Item Location Texture

Inventory > Library > Textures > FloorTile6

TERMS: Covenant: Rules property owners agree to when purchasing land in a private sim or island. Prim Limit: The number of prims (primitives) a specific parcel supports. This is directly related to the size of the parcel. Griefer: A Second Life resident who bothers or harasses other Second Life residents.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 393 of 438

8-3.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, let’s see if you’ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: You may or may not already have land. But, if you could have a parcel of land, how much would you need? What would you use it for? Just as in real life, planning a specific project means planning and budgeting resources – in this case, prims, money and space. Collect your thoughts and figure out how many prims you would need to execute your idea. You may need to find a sandbox to rez items and see how many prims they take. It can add up! Once you have a total number of prims, determine how big a plot of land you need. Will your idea actually fit on that size parcel? Sometimes planning a project gets complicated. If you want others to help, you need to convince them your idea will work. Using the information you found out above, write up your plan and show it to someone, perhaps on a blog.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 394 of 438

Land: About Land About Your Land LEVEL: 8 MODULE: LAND: ABOUT LAND â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 1

8-3.1 Introduction Have you ever teleported to a place and wished you could find out more about the people who own it? Have you ever considered buying a parcel of land and wondered if many people stop by? You can find all this information using About Land.

8-3.1.1 Instruction The About Land window allows you to view information about specific parcels of land in Second Life. Anyone can view this information, not just the land owner.

8-3.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Finding information about land You can find general information about any parcel of land by opening the About Land window. Select: Pie Menu > About Land > General Tab TRY THIS NOW: R-click on some land nearby and view the General tab for that land. Tip: Land is divided into parcels. To see the property lines between them, select View > Property Lines. Step 2: Viewing land details The General Tab lets you see information about who owns the land. You can also see if the land is for sale. If you are the owner, you can also sell your land and set the sale price. The General tab also shows how large the parcel is and how busy itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s been over a period of time. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 395 of 438

TRY THIS NOW: Find the owner of the land you are on and select the Info button. If the owner is one person, you will see their profile. If it is group-owned, you will see group information. Tip: Have you ever found an amazing place? Viewing land details is a great way to track down a person or group you want to meet!

Step 3: Land Covenants Private estate owners and groups can choose to have rules, or Covenants, that all land owners must agree to. Many times, these Covenants will describe building or event guidelines. You can also learn who the Estate Owner is in case you have questions. TRY THIS NOW: Select the Covenant tab of the About Land window. Does the land you are on have a Covenant? Is there something you cannot do on the land?

8-3.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Unless you buy land from Linden Labs, you must buy land from a private person or group. Many times, private sims have Covenants that detail what can and cannot be built. Find a private sim or island that has land you are interested in. Does it have a Covenant? If so, could you agree to it?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 396 of 438

Land: About Land Land Objects LEVEL: 8 MODULE: LAND: ABOUT LAND – MISSION 2

8-3.2 Introduction One great reason people own land is to build and leave out objects! Understanding how many objects you can put out will help you make good building decisions – not only for yourself, but also for anyone else you allow to build on your land.

8-3.2.1 Instruction Objects are made up of prims. The number of prims you can have on a parcel of land depends on its size. For example, a 16 square meter area of land can support 3 prims. Here are some common parcel sizes and the number of prims they support: Area of land m2 512 1024 1536 2560 4608

Number of prims allowed

117 234 351 468 937

Unless you don’t allow building on your parcel, others will be able to leave objects on your land. Their objects will also count against your prim limit. If they put out objects containing many prims, they can rapidly use up your entire prim limit!

8-3.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Finding the number of primitives (prims) allowed on your land Objects are made up of prims (primitives). It’s important to consider if an object has a lot of prims when putting things out on your land!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 397 of 438

You can see how many primitives are on the parcel: About Land > Objects > Primitives parcel supports: TRY THIS NOW: Look to see how many primitives (prims) are on the parcel where you are located. How many are left to be used? Step 2: Finding out object owners Unless you have unchecked the building option (see Mission 3), other people may rez items on your land. They can use up your prims! This can be a big problem if you can’t find their item – if it is buried under the ground or is very small. You can easily see and return other people’s items by selecting the Name button. It will show all the owners of all objects on your parcel. TRY THIS NOW: Select the Name button and see who owns all the objects on your land. Step 3: Returning objects If you find objects that don’t belong on your land, you can return them easily. Using the Name button, select the name of the person who’s left objects on your land. A warning window will pop up asking you to confirm you want to return their objects. Select Yes. Note: ALWAYS take your time returning objects. If you accidentally return an object, you can’t undo the action! TRY THIS NOW: If you’ve discovered objects that aren’t yours, return them. Tip: If you want to have other peoples’ objects returned to them automatically, you can check Autoreturn and choose the number of minutes their objects will stay on your land. This is the way most sandboxes work!

8-3.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Do you own land? Would you like to make your land a sandbox for friends to use? Set a time on Autoreturn! (Your objects will not be returned.)

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 398 of 438

Land: About Land Managing Media LEVEL: 8 MODULE: LAND: ABOUT LAND – MISSION 3

8-3.3 Introduction Have you ever invited friends over to see a movie or listen to music? You can play music and video on land you own or rent in Second Life! It’s easy to set up. Let’s learn how.

8-3.3.1 Instruction Any music or video you would like played on your land must first be uploaded to the internet and have a URL address. The Media tab of your About Land window allows you to set URLs for both the music and video you would like to play on your land. Many internet radio stations have URLs you can use for music. If you know the URL, you can even let visitors listen to your favorite podcast! Videos must be in a Quicktime format. Usually videos that are Quicktime will have .mov at the end of their URL. ONE MORE THING: Make sure your computer has Quicktime installed to view video. (http://quicktimedownloads.com/) After installing, relog into Second Life to activate.

8-3.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Setting your Audio/Video preferences To actually hear and see music and video, you will need to set your Audio/Video preferences. Preferences > Audio/Video tab > Streaming Preferences TRY THIS NOW: Check both boxes to enable media streaming on your land. Close the Preferences window. You should now see music and video controls at the bottom of your screen. These will allow you and others to turn on/off, pause and control the volume of any media you set up. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 399 of 438

Step 2: Playing music on your land The About Land Media tab allows you to set URLs for both video and sound. Voice settings for your land may also be set from this tab. (See Voice module.) To set a music or podcast URL for your land, type the desired URL into the Music URL field. TRY THIS NOW: Put this URL into the Music URL field: http://pri.kts-af.net/redir/index.pls?esid=788246ff70d971482cbce8aaa426a88f&url_no=2 Now select the Play button on your music control. Can you hear it? Step 3: Playing video on your land To show video, you must enter a video URL. You must also select a texture that video will replace. Then, when you start your video controls, the video will replace that texture. Note: It’s best to choose a texture you aren’t using in any of your objects unless you want to make an entire wall or other object actually play your video! TRY THIS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

NOW: Rez a cube, stretch and flatten into a movie screen shape. Use Select Texture and texture just the front with Library > Textures > FloorTile6 In the About Land Media tab, drag that same texture onto the Replace this texture: window. Change the media URL to: http://blip.tv/file/get/Holy_meatballs-testDemo234.mov Check Auto scale content. Close the About Land window and select the start button from the video player. Your video might take a minute or two to load. Can you see and hear it?

8-3.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Media can entertain and inspire. It’s very powerful. Do you know of other Quicktime video URLs you could use that might teach someone something important? What about music podcast URLs? Take a moment and change your About Land Media settings to add one of each.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 8

GKCx - 400 of 438

Dedicated to our fathers.

GKCx by Jeremy Kemp, Stephen Kemp is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Noncommercial-Share Alike 3.0 United States License.

GKCx - 401 of 438

Global Kids' Second Life Curriculum LESSON PLANS â&#x20AC;&#x201C; LEVEL 9

Global Kids' Second Life Curriculum. Fall, 2007. ÂŠ2007.

GKCx - 402 of 438

TABLE OF CONTENTS

STANDARDS

Learning Standards addressed in this curriculum

COMMUNICATION: VOICE

Module Overview

9-1.0 Introduction 9-1.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 9-1.0.2 Action Plan

Setting Voice Preferences 9-1.1 Introduction 9-1.1.1 Instruction 9-1.1.2 Practice

Speaking With People Nearby 9-1.2 Introduction 9-1.2.1 Instruction 9-1.2.2 Practice 9-1.2.3 Action Plan

Using Voice to Instant Message 9-1.3 Introduction 9-1.3.1 Instruction 9-1.3.2 Practice 9-1.3.3 Action Plan

LAND: INTRODUCTION TO ESTATES

Module Overview 9-2.0 Introduction 9-2.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 9-2.0.2 Action Plan

Region Powers 9-2.1 Introduction 9-2.1.1 Instruction 9-2.1.2 Practice 9-2.1.3 Action Plan

Managing Lag 9-2.2 Introduction 9-2.2.1 Instruction 9-2.2.2 Practice 9-2.2.3 Action Plan

Ground Textures and Terrain 9-2.3 Introduction 9-2.3.1 Instruction 9-2.3.2 Practice 9-2.3.3 Action Plan

2 2 3

5 5 5 5

8 8 8 8 10

11 11 11 11 12

13 13 13 14

16 16 16 16 17

18 18 18 18 19

20 20 20 20 21

GKCx - 403 of 438

Estate Access 9-2.4 Introduction 9-2.4.1 Instruction 9-2.4.2 Practice 9-2.4.3 Action Plan

Estate Covenants 9-2.5 Introduction 9-2.5.1 Instruction 9-2.5.2 Practice 9-2.5.3 Action Plan

LAND: TERRAFORMING

Module Overview 9-3.0 Introduction 9-3.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module 9-3.0.2 Action Plan

22 22 22 22 23

24 24 24 24 25

26 26 26 27

Beginning to Terraform

9-3.1 Introduction 9-3.1.1 Instruction 9-3.1.2 Practice 9-3.1.3 Action Plan

28 28 28 30

Sculpting Land 9-3.2 Introduction 9-3.2.1 Instruction 9-3.2.2 Practice 9-3.2.3 Action Plan

Subdividing and Joining Land 9-3.3 Introduction 9-3.3.1 Instruction 9-3.3.2 Practice 9-3.3.3 Action Plan

31 31 31 31 32

33 33 33 33 34

GKCx - 404 of 438

Learning Standards addressed in this curriculum McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

GKCx - 405 of 438

Communication: Voice Module Overview LEVEL: 9 MODULE: COMMUNICATION: VOICE – OVERVIEW

9-1.0 Introduction The ability to actually hear someone’s voice is a wonderful Second Life tool. Voice is especially useful when you are trying to explain how to do something, or working together to create a common object. It’s a much quicker form of communication! However, using the voice feature is always a choice. You can choose to enable voice or leave it off. It’s up to you. In this module, you will learn how to set up (or enable) the voice feature and speak with other residents both near you and in other regions.

9-1.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Listening and Speaking – Uses listening and speaking strategies for different purposes - Adjusts message wording and delivery to particular audiences and for particular purposes (e.g., to defend a position, to entertain, to inform, to persuade) o Technology – Understands the relationships among science, technology, society, and the individual - Observes common courtesies and acceptable use policies while telecomputing o Working with Others – Displays effective interpersonal communication skills - Knows strategies to effectively communicate in a variety of settings settings (e.g., selects appropriate strategy for audience and situation) 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

GKCx - 406 of 438

POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Setting up (enabling) the voice feature o Hearing and speaking with residents close to you o Having a conversation with a resident that’s in another region or sim o Beginning a group conversation with residents that are in different locations You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Setting up your computer with your microphone and speaker o Setting up your Second Life preferences to enable voice o Speaking with other avatars near you o Having a distance conference call with other members of a group o Selecting a few friends and beginning a conference call

Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power)

o Levels 1-8

TERMS: VoIP: Voice over Internet Protocol. A way to have a phone conversation over the Internet.

MATERIALS: Item

Location

A VoIP headset/mic or a microphone and speakers on your computer.

N/A

Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules:

Note: While a headset/mic is not absolutely necessary, using one is highly recommended and will greatly reduce feedback echoes for both you and anyone with whom you are speaking.

9-1.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, let’s see if you’ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 407 of 438

TAKE ACTION: Speaking is different than communicating by typing. Speakers may be evaluated on the quality of their voice, rather than on their ideas. You may know someone for quite a long time in Second Life and be surprised when you hear his or her voice for the first time! Second Life offers the chance to appear as we are… or are not. But when we use our voices, we tell a little about our “real” selves. After having a few conversations with other avatars, what has surprised you about them? What was different between how they present themselves through avatar and typed chat, and how they appear through their voice? What do these differences tell you about him or her? What do they tell you about yourself and your own preconceived notions? Blog it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 408 of 438

Communication: Voice Setting Voice Preferences LEVEL: 9 MODULE: COMMUNICATION: VOICE â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 1

9-1.1 Introduction Have you ever been typing with someone in Second Life and just wanted to speak with him or her? Perhaps you need to explain something complicated, want to use a different language or are just tired of typing! You can speak with someone else in Second Life using the Voice feature! However, you must first set up your voice preferences so voice is enabled.

9-1.1.1 Instruction By default, voice is not enabled in Second Life. You cannot just log on and begin speaking. You must first choose a few options from the Voice tab in your Preferences window. Once you have those preferences set, you will be able to speak whenever you wish.

9-1.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Setting up your own computer preferences for voice Before you enable voice in Second Life, you must first check to see that your computerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s microphone and speaker preferences are correct. On a computer running Windows: o Open the Windows Control Panel o Open the Sounds and Audio Devices function o Select the Volume tab and make sure Mute is not checked and the volume is correct o Choose the correct audio devices from the dropdown Audio tab On a Mac: o Open System Preferences to Sound o In Output select the correct device to hear with and appropriate volume o In Input select the correct device to speak into and appropriate volume Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 409 of 438

Tip: Before you log into Second Life, make sure that: o Your headphones are already plugged in o Skype is not running. Skype seems to interfere with the voice feature in Second Life. Step 2: Enabling voice You can enable voice by changing some of your Preferences. You can open your Preferences from either the opening login screen button, or in-world, by selecting Edit > Preferences > Voice. TRY THIS NOW: Open your Preferences to the Voice tab. Step 3: Using the Voice Set Up Wizard Although you can select each voice option separately, the Voice Set Up Wizard will guide you through enabling voice for the first time. You can go back later and change different options at any time. TRY THIS NOW: Follow the Voice Set Up Wizard instructions: A) Select Yes, enable Voice Chat. Select Next. B) Select Hear Voice Chat from avatar position. This will allow you to hear the voices of avatars standing near you. C) Also select Start Viewer in Push-to-Talk mode. This will allow you to use either an in-world button control or a keyboard trigger when you want to speak with someone. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 410 of 438

That way, you can make sure you decide when you want everyone to hear you, and when you don’t. D) By default, the Middle Mouse Button is selected as a keyboard Push-to-Talk trigger. If you don’t use that kind of a mouse, or you want to use a different key, select the Set Key button and press the keyboard key you want to use. Tip: Select a keyboard key you do not usually use in normal typing chat! Select Next. E) Select the correct input (microphone) and output (speaker) devices from the drop down lists. If either your microphone or speakers don’t show, try relogging into Second Life with them already connected. F) Speak into your microphone to test the volume level and adjust using the sliders. Select Finish. Fantastic! You should be set up to begin speaking out loud in Second Life. Go to Mission 2 to learn how to speak with other avatars near your location.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 411 of 438

Communication: Voice Speaking With People Nearby LEVEL: 9 MODULE: COMMUNICATION: VOICE – MISSION 2

9-1.2 Introduction You’re all set up and ready to talk! Let’s go have a conversation!

9-1.2.1 Instruction When you type your chat with avatars nearby, you can see their chat clearly. No one is too “loud” or too “soft”. You can also easily see who said something to you. When you speak with other avatars nearby, you can adjust your voice level, and each individual avatar’s, so that everyone is heard as clearly as possible. Just like with text chat, you can be “heard” for a specific distance.

9-1.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Finding voice-enabled land Land owners have a choice whether they will allow voice on their land. If voice is allowed, you will see a voice icon at the top of your screen that looks like headphones within a blue circle. TRY THIS NOW: Make sure you are on land that is voice-enabled. Step 2: Find some other avatars! TRY THIS NOW: You can’t have a conversation with yourself! Find a few friends or friendly folks, text chat them and ask if they would be willing to speak using voice with you. Tip: Not everyone wants to, or can, use voice. Asking by using text chat first gives everyone a chance to agree.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 412 of 438

Step 3: Speak! Before you begin to speak, take a minute to notice the Speaking Indicator above each avatarâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s head. This little white dot indicates an avatar has voice enabled. When an avatar is speaking, the white dot is replaced with green waves. To begin speaking, hold down the Talk button at the bottom right of your screen. If you select the Lock icon next to it, you will be heard, even if you release the talk button. To Unlock the lock feature, just press it again. TRY THIS NOW: Push down the Talk button and speak to some other avatars near you! Step 4: Adjusting volume levels You may need to adjust either your volume level or the volume levels of each individual speaker. The Voice Intensity Indicator allows you to adjust volume levels. It also allows you to see who the active speaker is. TRY THIS NOW: Open the Voice Intensity Indicator and view the Active Speakers around you. The person listed at the top if the list is the current speaker. Adjust the volume slider so that each speaker is neither too loud nor too soft. You can also Mute a speaker if you wish. Try walking around a bit as you speak. Do you notice other speakers fading away as you move farther away? See how far you can stand from each other and still be heard. Step 5: Using Speech Gestures Sometimes, it can be difficult to see who exactly is speaking. However, you can activate Speech Gestures that will play when you are speaking. You can find Speech Gestures under: Inventory > Library > Gestures > Speech Gestures. You can activate them by double-clicking on each one and checking the Activate box at the bottom of the Gesture window. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 413 of 438

TRY THIS NOW: Activate a Speech Gesture and speak out loud. Do you like seeing your avatarâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s hands move? Do you think it helps others know when you are speaking? Activate other Speech Gestures if youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;d like.

9-1.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Find someone to speak with and ask them what is one thing they would like to change in the world, in their community, and whether there is a relationship between the two.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 414 of 438

Communication: Voice Using Voice to Instant Message LEVEL: 9 MODULE: COMMUNICATION: VOICE – MISSION 3

9-1.3 Introduction Have you ever wished you could tell someone about something you’re seeing or doing in Second Life? You can do more than type it as a text IM – you can speak it!

9-1.3.1 Instruction You can open a voice Instant Message (IM) to either an individual avatar or an entire group. Each person has the opportunity to accept or decline the call. If they do not currently have voice capability, the caller will be informed that they must use spatial (text) chat. Unlike text chats, you can only have one active voice chat at a time. If you are speaking to another avatar in front of you and open an IM voice chat, you will only be heard in one of your conversations. If you begin a group IM voice chat, everyone who participates will hear everyone else – like a party line or conference call!

9-1.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Voice IM one person You can invite a friend to a voice chat using: Communicate > Friends > IM/Call Select the Call option. They will receive an invitation to accept your call. Once they accept, use the Talk button and Voice Intensity window, just as if they are nearby no one else will hear you speaking to them. TRY THIS NOW: Using the Communicate button, see which friends are in-world. IM one of them and ask if they can take a voice call. When they say yes, use the Call button to begin a long distance voice chat! Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 415 of 438

Step 2: Calling a group You can invite an entire group to a voice chat using: Communicate > Groups > IM/Call Select the Call option. Each person in the group that is currently logged in will receive an invitation to Join Call. Just as with other Voice conversations, use the Talk button and Voice Intensity window. No one outside your conference call will hear you speaking. TRY THIS NOW: Use the Communicate button to select a group you belong to. Use the Call button to begin a long distance conference voice chat! Step 3: Calling a few friends You can also start a Conference call with a few friends who are not in the same group by multiselecting them in Communicate > Friends. To multi-select, hold down Ctrl and click on each person’s name. When everyone is selected, choose the IM/Call button and Call button to begin the call. TRY THIS NOW: Use the Communicate > Friends tab to multi-select a few friends. Select the IM/Call button and Call them!

9-1.3.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: Speaking is different from communicating by typing. Speakers may be evaluated on the quality of their voice, rather than on their ideas. You may know someone for quite a long time in Second Life and be surprised when you hear his or her voice for the first time! Second Life offers the chance to appear as we are… or are not. But when we use our voices, we tell a little about our “real” selves. After having a few conversations with other avatars, what has surprised you about them? What was different between how they present themselves through avatar and typed chat, and how they appear through their voice? What do these differences tell you about him or her? What do they tell you about yourself and your own preconceived notions? Blog it!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 416 of 438

Land: Introduction to Estates Module Overview LEVEL: 9 MODULE: LAND: INTRODUCTION TO ESTATES – OVERVIEW

9-2.0 Introduction Knowing just what you can do as an Estate Owner is important to understand before you have your own island or sim. Managing an estate takes all the About Land skills you have... and then adds a layer of additional abilities. When you have just a parcel of land, you can decide what can and cannot be done on your land. You can decide who has access and who is banned. You can also, to some extent, decide how you would like your land sculpted, or terraformed. As an estate owner, you make those same kinds of decisions, and more, for everyone who may rent or buy land on your sim! Although individual land owners and renters can change some things, YOU will make all important decisions for that sim or estate. You can also select Estate Managers to help you manage your estate. It's important to choose them wisely as, you will see, they have considerable power!

9-2.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing - Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice o Technology – Understands the relationships among science, technology, society, and the individual - Observes common courtesies and acceptable use policies while telecomputing o Geography – Place and Regions – Understands the concept of regions 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

GKCx - 417 of 438

o Life and Career Skills – Productivity and Accountability – Demonstrating diligence and a positive work ethic POWER-UP: (What you will learn) By the end of this module, you will have the following power(s): o Allowing flying, building and other characteristics for an entire region or estate o Allowing or disallowing scripts and other actions that can slow down performance o Changing the terrain texture and elevations o Controlling access to an estate o Determining rules for an estate You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Deciding which characteristics you would like other avatars to have on a region o Choosing to allow or disallow scripts, both generally and for individual avatars o Choosing how high and low the land and water elevations will be in a region o Choosing who will visit an estate and where they will land o Selecting voice, teleportation and other user experience options for your estate o Writing an estate covenant for residents to follow Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules: o Levels 1-8 MATERIALS: Items

Location

Terrain textures

Inventory > Library > Textures

TERMS: Estate: Privately owned or group-owned land. Usually a region or a collection of regions (sims). An estate has additional land management tools not available to other land owners.

9-2.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, let’s see if you’ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 418 of 438

If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: What if you had your own estate? As an estate owner, you have the ability to create a very powerful environment for people to experience. What is a global issue that deeply concerns you? Using all of your estate abilities, what kind of environment (natural and built objects) could you create that would inform and inspire visitors to make a change in their real lives? Create a project plan detailing what your estate would look like, how visitors would experience it, what visitors would learn and how they would learn it. You can use this plan to inspire others to get involved! Blog it and see if others are interested in helping you.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 419 of 438

Land: Introduction to Estates Region Powers LEVEL: 9 MODULE: LAND: INTRODUCTION TO ESTATES – MISSION 1

9-2.1 Introduction So, you are going to buy your own sim! Or maybe a friend has asked you to help manage their new estate. Either way, you will have a lot of new powers to learn and to use carefully. Managing an entire estate can be very exciting. You have the ability to change the environment in ways not available to other land owners. Your decisions will affect everyone who visits or lives on your sim. Even if you don’t currently have the opportunity to own or manage a region or estate, understanding these abilities will help you when you talk to landlords, work with estate owners or prepare yourself for the day you manage a region!

9-2.1.1 Instruction Many estate abilities are similar to those you have when owning just a parcel of land. However, your choices will apply to anyone who rents or buys land on your region. Let’s look at them now.

9-2.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: The Region/Estate window When you make decisions for a small parcel of land, you use the About Land window. Estates and Regions can be modified using the Region/Estate Window. You can open this window from the upper menu bar: World > Region/Estate

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 420 of 438

TRY THIS NOW: Open the Region/Estate window. Note: If you don’t currently own an estate, you might ask a friend to temporarily give you permission to view theirs. Step 2: Land abilities Many land abilities can be found in the Region tab of the Region/Estate window. Like smaller land parcels, you can choose to allow terraforming, flying, damage, pushing, and subdividing. However, you have additional abilities. Many of your new abilities have to do with other avatars. You can choose how many avatars are allowed on your region at one time. Most regions can hold at least 40 avatars, depending on how powerful the server is that is powering your sim. It’s best to set the number of avatars a little lower than what a region can handle. That way, you won’t overwhelm the server, causing the region to crash. You can also instantly teleport everyone off your region! Have you ever teleported to a new place and found yourself at a central location, called a telehub? An estate owner or manager can choose where everyone arrives. You can also choose to give a region an M (Mature) or PG rating (only on the main grid; in the Teen grid all sims are PG). The Region Tab allows you to send a message to everyone currently in that region. Have you ever received a message in a blue box in the upper right hand corner of your screen? Maybe you were told that the region was restarting or that a problem had been resolved. TRY THIS NOW: As you look at the Region tab, what choices would you make and why? How would that affect the experience of everyone visiting your region.

9-2.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Go to your favorite privately owned region and notice what privileges visitors have. You can see the icons indicating building, scripting, damage, etc at the top of your screen. Are these the abilities you would choose for your sim?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 421 of 438

Land: Introduction to Estates Managing Lag LEVEL: 9 MODULE: LAND: INTRODUCTION TO ESTATES – MISSION 2

9-2.2 Introduction Have you ever had an experience in Second Life where your avatar seemed sluggish and couldn’t really respond quickly? Most people refer to that as lag – a slowdown in performance. This can occur when either your computer or the one running your region of Second Life is overtaxed.

9-2.2.1 Instruction There are many causes of lag. Lag can occur when too many avatars are in the same region or when too many scripts are active. As an estate owner or manager, you can allow or disallow certain activities that are known to cause lag.

9-2.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: The Debug tab The Debug tab allows you to disable scripts, collisions and other physics actions that can use computer resources and cause lag. By not allowing those scripts, many people find they crash less frequently and have better performance. The downside is that all those great scripted gadgets everyone loves will not be able to work on your region. If you notice unusual lag in your region, it might be caused by a visitor bringing in a particular scripted object that is slowing down the entire region. One way to figure out where unexpected lag is coming from is to use the Choose Avatar or Get Top Scripts buttons to select just a specific avatar’s scripted objects or the scripted objects you suspect might be causing the most lag

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 422 of 438

TRY THIS NOW: Look at the Debug tab. What options would you choose to disable? How would they affect what you usually do in Second Life?

9-2.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Go to a private region that doesnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t allow scripts. You will notice a no script icon at the top of your screen. How does being there affect your experience? Why do you think the owner made that decision?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 423 of 438

Land: Introduction to Estates Ground Textures and Terrain LEVEL: 9 MODULE: LAND: INTRODUCTION TO ESTATES â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 3

9-2.3 Introduction Have you ever been to a region with steep mountains or deep lakes? What about areas that have really different looking land textures? The abilities to terraform and customize a region are some of the most powerful tools you have as an estate owner or manager.

9-2.3.1 Instruction You may remember that land parcel owners can only change the level of their land by 4 meters up or down. As an estate owner, you can allow major elevation changes. In addition, you can apply different textures to different areas and elevations in your region. You can have snowy mountaintops and sandy beaches â&#x20AC;Ś or the other way around!

9-2.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Ground textures Ground, or terrain, textures are applied to land in a region by both elevation and direction. The chosen textures are displayed in the Ground Textures tab from lowest to highest elevation. You can also set the elevations for the textures to appear in different parts of the region. Note: All textures must be 512 x 512, 24 bit .tga files. You can use the terrain textures you have in your Library or import your own.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 424 of 438

TRY THIS NOW: If you have the ability to change textures, try changing just the lowest terrain texture and see what happens. If you are just following along, what kinds of textures would you choose? Step 2: Changing terrain elevations Forget about digging little holes or making small hills. As an estate owner or manager, you can create mountain ranges! The Terrain tab lets you set various land features for an entire region. You can select how high and how low you raise or lower the land. You can also choose how high the water level will be. Leaving the water height alone will allow it to blend in with any water next to an island region. Have you ever been in a region where the sun never seems to set? You can also fix the sun using the fixed sun feature and sliding the sun slider to a specific time of day. This can make it always high noonâ&#x20AC;Ś or permanent midnight. But what if you have more than one island in your estate? Would you have to set it for EACH island? No need. Just click the Use Estate Sun box. NOTE: While you can set the sun in your sim, each user has the option to personally override it, shedding some light on your permanent midnight - but only for him or her! Finally, if you are using an outside application to make a RAW file showing the topography of your region, you can apply it here, using the Upload RAW terrain button. TRY THIS NOW: If you have the ability, try fixing the sun at a certain point in the sky. Also try changing the water level on your sim so that itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s 20 meters higher. What happened? Make sure to put in the original settings when you are done experimenting. If you are just following along, what choices would you make?

9-2.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Now that you understand how those mountains and deep lakes are made, visit a favorite mountainous region and look carefully at how the owner used both elevation and different textures to get that look.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 425 of 438

Land: Introduction to Estates Estate Access LEVEL: 9

MODULE: LAND: INTRODUCTION TO ESTATES â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 4

9-2.4 Introduction Who will visit your region? Just as with land options, you can choose to ban and allow certain avatars.

9-2.4.1 Instruction You can ban and allow individuals and groups, just like you can for smaller parcels of land. However, your decisions will affect everyone who rents or owns land on your estate! If your estate is large and covers many regions, your decisions will carry a lot of weight. You can also send a message to everyone in your entire estate, to announce that an event is about to begin. Finally, if you want to make an estate with a specific theme or purpose, you can put that in your Covenant for all owners and renters to agree to.

9-2.4.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: The Estate tab The Estate tab allows you to allow and disallow individuals and groups for your entire Estate, even if others have rented or bought land from you. Just like the About Land parcel controls, you can either allow specific groups or individuals or ban them. You donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t have to shoulder this responsibility all by yourself, however! If you are an estate owner, you can also select Estate Managers to help you. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 426 of 438

They have the ability to change estate settings also. Step 2: Global time Because large estates can contain many regions, you can also set the time and sun position for all the regions in your estate at the same time, by selecting the Use Global Time option. TRY THIS NOW: If you have the ability and are on an estate that is made up of more than one region, select the Use Global Time settings to reflect your favorite time of day. Now visit each of the regions to see that they are all on the same time. Step 3: Voice chat What is the experience you would like others to have while visiting your estate? Are people roleplaying or are they reflecting their real life personalities? Do you want to hear real life voices or only have people type their conversations? Selecting the Allow Voice Chat button will activate voice options for your entire estate. TRY THIS NOW: Choose to select or deselect the voice option. Step 4: Teleporting directly Are you creating a wonderful area for people to explore from a specific beginning point? What about an amazing venue for performing musicians? You wouldnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t want someone just appearing on stage during a performance! You can make sure that wonâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t happen by not selecting the Allow Direct Teleport button. Then, everyone will teleport to a specific place on your estate that you decide. TRY THIS NOW: Where is the best place for others to teleport to on your estate? Does it matter? Select or deselect the Allow Direct Teleport option.

9-2.4.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Find a region that is similar to the one you would like to create. Visit it and pay careful attention to the choices the owner made regarding voice, teleportation and access. Do those choices make sense for your project?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 427 of 438

Land: Introduction to Estates Estate Covenants LEVEL: 9 MODULE: LAND: INTRODUCTION TO ESTATES â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 5

9-2.5 Introduction If you want to make an estate with a specific theme or purpose, you can put that in the estate covenant for all owners and renters to agree to.

9-2.5.1 Instruction As with land parcel covenants, an estate covenant states rules and guidelines you would like everyone to follow on your estate, even if it contains many regions. For example, you can ask people to build using a certain style of architecture, or role-play from a specific historical time period.

9-2.5.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: The Covenant tab To make an estate covenant, you must first type your covenant on a notecard. Then, drag the notecard with your covenant onto the Covenant window to change the agreement. TRY THIS NOW: Whether or not you actually have an estate, create a notecard with a covenant you would want to have for your estate. If you actually do own an estate, drag that notecard out of your inventory into the Covenant window. What are some themed regions or estates you have visited? Have you ever viewed their Covenants? You can use the About Land tool to see what residents must agree to. Visit a themed region and see what the covenant is. Could you live with it?

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 428 of 438

9-2.5.3 Action Plan TAKE ACTION: What if you had your own estate? As an estate owner, you have the ability to create a very powerful environment for people to experience. What is a global issue that deeply concerns you? Using all of your estate abilities, what kind of environment (natural and built objects) could you create that would inform and inspire visitors to make a change in their real lives? Create a project plan detailing what your estate would look like, how visitors would experience it, what visitors would learn and how they would learn it. You can use this plan to inspire others to get involved! Blog it and see if others are interested in helping you.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 429 of 438

Land: Terraforming Module Overview LEVEL: 9 MODULE: LAND: TERRAFORMING – OVERVIEW

9-3.0 Introduction When you were young, did you ever dig in the sand or dirt with a toy tractor? You can do the same thing in Second Life if you have the land privileges to terraform, or sculpt, land. Whether you fancy making mountains, lakes or something in between, you can quickly and easily sculpt and change land in Second Life!

9-3.0.1 Learning Standards addressed in this module McRel Learning Standards: URL

⇒ http://www.mcrel.org/compendium/browse.asp

o Language Arts – Writing – Uses the stylistic and rhetorical aspects of writing- Uses a variety of techniques to convey a personal style and voice o Technology - Understands the relationships among science, technology, society, and the individual - Observes common courtesies and acceptable use policies while telecomputing o Geography – Understands global development and environmental issues Understands why policies should be designed to guide the use and management of Earth's resources and to reflect multiple points of view 21st Century Student Outcomes: URL

⇒

http://tinyurl.com/ys5fnx

o Learning and Innovation Skills – Creativity and Innovation

GKCx - 430 of 438

o Subdividing and joining parcels of land You will demonstrate your new powers by: o Flattening, raising, lowering, smoothing and roughening land o Dividing land into smaller parcels and joining parcels back together Do you have these powers already? Skip ahead to the ACTION PLAN section below. PREVIOUS KNOWLEDGE: (What you need to know to learn this power) Before learning this power, you need to have completed the following levels/modules:

TERMS: Terraform: The ability to sculpt land.

o Levels 1-8 MATERIALS: Item

Location

Land you can terraform Plants, and natural objects

Your own land, or group land on which you have terraforming privileges. Inventory > Library

9-3.0.2 Action Plan Before you begin any missions, let’s see if you’ve already developed any of these powers. If you can complete the following activity successfully, you can skip this module! If not, complete the missions and learn how to do it. TAKE ACTION: What is one natural environment you think should be conserved… a wetland, desert or woodland area? Design your own in Second Life using your new terraforming skills. The Library in your Inventory contains many plants, grasses, flower and trees that can be used. It also has rocks and many textures you could use to make natural looking items. If you are not on land that is near sea level, you can even create water using textures and other items in your Library!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 431 of 438

Land: Terraforming Beginning to Terraform LEVEL: 9 MODULE: LAND: TERRAFORMING â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 1

9-3.1 Introduction In Second Life, you can sculpt, or Terraform, your land without ever picking up a shovel or breaking a sweat! You can also try out different landscaping ideas any time you choose.

9-3.1.1 Instruction The ability to terraform your land allows you to create environments that compliment your buildings or other objects. You can make a pond, hill, or almost any other landscaping feature you can imagine. While the terraforming tools are very easy to use, there are a few tricks that will make your land sculpting even easier.

9-3.1.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Find some land to terraform You have permission to terraform on land that: a) You own b) Is owned by a group you are in. You also must have a group ability that gives you terraforming power. If you donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t own land, try asking a friend if they will allow you to practice on their land. The owner can check Edit Land under About Land options, giving you (and anyone else) terraforming abilities. TRY THIS NOW: Find some land you can terraform. Step 2: Editing land

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 432 of 438

You edit land using controls in the Land Edit window. You can open it two ways. a) the pie menu Pie Menu > Edit Terrain b) the Tools drop-down menu Tools > Select Tool > Land You will see your cursor turn into a little bulldozer. TRY THIS NOW: Open the Land Edit window.

Step 3: Selecting land to terraform To terraform land, you select two things: a) What you want to do: (ex: Flatten) b) How much land you want to affect: (ex: Small, Medium or Large) NOTE: If you do not select the size, your choice might affect the entire parcel of land! TRY THIS NOW: Select the Flatten Land radio button and the Small size. (Make sure you actually click on the word â&#x20AC;&#x153;Smallâ&#x20AC;?.) Now position your cursor over the land you wish to flatten and click. You will see a square of little dots over the area of land you are changing. Tip: Flatten Land is a great tool to use when you need to set out a building or other flatbottomed structure. Step 4: Reverting land If you wish to start over, you can choose the Revert Land button. However, the land will revert to its original state. This is the state it was in when the land was first created!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 433 of 438

TRY THIS NOW: If you are willing to live with any unexpected results, select the Revert Land button and size (Small, Medium, Large), click the ground, and see what happens!

9-3.1.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Do you have a small building you would like to put out? Use the Flatten Land feature to make a nice spot for it.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 434 of 438

Land: Terraforming Sculpting Land LEVEL: 9 MODULE: LAND: TERRAFORMING â&#x20AC;&#x201C; MISSION 2

9-3.2 Introduction Time to make holes and hills! Using the terraform tools, you can make park-like landscapes or rugged craggy wilderness. Can you imagine putting your cabin in the midst of a mountain hideaway or your skyscraper in a business park? Or vice versa! Now you can.

9-3.2.1 Instruction The sculpting tools in the Land Edit window allow you to lower and raise the level of your land. Usually, you will be able to change the land elevation by about 4 meters either way. You can also smooth out or roughen the land to look bumpier. This can be a fast way of adding a more naturalistic feel to a place. Do you want a more refined or wilder look?

9-3.2.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Raising and lowering land The Raise Land and Lower Land buttons work just like the Flatten Land button you learned about in the last mission. First you select the button. Then you also select the size of land you want to affect. Remember: If you donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t select a size, your action will affect the entire parcel! TRY THIS NOW: Select the Raise Land button and the Small size and click on the ground a few times to make a small hill. Now select the Lower Land button and Small and lower the hill back down. Do you notice that you can only make a small hill? Only owners of an entire estate or sim have the ability to make mountains. Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 435 of 438

Tip: If your land parcel is almost at sea level, a hole will probably be filled with water! You will have an instant pond or lake. Step 2: Smoothing land Did you notice that when you lowered your hill back down it might not have seemed quite the same? You can use the Smooth Land button to smooth out those little rough edges or bumps that seems to be left. TRY THIS NOW: Select Smooth Land and Small and click around on the area you used to make and lower the hill. You can also click and drag your mouse around to help smooth the area. Tip: When you in Land Edit mode, the land will appear to be a different color. It can be difficult to see the changes you are making. After a few changes, take a minute to view the land out of Edit mode to see the progress of your work. Step 3: Roughening land If you are looking for a more natural and wilder look, you can use the Roughen Land button. It will add random small bumps to your landscape. TRY THIS NOW: Select Roughen Land and Small and click and drag your mouse over a small area of land. Do you see it begin to look rougher? Note: Although you can raise, lower, smooth and roughen land, you cannot dig a tunnel or cave. However, you can make a cave or tunnel by digging a hole and placing rock-like prims over it.

9-3.2.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: Do you need to tidy up your digging a bit? Take a few minutes to smooth or fill in your holes.

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 436 of 438

Land: Terraforming Subdividing and Joining Land LEVEL: 9 MODULE: LAND: TERRAFORMING – MISSION 3

9-3.3 Introduction What if you wanted to play different music or movies on different parts of your land? What if you wanted to charge admission or only let people land in a certain spot. You can do that by subdividing your land!

9-3.3.1 Instruction You can subdivide your land into many smaller parcels using the Land Edit window tools. You can also join these parcels back together. When your land is subdivided, you can make decisions about one parcel that won’t affect the other parcels.

9-3.3.2 Practice TRY THIS: Step 1: Subdividing land Land can be subdivided into parcels as small as 4 x 4 meters (16 sq. m.). To subdivide a parcel, select the Subdivide button in the Land Edit window and drag your cursor over the part you’d like subdivided. You will see a dialog box asking to confirm your choice. Click OK. TRY THIS NOW: Select the Subdivide button and drag your cursor over a small area of your land. Click OK to subdivide your land. Step 2: Viewing subdivided land

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 437 of 438

If you turn on View Property Lines, you will see your smaller parcel along with the rest of your land. View > View Property Lines TRY THIS NOW: View your subdivided parcel Step 3: Joining land If you buy an adjacent piece of land or just want to join two parcels together, you can use the Join button. Select Join and then drag your cursor from one parcel to the other. A dialog box will appear asking if you really want to join the parcels. Click OK. TRY THIS NOW: Use the Join button and join the two parcels you previously subdivided.

9-3.3.3 Action Plan SHOWING OFF YOUR NEW POWER: What is one natural environment you think should be conservedâ&#x20AC;Ś a wetland, desert or woodland area? Design your own in Second Life using your new terraforming skills. The Library in your Inventory contains many plants, grasses, flower and trees that can be used. It also has rocks and many textures you could use to make natural looking items. If you are not on land that is near sea level, you can even create water using textures and other items in your Library!

Global Kids Professional Development Curriculum - Level 9

GKCx - 438 of 438

Dedicated to our fathers.

GKCx by Jeremy Kemp, Stephen Kemp is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Noncommercial-Share Alike 3.0 United States License.